IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
<9
1.0
I.I
l^m |2.5
itt m 12.2
ui lift
^ US, 12.0
I
1.8
|l.25 ||.4 |i.6
« 6"
►
^
'/]
y,.
%
>
'^>
/^
'^
'/
\j
Hiotographii
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80
(716) 872-4503
r^^
l\
iV
:\
\
%
>y
is
""k
A.
<"
^
%
^^
h ^
l^<\
y ::
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiquas
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notes techniques et bibliographiques
The Institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
D
D
n
D
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur
|~~1 Covers damaged/
Couverture endommagie
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurie et/ou pellicu!6e
|~~1 Cover title missing/
Le iitre de couverture manque
I j Coloured maps/
Cartes g6ographiques en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
□ Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
Reli^ avec d'autres documents
Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
La re liure serr6e peut causer de I'cri^bre ou de la
distortion le long de la marge int6rieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas 6ti filmies.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppldmentaires;
The
tot
L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exempiaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du
poirvt de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduito, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la mithode normale de filmage
sont indiqu6s ci-dessous.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagies
Pages restored and/or laminated/
Pages restauries et/ou pellicul6es
Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages d6color6es, tachet^es ou piqu6es
Pages detached/
Pages ddtachdes
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of print varies/
Qualiti indgale de i'impression
Includes supplementary material/
Comprend du matdriel suppl^mentaire
The
pes
oft
film
Ori(
beg
the
sion
othi
first
sion
oril
I I Only edition available/
The
shall
TINl
whic
Map)
diffei
entir(
begir
right
requi
meth
Seule 6dition disponible
Pages wholly or partially obscured by erra;a
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totaiement ou partleiiement
obscurcies par un feuiilet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont 6t^ filmdes d nouveau de fapon d
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est filmi au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous.
10X 14X 18X 22X
26X
v/
12X
m
20X
24X
28X
32X
plaire
Bs details
iques du
nt modifier
xiger une
de filmage
Th« copy film«d h«r« hat b««n raproducvd thanks
to tha ganarosity of:
Library Division
Provincial Archives of British Columbia
Tha imagaa appaaring hara ara tha bast quality
posslbia consldaring tha condition and laglbllity
off tha original copy and in kaaping with tha
filming contract spacifications.
L'axamplaira ffilmA ffut raprodult grica k la
ginirositA da:
Library Division
Provincial Archives of British Columbia
Las imagaa sulvantas ont 4t* raprodultas avar la
plus grand suin. compta tanu da la condition at
da la nartatA da l'axamplaira film*, at mn
conformity avac las conditions du contrat da
filmaga.
quies
Original coplas In printad papar covars ara filmad
baginning with tha front covar and anding on
tha last paga with a printad or illustratad impras-
sion, or tha back covar whan appropriata. Ail
othar original copias ara filmad baginning on tha
first paga with a printad or illustratad impras-
sion, and anding on tha last page with a printed
or illustratad impression.
Las axamplairas originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimis sont filmis en commen^ant
par la premier plat at en terminant soit par ia
darnlAre paga qui comporta une empreinte
d'impresslon ou d'illustratlon. soit par la second
plat, selon le cas. Tous las autras axemplaires
originaux sont fllmis en commengant par la
premiere page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impresslon ou d'illustratlon et en terminant par
ia derniire page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON-
TINUED "K or the symbol V (meaning "END "I.
whichever applies.
Un des symboies suivants apparaitra sur la
derniire image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbole — ► signifie "A SUIVRE". le
symbols y signifie "FIN".
aire
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
Les cj.'lea. planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre
filmis A des taux de reduction diffirents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre
reproduit en un seul clichi, il est fiimi A partir
de Tangle supirieur gauche, de gauche A droite.
et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre
d'images nicessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la mithode.
by errata
ned to
ent
une pelure,
a^on d
1
2
3
32X
, .t
2
3
4
5
6
\
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES OF AMERICA
NORTH OF MEXICO.
wr
J. AV. POWrELL.
7 E.-H 1
9
\,..'^
I
CONTENTS.
Nomenclature of linguistic families
Literature relating to the classification of Indian languages.
Linguistic map
Indian tribes sedentary
Population
Tribal land
Village sites
Agricultural land . . .
Hunting claims
Summary of deductions
Linguistic families ',
Adaizan family
Algonquian family
Algonquian area
Principal Algonquian tribes
Population.
Athaimscan family
Boundaries
Northern group
Pacific group
Southern group
Principal tribes
Population
Attaca|}an family
Beothukan family ,
Geographic distribution
Caddoan family
Northern group
Middle group
Southerr group
Principal tribes
Population
Chimakuan family
Princi]>al tribes
Chimarikan family
Principal tribes
Chimmesyau family
Principal tribes or villages
Population
Chinookan family
Principal trilies
Population
Pane.
13
2S
30
88
40
40
41
4S
44
45
45
47
47
48
48
51
53
53
53
54
55
55
56
57
58
58
60
60
60
61
63
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
65
66
66
LinguiHtic fnniilittH — C'oiitiniirtl.
Chitiniiichun family
(JhiiiUHMhan family
Population
Oonhuiltflcan family
Principal tribw
Copt^han family
U«N)KTaphic liiHtrilmtion .
CONTKNTS.
Vnge.
6«
07
(W
m
00
00
00
Principal tribtw 70
OoHtanoan family 70
(Ifonraphio (listribiition 71
Population 71
Elakimauan family 71
(jtH)Kr»phic diHtribution 72
Princi|>al tril)eB and Tillaged 74
Population 71
EHHi'k'iiinn family 75
Inxpioian family 70
(Iwigrapliic diHtribution 77
Princi|>al triliCH 70
Population 70
Kala|NH)ian family 81
Principal tribes 82
Population 83
Karankawan family 83
Kcrraan family 83
VillagPH 83
Population 8;^
Kiowan family 84
Population 84
Kitunahan family 85
Trilies ai
Population 85
KoluHchan family 85
Tribes 87
Population 87
Kulana]tan family
(leographic distribution
Trilios
Kusan family
Triliea
Population
Lutuamian family
Tribes
Population ,
Mari|M)t«n family
Geographic distribution
Tribes
Population
Moquelumnan family
Oeographic distribution
Principal tribes
Population
87
88
88
80
80
80
80
00
00
00
01
01
01
03
0»
03
CONTENTS.
Fag*.
Li.iKuixtic. ratiiili)>H— Continued.
MuHkhoKvun fuiiiily 94
OuDKruplihs iliHtrilmtion 04
Prim^iiml trilx'H OB
I>(>{iulati(>n on
Miit(!lu!HAn rainily 9B
l'i-in(;i|)ul trilx-H 07
Population 97
Palailuiiimn family 07
(Ittoxraphic iliHtrilmtion 98
Principal trilM)H 08
Pinian family 08
Priniiipal tribeti 00
Po|)ulation 00
Pujuiian family 09
Oeographic diRtribution 100
Principal trilKM lOO
Quoratoan family lOO
Geographic distribution lOl
Trills 101
Population loi
Balinan family 101
Population 103
SaliHlian family 103
Oeographic dlHtribution 104
Principal triln's 104
Population 105
Santean family 105
Oeographic distribution iQfl
Shahaptian family luo
Geographic distribution 107
Princi(>al tribes and population 107
Shoshonean family 108
Geographic distribution 100
Princi|)al tribes und population no
Siouan family Ill
Geographic distribution 113
Principal tribes 114
Population no
Skittagetan family us
Geographic distribution 180
Principal tribes 130
Population 131
Takilman family 131
Geographic distribution 181
Tafioan family 181
Oeographic distribution 138
Population 183
Timuquanan family 188
Oeographic distribution 183
Principal tril)cs 184
Tonikan family 185
Geographic distribution 185
O C0NTKNT8.
Linguiiitio fniiiilioH — CnntinufHi.
Tonkawiin family ISA
(UH)Krttplilc dlHtribution Via
Uclinnii fnmily 186
G<M>Krn|ihi(; diatriliution 186
Population 187
AVoiilatpiian family 137
G«<(>Kr<ipl>io diatritmtion 137
Principal trilwi 137
Population 138
Wakaahan family 138
^ (iiHiKraphic diHtribution 18()
Principal Aht tribcH 18()
Population 130
Princi|>al Ha*>lt7,uk tril)oH 181
Population lai
Wnahoan family litl
WnitHiwkan family 181
UeoKraphic diatribiition 133
TriliM 183
Wishoskon family 133
OeoKraphio diHtribution 133
Trilies liW
Yakonan family 183
Ucographic distribution 184
Tril)e8 134
Population 185
Yanan family 135
OeoKraphic diatrihution 135
Yukian family 185
Geographic diatribution 186
Yuman family 186
Oeograpliic diatribution 187
Principal tribea 138
Population 188
Zuflian family . . . 188
OeoKraphic diatribution 189
Population 189
Concluding reniarka 139
ILLUSTRATION.
Plate I. Map. Linguistic stocka of North America north of Mexico,
pocket at end of volume
In
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
By J. W. Powell.
NOMENCLATURE OF LINOUI3TIC FAMILIES.
The lan^fuiif^os sjiokoii by tho inc-Coliunbiftn trihoH of North Amer-
ica woi'o mimy iiiid (livcirw). Into tlio rej^ioiiH occupied by tlinse tribes
triivolorH, traders, and niiHsionarieH have penetrated in a<lvanco
of civilization, and civilization itHelf Idih marched acroHH the conti-
nent at a rapid rate, Under thoHO conditions the langna^es of the
various tribes have received much study. Many extensive works
have been published, embracing K>'iii"i»<>'i'^ 'i'»(l dictionaries ; but a
far fjreater number of minor vociabularies have been collected and
very many have been published. In addition to these, the Bible,
in whole or in part, and various religious books and school books,
have been translated into Indian tongues to be used for purposes of
instruction ; and newspapers have been published in the Indian lan-
guages. Altogether the literature of these languages and that re-
lating to them are of vast extent.
While the materials seem thus to be abundant, the student of
Indian languages finds the subject to bo one requiring most thought-
ful consideration, difficiiltios arising from the following conditions:
(1) A groat number of linguistic stocks or families are discovered.
(2) The boundaries between the different stocks of languages are
not immediately a])pareut, from the fact that many tribes of diverse
stocks have liad more or less ivssociation, and to some extent linguis-
tic materials have been borrowed, and thus have passed out of the
exclusive jwssession of cognate peoples.
(."}) Where many ))eoples, each few in number, are thrown to-
gether, an intertribal language is developed. To a large extent this
is gesture spoi-ch ; but to a limited extent useful and important
words are adoj)ted by various tribes, and out of this material an
intertribal " jargon " is established. Travelers and all others who
do not thoroughly study a language are far more likely to acquire
this jargon spcscch than the real speech of the peojilo ; and the tend-
ency to ba.so relationship upon such jargons has led to confusion.
7
8
INDIAN LINOIIIHTU1 KAMIMKH.
(4) TliiH tttniloncy tn l\w itHtiv)iliHlim*<iit of intortrihnl jargons
wiiH xroiitly ivToltinitoil <m tlio iidvoiit of thci wliito iimn, for thoro)>y
iimiiy trilxtH worn i)Uh1io(1 from thoir aiictrntriil lioiiieHiiml tril>oHw»>ro
inixtMl with trilwH. Ah ii r«'siilt, now roliitioim and now induHtriiiH,
(mpcciiilly of triiiU*. w«ro uKtiililiHhoil, und tlio now iwHoriiitionH of
triht) with triho itM<l of tlio IiidiimH with KuropounH iod vnry ofton
to tli«t di)velo|iniont of (|iutt< ohihorutti jtirf^on Iiiiikoiik'*^. All of
tlioHohiivoH tondoncy to coniplioato thu Htiidy of tho Indian tonguoH
by coni|)iirutivo ini'tiwxlH.
Tho diflicnltioH iidu<ront in tlio Htudy of lunginiKeH, togotlior with
tlio ini|H)rfoct nuitorial and tho complicating conditionH that havo
ariHon hy tho Hproad of civilization ovur tlio country, ooinbiiio to
inako tho proldein ono not readily Holvod.
In viow of tho amount of niatorial on hand, tlioc(miparativo study
of tho languagoH of North Amorica liaH boon Htraiigoly nogluctod,
though porhapH this is oxplained by roaNon of tho dilHcultioH which
havo boon pointed out. And tho attoiiiptH which havo boon niado to
chiHsify thorn has given riso t«) much confimion, for tho fcdlowing
reasons : First, later authors havo not properly recognized tho work
of earlier laborers in tho field. Second, the attempt has more fre-
quently been made to establish an ethnic classification than a lin-
guistic classification, and linguistic characteristics havo been con-
fused with biotic peculiarities, arts, habits, customs, and other human
activities, so that radical diflrereiices of language havo often been
ignored and slight dilTerences have been hold tf> be of primary value.
The attempts at a classification of these languages and a corre-
sponding classification of races have led to the development of a
complex, mixed, and inconsistent synonymy, which must first bo
unraveled and a selection of standard names made therefrom ac-
cording to fixed principles.
It is manifest that until proper rules are recognized by scholars
the establishment of a determinate nomenclature is impossible. It
will therefore bo well to sot forth the rules that havo hero boon
ado))ted, together with brief reasons for the same, with the hope
that they will commend themselves to the judgment of other per-
sons engaged in researches relating to the languages of North
America.
A fixed nomenclature in biology has been found not only to bo
advantageous, but tobea prerequisite to progress in research, as the
vast multiplicity of facts, still ever accumulating, would otherwise
overwhelm the scholar. In philological classification fixity of
nomenclature is of corresponding importance; and while the anal-
ogies between linguistic and biotic classification are quite limited,
many of the principles of nomenclature which biologists have
adopted having no application in philology, still in some important
particulars tho requirements of all scientific classifications are alike,
romai.i„\
LAW OK IMUOUITV.
anil tliniiKh miiiiy of tint noinxnclittural poiiitH mot with in biology
will nut (iccur in philology, houio of thoin <lu occur unil nniy !>*•
Kovi'riiHil hy tlio Himitt riiUm.
I'orhupHun idiuil noinoni^liitiint in biology may Homo timo b*< cHtiib-
IIhIuuI, liH attcinptH bavo boon miulc to oHtabliNli Hncb a HyHtom in
cboniiHiry; and pimsibly Mucb an idoal HyHtoni may ovontually bo
oHtabliHJioil in philology. Ko that aH it may, tho timo liaH not yot
como ovon for its HUggoHtion. What Ih now ni>odod in a rulo of Homo
kind loading HiOiolai'H toUHo thoHamotorniH for tho samo tliingH, anil
it would Hooni to mattor littlo in tho cano of linguiHtic stookn what
tho nomonidaturo in, providod it boi-omoHiionotivo and univornal.
In troating of tho langiuigoH of North Amorica it ban boon sug-
goHtod that tho namoH adoptod Hhoiild l)o tho namoH by whioh tho
poo|)lo roitognizo thomnolvoH, but thin in a nilo of im|ioHHiblo appli-
cation, for wlioro tho brandutH of a Htook divorgo vory gnuitly no
common nanio for th<» pooplo can bo found. Again, it hiiH boon nug-
gontod that nainim which aro to go p<trmanontly into Hcionco Hhonlil
bo Himplo and ouphonic. Thin alno in impoHnible of application, for
Himplicity and ouphony aro largoly (juostionH of personal tanto, and
lio who has studiod nuiiiy languagos Iohoh spoodily IiIh idioHyncraHios
of likes and diHlikes and loarns that wordn foreign to Iuh vocabulary
aro not necossarily barbaric.
BiulogiBta havo decided that he who iirHt distinctly characterizes
and namoH a species or other group shall thereby cause tho name
thus used to become permanently affixed, but under certain conditions
adapted to a growing science which is continually revising its classi-
fications. This law of priority may well bo adopted by philologists.
By the application of the law of jiriority it will occasionally hap-
pen that a name must bo taken which is not wholly unobjectionable
or which could bo much improved. But if names may be modified
for any reason, the extent of change that may bo wrought in this
maimer is unlimited, and such modifications would ultimately
become equivalent to the introduction of new names, and a fixed
nomenclature would thereby be overthrown. Tho rule of priority
has therefore been adoptod.
Permanent biologic nomenclature dates from tlie time of LinnsBus
simply because this great naturalist established the binominal sys-
tem and placed scientific classification upon a soxmd and enduring
Ijfisis. As Linnanis is to be regarded as the founder of biologic
classification, so Gallatin may be considered the founder of syste-
matic philology relating to the North American Indians. Before
his time much linguistic work had been accomplished, and scholars
owe a lasting debt of gratitude to Barton, Adelung, Pickering, and
others. But Gallatin's work marks an era in American linguistic
science from tho fact that he so thoroughly introduced comparative
methods, and because ho circumscribed the boundaries of many
k
10
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
families, so that a large part of bis work remiviiis and is still to be
considered sound. There is no safe renting i)lace anterior to Galla-
tin, because no scholar prior to his time had properly adopted com-
parative methods of research, and because no scholar was privileged
to work with so lar"e a body of material, It must further be said
of Gallatin that lie had a very clear conception of the task ho was
performing, and brought to it both learning and wisdom. Gallatin's
work has therefore been taken as the starting point, back of whicli
we may not go in the historic consideration of the systematic phi-
lology of North America. The point of departure therefore ui the
year 18;5G, when Gallatin's "Synopsis of Indian Tribes" appeared
in vol. 2 of the Transactions of the American Anti(piurian Society.
It is believed that a name shouhl be simply a deaotive word, and
that no advantage can accrue from a (hiscriptive or connotive title.
It is therefore desirable to have the names as simple as jiossible,
consistent with other and more important considerations. For this
reason it has been found impracticable to recognize as family names
desljni. Lions based on several distinct terms, such as doscrij)tive
phrases, and words conip(nuided from two or more geographic names.
Such phrases anu lomptnuul words have been rejected.
There are many linguistic families in North America, and in a
number of them there are many tribes speaking divei'se languages.
It is important, therefore, that Sv)me form should "he given to the
family name by wliich it may be distinguished from the name of a
single tribe oi language. In many cases some one language within
a stock has been taken as the type and its name giveii to the entire
family; so that the name of a language and that of the stock to
which it belongs are identical. This is inconvenient and leads to
confusion. For such reasons it has been decided to give each family
name the termination '"an" or "ian."
Conforming to the principles thus eiuinciated, the following rules
have l)een formulated:
I. The law of t)riority relating to the nomenclature of the s^ j-
tematic philology of tho North American tribes shall not
extend to authors v.hose works are of date anterior to the
year 1830.
II. Tne name origiK-iUy given l.\v the founder of a linguistic
group to designate it as a family or stock of languages shall
be permanently retained to the exilusion of all others.
III. No family name shall be recognized if composcnl of more
than (me word.
• IV. A family name once established shall not bo canceled in any
subse<pient division of the grou]), buf shall Ih* retained in a
restricted sense for one of its constituent portions.
V. Family names shall be distinguished as such liy the termina-
tion "an" or "iau."
' » '
POWELL.]
RULES (W NOMENCLATURE.
11
' , >
VI. No name shall be accc d for a linguistic family unless used
U) (losignato a tribe or group of tribes as a linguistic stock
yil. No family name sli.all be accepted unless there is given the
habitat of tribe or tribes to which it is applied.
VIII. The original orthography of a name shall bo.rigidly preserved
except as provided for in rule iii. and unless a typographical
error is evident.
The terms " family " and " stock " are here applied interchangeably
to a group of languages that are supposed to be cognate.
A single language is called a stock or family when it is not found
to be cognate with any other language. Languages are said to be
cognate when such relations V)etweon them are found that they are
supposed to have descended from a common ancestral speech. The
evidence of cognation is derived exclusively from the vocabulary.
Grajninatic similarities are not supposed to furnish evidence of
cognation, but to bo phenomena, in part relating to stage of culture
and in part .adventitious. It must be remembered that extreme
peculiarities of gr.ammar, like the vocal mutations of the Hebrew
or the monosyllabic separation of the Chinese, have not been dis-
cover(!d among Iiidian tongues. It therefore becomes necessary in
the classification of Indian languages into families to neglect gram-
matio structure, and to consider lexical elements only. But this
statement must be clearly understood. It is postulated that in the
growth of languages new words are formed by combination, and-
that these new words change by attrition to secure economy of iitter-
ance, and also by assimilation (analogy) for economy of thought.
In the comparison of languages for the purposes of systematic phi-
lology it often becomes necessary to dismember comp(ninded words
for the purpose of comparing the more primitive forms thus
obtained. The paradigmatic words considered in gramraatic trea-
tises may often bo the very words which shoidd be dissected to dis-
cover in their eleinents primary affinities. But the comparison is
still lexic, not grammatic.
A lexic comparison is between vocal elements; a grammatic com-
parison is between grammatic methods, siich, for example, as gender
systems. The classes into which things are relegated by distinction
of gender may be animate and inanimate, and the animate may
subseipiently be divided into male and female, and these two classes
may ultimately absorb, in part at least, inanimate things. The
growth of a system of genders may take another course. The ani-
m.ato find inanimate may be subdivided into the standing, the sitting,
and the lying, or into the moving, the erect and the reclined; or,
Dtill further, the superjiosed classification may be based upon the
8up])osed constitutiou of tilings, as the fleshy, the woody, the rocky,
the earthy, the watery. Thus the number- of genders may increase,
while further on in the history of a language the genders may
n
INDIAN LINOUI8TIC FAMILIES.
i
decrease so as almost to disappear. All of these characteristics arein
part adventitious, but to a large extent tlie gender is a phenomenon
of growth, indicating the stage to which the language has attsiined.
A proper case system may not have been established in a language
by the fixing of case particles, or, having been established, it may
change by the increase or diminution of tlie number of cases. A
tense system also has a beginning, a growth, and a decadence. A
mode system is variable in the various stages of the history of a
language. In like manner a pronominal system undergoes changes.
Particles may be prefixed, infixed, or affixed in compounded words,
and wJiich one of these methods will finally prevail can be deter-
mined only in the later stage of growth. All of these things are
lield to belong to the grammar of a language and to be grammatic
methods, distinct from lexical elements.
With terms tlius defined, languages are supposed to be cognate when
fundamental similarities are discovered in their lexical elements.
Wlien the members of a family of languages are to be classed in
subdivisions and the history of such languages investigated, gram-
matic characteristics become of primary im^iortance. The words of
a language change by the methods described, but the fundamental
elements or roots are more enduring. Grammatic methods also
change, perhaps even more rapidly than worsts, and the changes
may go on to such an extent that primitive methods are entirely
^lost, there being no radical grammatic elements to be preserved.
Grammatic structure is but a phage or accident of growth, and not
a primordial element of language. The roots of a language are its
most permanent characteristics, and wh'ile the words which are
formed from them may change so as to obscure their elements or in
S01B3 cases even to lose them, it seems that they are never lost from
all, but can be recovered in large part. The grammatic structure
or plan of a language is forever changing, and in this respect the
language may become entirely transformed.
LITERATURE RELATING TO THE CLASSIFICATION OF INDIAN
LANGUAGES.
While the literature relating to the languages of North America
is very extensive, tliat which relates to their classification is mucli
less extensive. For the benefit of future students in this line it is
thought best to present a concise account of sucli literature, or at
least so much as has been consulted in the preparation of this paper.
1836. (}allatin (Albert).
A synoiwi.s of tli(> Iti<lian tribes within tlie United States cast of the R(X'ky
Mountains, and in the Hritish and Russian , '^sessions in North America,
In Transactions anil ('olleetions of the Aniciican Anti(iuarian Society
(Archiuolonia Americana) Cambridge, IHiiO, vol. a.
The larger part of the volume consists of Gallatin's pajjer. A
short chapter is devoted to general observations, including certain
POWCLL.]
U NO tr ISTIC MTKK ATIT UE,
m
historical data, and the remainder to the discussion of linguistic
material and tlie affinities of the various tribes mentioned. Vocabu-
laries of many of the families are appended. Twenty-eight lin-
guistic divisions are recognized in tlie geudral table of the tribes.
Some of these divisions are purely geographic, such as the tribes of
Salmon River, Queen Charlotte's Island, etc. Vocabularies from
these localities were at hand, but of their linguistic relations the
author was not sufficiently assured. Most of the linguistic families
recognized by Gallatin were defined with much precision. Not all
cf his conclusions are to be accepted in the presence of the data now
at hand, but usually they were sound, as is attested by the fact that
they have constituted the basis for much classificatory work since
his time.
The primary, or at least the ostensible, purpose of the colored map
which accompanies Gallatin's paper was, as indicated by its title,
to show the distribution of the tribes, and accordingly their names
appear upon it, and not the names of the linguistic families. Nev-
ertheless, it is practically a map of the linguistic families as deter-
mined by the author, and it is believed to be the hrst attempted for
the area represented. Only eleven of the twenty-eight families
named in this table appear, and these represent the families with
which he was best acquainted. As was to be expected from the
early period at which the map was constructed, much of the western
part of the United States was loft uncolorod. Altogether the map
illustrates well the state of knowledge of the time.
1840. Bancroft (George).
History of the colonization of the United States, Boston, 1840, vol. 3.
In Chapter xxii of this volume the author gives a brief synopsis
of the Indian tribes east of the Mississippi, under a linguistic classifi-
cation, and adds a brief account of the character and methods of
Indian languages. A linguisiic map of the region is incorporated,
which in general corresponds with the one jiublished by Gallatin in
18:JG. A notable addition to the Gallatin map is the inclusion of the
Uchees in their proper locality. Though considered a distinct family
by Gallatin, this tribe does ni)t appear upon his map. Moreover, the
Choctaws ard Muskogeos, which appear as separate families upon
Gallatin's map (though believed by that author to belong to the same
family), are united upon Bancroft's map under the term Mobilian.
The linguistic families treated of are, I. Algonquin, II. Sioux or
Dahcota, III. Huron-Iroquois, IV. Catawba, V. Cherokee, VI. Uchee,
VII. Natchez, VIII. Mobilian.
1841. Scoiiler (John).
Obser%'ations of the indigenous trilws of the northwest coast of America. In
Journal of the Royal Geographical Stwiety of London. London, 1841,
vol. 11.
The chapter cited is short, but long enough to enable the author
to construct a very curious classification of the tribes of which he
IMi
In:
! I"
li
U
INDIAN LINOUISTIO FAMILIES.
treats. In his account Scoulor is guided chiefly, to use his own
words, "by considerations founded on their pliysiisal cliuracter, man-
ners and customs, and on tlie affinities of tlieir languages." As the
linguistic considerations are mentioned last, so they appear to be the
least weighty of liis "considerations."
Scoulor's definition of a family is very broad indeed, and in his
"Northern Family," which is a branch of his "Insular Group," he
includes such distinct linguistic stocks as "all the Indian tribes in
the Russian territory," the Queen Charlotte Islanders, Koloshes,
Ugalontzes, Atnas, Kolchans, Kenjlies, Tun Ghaaso, Haidahs, and
Chimmesyans. His Nootka-Columbian family is scarcely less incon-
gruous, and it i? evident that the classification indicated is only to a
comparatively slight extent linguistic.
1846. Hale (Horatio).
United Stato8 exploring exiiedition, during the years 1838, 1830, 1840, 1841,
1843, under the coniniand of Charles Wilkes, U. 8. Navy, vol. 6, ethnog-
raphy and philology. Philadelphia, 1846.
In addition to a largo amount* of tluKjgraphic data derived from
the Polynesian Islands, Micronesian Islands, Australia, etc., more
than one-half of this important volume is devoted to i)hilology, a
largo share relating to the tribes of northwestern America.
Tlio vocabularies collected by Hale, and th" conclusions derived
by him from study of them, added much to the i)revious knowledge
of the languages of these tribes. His conclusions and classification
were in the main accepted by Gallatin in his linguiatic writings of
1848.
1846. Latham (Rol)ert Gordon).
Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnogi-aphy of North America. In Pro-
ceedings of the Philological Society of London. London, 1846, vol. 3.
In this article, which was read before the Philological Society,
January 'ii, 1845, a large number of North American languages are
examined and their affinities discussed in support of the two follow-
ing postulates made at the beginning of the i)aper: First, " No Amer-
ican language has an i.solated position when compared with the otlu^r
tongues en masse rather than with the language of any particular
class;" second, "The affinities between the language of the New
World, as determined by their vor(il)\daries, is not less real than that
inferred from the analogies of their (jrammafical structure" The
author's conclusions are that both statements are substantiated by
the evidence j)resented. The paper contains no new family names.
1847. Prichard (James Cowles).
Researches into the physical history of mankind (third edition), vol. .5, ccm-
tiiining researches into the history of the Oceanic and of the Americiiu
nations. London, 1847.
It was the purpose of this autlK)r, as avowed by himself, to deter-
mine wiietiier the races of men are the coolfspi'ing of a single stoctk
or have descended respectively from several original families. Like
V J
FOWKLL. I
UNOUI.STK! LITKUATUKK.
16
other authors on tliiw subject, his tlieory of whut sliouhl constitute a
raco was Jiot clearly defined. The scope of the inquiry recjuirod the
consideration of a great number of sul»jects and letl to the accumula-
tion of a vast body of facts. In volume 5 the author treats of the
American Indians, and in connection with the different tribes lias
something to say of their languages. No attempt at an original
classification is made, and in the main the author follows Gallatin's
classification and adopts his conclusions.
1848. Gullutin (Alln'rt).
Hale'H Indians of Nortliwest America, imil vucabuluriex of North America,
with an intrwlui-tioii. In TranHUctions of tlie American Etiiiiologiciil
Society, New Yorli, 1848, vol. a.
The introduction consists of a miinber of chai)ters, as follows: First,
Goograpliical notices and Indian means of subsistence; second,
Ancient somi-civilization of New Mexico, Rio Gila and its vicinity;
third, Philology; fourth, Addenda and miscellaneous. In these are
brought together much Valuable information, and many important
deductions are made which illustrate Mr. Gallatin's great acumen.
The dassiti cation given is an amplification of that adopttMl in 1830,
and contains changes and additions. The latter mainly result from
a consideration of the material supplied by Mr. Hale, or are simply
taken from his work.
The groups additional to those contained in the Archieologia
Americana are:
0. Palainih.
7. Salia])tin.
8. Selish (Tsihaili-Selish).
0. Saste.
10. Waiilatpu.
1. Arrapahoes.
2. Jakon.
3. Kalapuya.
4. Kitunaha.
5. Lutuanii.
1848. Latham (Roliert Gordon).
On the languages of the Oregon Territory. In Journal of the Ethnological
Society of London, Edinhurgh, 1848, vol. 1.
This paper was read before the Ethnological Society on the lltli
of December. The lai-guages noticed are those that lie between
" Russian America and New California," of which the author aims
to give an exhaustive list. He discusses the value of the groups to
which these languages have been .issigned, viz, Athabascan and
Nootka-Columbian, and finds that they have been given too high
value, and that they are only equivalent to the primary subdivisions
of .stocks, like the Gothic, Celtic, and Classical, rather than to the
stocks themselves. He further finds that the Athabascan, the
Kolooch, the Nootka-Columbian, and the Cadiak groujis are sub-
ordinate members of one large and important class — the Eskimo.
No new linguistic groups are presented.
1848. Latham (Roliert (Joidoii).
On the ethnography of Uiissian America. In Journal of the Ethnological
Society of London, Edinhurgh, 1848, vol. 1.
16
INDIAN LINGl'ISTIO FAMILIES.
This essay was read before tlie Ethnological Society February 19,
1845. Brief notices are given of the more important tribes, and the
languages are classed in two groups, the Eskimaux and the Kolooch.
Each of these groups is found to have affinities —
(1) With the Athabascan tongues, and perhaps etpial afRnitios.
(3) Each has affinities with the Oregon languages, and each per-
haps equally.
(3) Each has definite affinities with the languages of New Cali-
fornia, and each periiaps equal ones.
(4) Each has miscellaneous affinities with all the other tongues of
North and South America.
1848. Bert;hau8 (Heinrich).
Physikalischer Atlas oder 8ammlung von Karten, auf denen di(> hauptHAch-
lichsteii erscheinv xgen der anorganischen v \ organischen Natur nacli
ihrer geographischen Verbreitung und Vercheiluug bildlich dargestellt
sind. Zweiter Band, Gotha, 1848.
This, the first edition of this well known atlas, contains, among
other maps, an ethnographic map of North America, made in 1845,
It is based, as is stitod, upon material derived from Gallatin, Hum-
boldt, Clavigero, Hervas, Vater, and others. So far as the eastern
part of the United States is concerned it is largely a duplication of
Gallatin's map of 1836, while in the western region a certain amount
of new material is incorporated.
1853. In the edition of 1852 the ethnographic map boars date of
1851. Its eastern portion is substantially a copy of the earlier edition,
but its western half is materially changed, chiefly in accordance
with the knowledge supplied by Hall in 1848.
Map number 72 of the last edition of Berghaus by no moans marks
an advance upon the edition of 1853. Apparently the number of
families is much reduced, but it is very difficult to interpret the
meaning of the author, who has attempted on the same map to indi-
cate linguistic divisions and tribal habitats with the result that con-
fusion is made worse confounded.
iSTtS. Gallatin (Allx-rt).
Classification of the Indian Languages; a letter inclosing a t^ihlu of generic
Indian Families of languages. In Information resixKiting the History,
Condition, and Prosjiects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, by
Henry R. .Schoolcmft. Philadelphia, 18.53, vol.3.
This short paper l)y Gallatin consists of a letter addressed to W.
Medill, Commissioner of Indian Affair.s, requesting his cooperation
in an endeavor to obtain vocabularies to assist in a more complete
study of tho grammar and structure of the languages of the Indians
of North America. It .' accomj)anied by a "Synopsis of Indian
Tribes," giving tho fjvmilies and tribes .so far as known. In tho main
the classification is a repetition of that of 1848, but it differs from
that in a number of particulars. Two of the families of 1848 do not
POWELL. I
LINGUISTIC MTERATI'KK
17
ai)peur in this paper, viz, Arapaho and Kiiiai. Queon Charlotte
Island, ora})loyod as a family name in 1848, is placed under the
Wakash family, while the Skittageto language, upon which the nann*
Queon Charlotte Island was based in 1848, is hero given as a family
designation for tlio language spoken at "Sitka, bet. 52 and 5!) lat."
The following families appear which are nf)t contained in the list of
1848:
1. Cuiiianches.
8. Oro8 Vt'iitros.
3. KaHkaiuH.
4. Kiaways.
5. NatcliitiH'lics.
«. Pani, Tiiwiac-ks.
7. Uguljac'liiiiutzi.
1853. Gibbs (George).
ObHervations on some ( f tlie Indian dialects of northern Oalitornia. In In-
formation reHpecti ig the HiHtory, C'ondition, and Prospects of the Indian
tribes of the Ur-^ed States, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, IS.IS,
vol. 3.
The "Observations" are introductory to a series of vocabularies
collected in northern Ciilifornia, ixnd treat of the method employed
in collecting them and of the dilficulties enccmnttu'ed. They also
contain notes on the tribes speaking the several languages as well as
on the area covered. There is comparatively little of a classificatory
nature, ti !)Ugh in one instance the namt> Quoratem is proposed as a
proper one for the. family "should it be held one."
18r)4. Iiiitham (Rolwrt Gordon).
On the languages of New California. In Proceedings of the Philological
Society of London for 18.")L' and 18.");t. London, 1854, vol. 0.
Read lieforetho Philological Society, May 13, 1853. A number of
languagtss are examined in this paper for the purpose of determining
the stocks to which they belong and the mutual affinities of the
latter. Among the languiiges nieiition(Hl are tlu^ Saintskla, Umkwa,
Lutuami, Paduca, Athabascan, Dieguno, and a number of the Mis-
sion languages.
18,').'). I>ane (William Carr).
Letter on affinities of dialects in New Mexico. In Information rea|)ecting the
History, Conditiiin, and Prospects of the Indian tribes of the United
States, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia. IH,'),'), vol. .5.
The letter forms h.alf a page of printed matter. The gist of the
comnuiiucation is in effect that tlie author has heard it said that the
Indians of certain puel)los speak three dilferent languages, which he
has heard called, respectively, (1) Chu-cha-cas and Kes-whaw-liay;
(i) E-nagh-magh; (3) Tay-waugh. This can hardly be called a
classification, tliough the arrangement of the pueblos indicated i)y
Lane is (pioted at length by Keane in the Appendix to Stanford's
Compendium.
7 ETH 2
ii
18
INDIAN l.mOITlSTK! KAMILIKS.
laid. Ijitlmin (UolH'rt (tonlon).
Oil tliu lariKiiHK*'H <>f Nortliern, Wetttcrn, anil rcntriil Atiinrlca. In Trana-
aotioiiH of tli(> I'liiloloKical StHicty nf l.<iii(l<>ii, for IHAO. Ixiiulon [isri7?|.
This paper was read l)oft>ro tlio PliiloloKii'al Socioty May !t, \Mi>,
anil is Htated to 1)0 " a Hupplonu'iit to two wull known (•ontril)utionH
to Amurican jiliiloloKy l)y tin' lato A. CHallatin."
So far as clawsitication of North AnuM'ican laiij?ua><0H t^iX'H, this in
perhaps tliu most important paper of Latham's, as in it a numher
of new names are pro[)os('il for lingnistic groups, such as Copeli for
tlio Sacramento River tribes, Eiiiiik for tlio Karok tribes, Mariposa
Group anil Memlocino Group for the Yokut and Poino tribes respect-
ively, Moquelumne for the Mutsun, Pnjuni for the Meidoo, Weit-
spek for the Eurocs.
ItWO. TurniT (William Wadilon).
Rt>IK)rt ii|xm the Iiidiuii triln's, liy Ijiinit. A. W. Wliipplf, ThniniiH Rwliank,
eHij.. and Prof. William W. Tumor, Wa.shin);t4)ii, D. C, 1855. In l{<-|H)rtH
of GxplorationR and SiirvnyH to lun-i'rtaiii tlu" nioHt practiiuihli' and
economical route for a railroad from the MisHisnippi to tho Pacific Ocean,
WiVHliiiinton, lHr>(l, vol. :t. part ;).
Chapter v of the above report is headed " Vocabularies of North
American Languages," and is hy Turner, as is stated in a foot-note.
Though the title page of Part ill is dated 1855, the chapter by
Turner wivs not issued till 1850, the date of tho full volume, as is
stated by Turner on page 84. The following are the vocabularies
given, with their arrangement in families:
III. C'hiHtaw.
IV. Kiihai.
V. Iluik")." [ '"'
awnee?
VI. <!addo.
VII. Comanche.
VIII. Olieineliuevi.
IX. C'lihuillo.
X. Kiowav.
Hlioshouee.
XI. Navajo. » .„„,.,,„
XII. Pinal lA-no. \ Aimche.
XIII. Kiwomi. )
XIV. ( '(xihiU'ini. - Keres.
XV. Acoma. )
XVI. Ziifli.
XVII. I'ima.
XVIII. Cmlian. "I
XIX. ( Vico-Maricopa
XX. Mojavo.
XXI. Die^eno.
Yuma.
Several of the family names, viz, Keres. Kiowa, Yuma, and Zuili,
have been adopted under the ) ules formulated al>ove.
\K>H. liuschmann (.Johaim I'arl .^duard).
Die V'lilker und Sprachen Neu- riexiko's und der V/eHtBcito doH britist^hen
Nordamerika'H. dar)j;eHt<>llt >'on Hrn. Buschnmnn. In AI)lmndlunK<'n
(aus dem Jahre lS."i7) der liiMiiKliclien Akademie der Wi.sHensclmften zu
Herlin. Berlin, 1H,-(H.
This work contains a historic review of early discovorios in New
Mexico and of the tribes living therein, with sucli vocabularies as
were available at the time. On jiages ;5I5— tl4 the tribes of British
America, from about latit ide 54" to (iO", are similarly treated, tho
various discoveries bein;' ri'viewed; also those on the Noi'th Pacific
coast. Much of the iiaterial should have been inserted in tho
roWKI.!,.]
LtNiUriSTIO I,ITKItATI'HK.
10
voluiiu) (if \HM (whicli WHS proimrcd iii [H!ti), to wliicli crosn rofor-
(iiKMi is lioquontly iiiiidi', uiiil to wliit'li it stuiuls in tlio iiiituru <jf a
HUpploinont.
IHTiO. ItiiM-liinann (Johiinn Curl R<ltiiir(l).
Die H|iiir"ii <lt'r ii/tfkiHcht'ii S|iru('hi' iiii norillichcn Mcxicti iind liohrn'n
iiiiifrikaiiiHchi'ii Ncirdiai. /uKlcicli t'iiit' MiiKtcriin.^ ilt-r Vi'ilkrr unci
Hpraclicu (li'H iii'irtlliclicn Mfxico'H iiikI clt-r WeHtwito Ni)nlimi«'rika'M von
(iimditliixiirii itii liiH "iiiii KiHiiin'r. In AlilianillunKcn hum (Ii>mi Jalirc
tHri4 (Icr kiiniKllchfn Akadumio iler WiHHcnm'haftun zu Berlin. Berlin,
imo.
Tho above, forniiiiK c "coml suiiidenicntul volimio of tlio Traiis-
aotioiiH for 1854. isaiu'Xi,jUnivt)coiiipil(i(i(>nof much jimviouH litora-
turo trcatiiif^ of tlio Indiap trihos from tlio Arctic Octsaii soutliward
to Gua<lalajara, and hears specially upon the Azt(»c lanj^uaw tiiid
its traces in tho lanK'nvf^es of tho numerous tribes scattered alonj?
tho Pacific Ocean and inland to the hi^h plains. A lar^e number of
vocabularies and a vast amount of linguistic material aro lioro
l)roiight togt'therand arranj^ed in a comprehensive manner to aid in
tho study attempted. In his classification of the trilies east of tho
Rocky Mountains. Buschnumn largely follow(Ml Gallatin. His treat-
ment of tho.se not incluihtd in Gallatin's paper is in thenniin <jriginal.
Many of tho results oljtained may have bo(!n considere<l bold at tho
time of pul)lication, but recent philological investigations give evi-
dence of the value of many of the author's conclusions.
law. Kane (Paid).
WantU'rin^s "f an artist anion;; the Indians of North America from Canada
to Vanooiivj'r's Islaml and Oregon tliroiiKli tlie Iludwm's Day Company's
ti-rritory and Iwick apiin. L<md<m, IS.'iO.
The interesting account of tlie author's travels among tho Indians,
chiefly in the Northwest, and of thiur habits, is folhjwotl by a four-
jiagc! supplement, giving the names, locations, and (census of tho
tribes of tho Northwest coast. They are classified by language into
Chymseyan, incduding the Nass, Chymseyans, Skeeiia and Habassas
Indians, of whom twenty-one tribes are given; Ha-eelb-zuk or Balla-
bola, including the MilbankSonuil Indians, with nine tribes; Klen-e-
kate. including twenty tribes; Hai-dai, including the Kygargey and
Queen Charlotte's Island Indians, nineteen tribes being omimerated;
and Qiia-colth. witli twenty-nine tribes. No statement of tlie origin
of these tables is given, and they reap])ear, with no explanation, in
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, volume v. pj). 4S7-480.
In his Queen Charlotte Islands, 1870, Dawson publishes the part
of this table felating to the Haida, with tho statement that he received
it from Dr. W. F. Tolmie. The census was made in 183()-'41 by tho
late Mr. John Work, who doubtless was the author of the more com-
plete tables published by Kane and Schtjolcraft.
11
ni
.; II
1 :i
20
INDIAN MN<iUIHTIC
tLlKH.
IWia, l4»tlmm (KolHTt (lonl(in).
KlumoiitM of ('om|iarittivi> iiliiloloxy. Loiiil'iii, IHAS.
Tlu) objtsct of Hiis vi>liim« is, liH tlio imtlior wtiitcH in Iuh |»nifiv('«,
"to lay lioforo tlio roiidiM' tlio ciiitif factH and tlic cliic'l" trains oi' ri^a-
soninj^ in Coniparativo Phiiolojfy." Anions tin* nn'id inuHH of
nnitt<rial accnnmlatod for tho purposi* a siuirtt is duvottid to tlio laii-
Kuagcs of North Aninrica. Thti nunari<s nndcr thrxn arn often taken
vorl)atini from tiio antln)r'H oarlior jiapiTM, to wiiicli rt'rcrcncn has
been Tna<lo above, and tlie family nanios and classitleation 8ot forth
in them aro HnbHtantially ropt>atod.
IWW. l[iiy(l()ii(Konlinan(l ViindovotT).
ContriltutidiiH to tlif (MlinoKrapliy and pliiIolo|ry nf tlin Iixliaii trilM>Hi)f tlu.'
MiHHouri ValU'y. Pliiladcipiiia, mvi. *
This in a valuable contribution to our knowledijo of tho Missouri
River tribes, nnide at a time when the information eonoerniiiK them
was none too preciso. The tribes treated of aro classilied as follows:
I. KniHtt>iu-aux, or C.'rtt'H. 1
II. HIiukftH't. - AJL'oiikiii (}n
in. Shyj'iincM.
IV. AraiKtlioH.
V. AtsiiiiiH.
VI. I'awni't'M.
VII. Arikai'DN.
DakotuH.
AsHiiiilMiiiiH.
ClOWH.
Miniiitarct's.
ManilaiiH.
OinahiU'i.
loWUM.
Ara|H>lii> (iroiip, H.
roup, A,
VIII
IX
X
XI
XII
XIII
XIV,
r PawiKi' Oroiip, C.
' Dakota Oruii|>, D
1804. Orozco y Ik-rra (Maiiui'l).
Owigrafia dc liw LciiKuas y Carta EtiioKrattca do Mexico Prpredi<Ia« do un
enwiyo de claNilii'acioii (K- laH iniHiniiH lt>ii){iiiu* y do apuntcH para la«
inmigracioiu'H do iau tribiiH. Mexico, 18U4.
The work is divided into three parts. (1) Tentative classification
of the languages of Mexico; (v*) notes on tho imnugration of the
tribes of Mexico; (3) geography of tho languages of Mexico.
The author states that he has no knowledge whatever of the lan-
guages he treats of. All ho attempts to do is to summarize the
opinions of others. His autlioiities were ( 1 ) writers on native gram-
mars; (2) missionaries; (.'}) persons who are reputed to }w versed in
such matters. He jjrofesses to have used his own judgment only
wlien these authorities loft him free to do so.
His stated metliod in compiling the ethnograpliic ma|) was to place
before him tlic map of a certain department, examine all his autliori-
ties bociring on that department, and to mark with a distinctive color
all localities .said to belong to a particular language. When this
was done he drew a boundary line urouiKl tho area of that language.
Examination of the map shows that he has partly expressed on it
the classitication of languages as given in the first part of his text,
and partly limited himself to indicating the geograpliic boundaries
rowu.1..)
MNJMIISTH! I.IIKKATnUK.
ft
of latiKiia^oH, witlioiit, li<>w(<v*<r, giving tliu Wouiulai'iuH of all thu
iiiiiKiiaK*'H iiKtiitioiKiil in liiH iJHtH.
iwiri, I'iiiifriti'l (KruiiciHco).
Cimiln. |)i'Ki'i'i|itivii y ('iiiii|iuriilivii ilt< Iiim fi<>riKiiii'* IiiiliK*'i>UN do Mi'-xii'o.
Ml''xic-il, IHtL-i.
Acicorijingto Mic iiitrniliiction IIiIh wnrk isdividud intothreupartH:
(1) (It'Hciiptivt'; {2) (ioinpunitivt!; (.*>) criti(;iil.
Tho luitlidr (lividcH tlio troiitnuMit of t«uch lanf^uaK" into (1) itH
nuMliaiiisni; (V) its dictionary; (;t) itsKianmiar. Hy " nioohaniHUi "
hoMioiuiM pronuiKMation and composition; liy " dicjtionary" h« means
tlu) comnioncst or most notablt^ words.
In tilt! cast" of caili lan^^iiag"' lie ntatus tli« l<i(wilitioH whero it iH
Hjiolitm, givin;; a sliort skntcli of its liislory. tlin oxphination of its
otymology, and a list of sncii writers on tliat lan^nago as lui Iuih
iKxromc a('(piaint(«l witli. Then follows: " incchanism, dictionary,
and grammar." Next lie ennmcratcs its dialectts if tlicn» are any,
and coniparou spcciinons of tlinni when he is able. He gives tho Our
Father when lio can.
V(dunie I (l.sd'i) contains introduction and twelve languages. Vol-
ntno II (IKiir)) contains fourteen groups of languages, a vocabulary
of the Opata language, and an ap{)undix treating of tho Conumche,
the Coahuiltoco. and various languages of upper California.
Volume III (announced in preface of Volume ii) is to contain the
*' comparative i)art " (to bo treated in tho same " mi.xed" method a8
tho "descriptive ])art"). and a scientitii; classification of all tho
languages spoken in Mexico.
In the "critical j)art" (apparently disperseil through tho other two
parts) the author intends to pass judgment on t)ui merits of tho
languages of Mexico, to point out thoir good qualities and their
defects.
1H7(). Dall (Williiun llealcy).
On tlio (IJHtrilmtion of the native triln'H of AlnHku and tlic adjacent torritory.
In Procet'dinKH of tlio AiiRTiriiii Ass(K'iiilioii for tlw Advanceinuiit of .Sci-
ence. C;ainl)ri(lKe, 1870, vol. 18.
In this important pupor is presented much interesting information
concorning the inhabitants of Alaska and adjacent territories. Tho
natives are divided into two groups, the Indians of the interior, and
tho inhabitants of tho coast, or Esquimaux. The latter are designated
by tho term Orarians, which are composed of three lesser groups,
Eskimo, Aleutians, and Tuski, Tho Orarians are distinguished,
first, by their language; second, by thoir distribution; third, by
their habits; fourth, by their physical characteristics.
1870. Dall (William Healey).
Alaska and its Kesources. Boston, 1870.
The (ilassification followed is practically tho same as is given in
tho author's article in the Proceedings of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science.
I
:;S
'In
9§ INDIAN t.lNdlllHTKl KAMIMM.
1H77. l)all(Wlllliiiiilli«ili>y).
TrilHW of thi- i>xtr<>iu<i luirtliwi'Ht. In < 'nntriltiitiniiH to North Aiiii<rii'iiii Rth-
iiojo^y (imltllMtuMi liy Uiiitt'il Ht»t4'H I ((■<iKru|ilil('ul iiiiil <i)'oloKi<'iil Hiirvey
of the HiN'ky Mouiituiii I{4>kIoii|. WiiHliiiiKton. IN77, vol. I.
TIiIh \h hii aiii|iliti<'Hti<iii of the pii|M-r ptitilislu'd in tlif I'ri)('(<o(]iii>(H
(if tint AiiK'riciiii AsNociiition. iw itliovi' citml. The iiiillioi' HtatoH
tliiit " iiiiiiiDrouH iiilditioiiH and curroctionH, iih wtdl its porHdniilohHttr-
vatiiiiiH of iniicli licfoi-f tiikcn iii Hocond liiind, have plact>d it in my
powdi' to cnlitrgo and iniprovu my ori;{inal ai'mn>{)>mt'nt."
In tins papor tho OriiriiuiH aro divided into "two well inarknl
f^)'oii|iH," tlic Innuit, I'oinpriNinK ail tli(>Ho-('aII(><l KHidinoand TnN)<iH,
and tilt' AIkuIh. Tho paper proper is follownd by an apptuidix by
dibits and Dull, in which an» iin'sented a scries t>{ vocabularies
from the northwest, including dialoctH uf tho Tlinkit and llaiila
nations, T'sim-si-ans, and others.
IS77. ()ililiH«lc>orK<>).
TrilM*H of Wt'Hti-rn WiiMltiiiKton niid Northwi'Ht(>rii OroKon. In ContrilmtiotiR
to Nortli AiiiitIciu) KtliiioloKy. WiiHliiiiKtoii, ISNT, vol, I,
This is a valuable aiticlu, and gives many interesting particulars
of the tribes of whicdi it treats. Rtjferences are horo and there
made to the languages of the several tribes, with, however, no
attempt at their classification. A table follows the report, in which
is given by Dall, 'ifterCJibbs, a classification of the tribes mentionoil
by Gibbs. Five families art* mentioned, viz : Nulka, Hahaptin,
Tinnt'h, Htdish, and T'sinuk. The comparative vocabularies follow
Part II.
IS77. I'owiTB (Stephen).
Ti'ilM'Nof Ciilifiirnia. In ContributionH to North American RthnuloKy. Wash-
ington, 1S77, vol. 8.
The extended paper on the Californian tribes which nmkes uji the
bulk of this volume is the most important contribution to the sub-
ject ttver matle. The author's unusual opportunities for jtersonal
t)i)aervation among the.se tribes wore improved to the utmost ami
tho result is a comjiaratively full and compndienrfive account of
their habits and (character.
Here and then* are allusions to the languages spoken, with refer-
once to the families to which the tribes belong. No formal classifi-
cation is presented.
1877. Powell (John WeHley).
Appendix. LinguiHtit^s eiliteil by J. W. Powell. In C'ontributionH to North
Anierioan Ethnology. WiiHliington, 1877, vol. 3.
This appendix consists of a series of comparative vocabularies
collected by Powers, Gibbs and others, classified into linguistic
families, fis follows:
l,iN«iitisTir
MTKKATrHK.
raiiilly.
raiiilly
1.
KA-n>k,
N, Mot Hrin.
a.
Yd-n.k,
I>. Sitiilu IliirUim.
!l.
<'liliii-a-rl-kii.
|(». Y..-klltH.
4.
WiNlKIHk.
II. Mul<lii.
ft.
Yd-ki.
Vi, A-rlio-iiiA -wi.
«.
IVmio,
Hi. Hliiut-lii.
7.
Win-tnn'.
IS
IH77. (lntHi-lu>t ( AllxTt NaiiiiiH).
Iiiiliiin liui)(iiiiK*'H of (III' I'lit'illi' Htati'M mill Ti'rrltorioH. In MuKiuiiii* i>f
AiiK-riciili niMtiiry. New York, IH'i, vol. I,
Aftur Hoiiut I'l'inurkH cuiiciTiiiiiK tlix iiiitiinuif 1iiii>(uiiki' hihI of thi>
H|i<'ciiil chiiruc't«i'iHtics of Imliaii Iuiikuiiki'h, thi> tiiithor givcH ii
HynopHiH of the Iiuikuuki'h of tlic I'licitio rt'gioii. Tlio fiiiiiilUtH niun-
tiouud uro:
1.
SIiohIiomI.
11.
Poiiio.
ai.
Ylkknil.
•X
Yuiim.
I'J.
VViHlionk.
'■!-i.
('ll.V>"«'.
It.
I'lllUI.
lit.
Kiirok.
2it.
Kala|iii.vu.
4.
Hiintii Hiirldirii.
14.
V\Vlt«-iH.k.
•J4.
CliliiiHik.
ft.
MlltMIIII.
1ft.
Citlirok.
2ft.
.Saliaptiii.
(1.
Yotnit.
1(1.
Tiili-w'u.
2<l.
H<-liHli.
7.
Mcewoc.
17.
HhiiMtu.
27.
NiHitka.
8.
Mi-UliM).
IH,
I'lt KiviT.
2N.
KiKitt'imi.
0.
WiiitiKin.
lU.
Klnmutli.
It).
Yuku.
20.
Tiling.
Tliifl iH an iinportunt jtapiT, and coiitainH notices of sovoral new
stocks, (lorivt'd from a uttidy of tlio niaturial furnislicd ])y I'oWiTH.
Tho autlior ud /ocatos tlio jilan of iisinK a system of noinenelatiiro
Bimilar in natiiro to that ('nii)h).vi'd in zotdogy in the cast* of f^cneric
and specific names, addinj; after tlie name of tlie tribe the family to
which it bohmgs; tiius: Warm Springs, Saliaptin.
187H. Powell (Joliii WVhK'.v).
Tlu' iintioiiality of the I'ufbluH. In tlii' UiM'ky Mountain Preshyterian, Denver,
Novenitwr, 1H78.
This is a half-colinnn artich'. the object of wliich is to assign tlio
several I'noblos to their proper .stocks. A jiaragraph is devoted to
contradicting the jiopular belief that the Pueblos an* in some way
related to the Aztecs. No vocabularii^s are given or cited, though
the classitication is stattiil to be a linguistic one.
1878. Keane (AuKUHtiiH H).
A|)|K>iiili.\. KtlinoKra|>liy ami phiioloRj- of Aiin'rica. In Stanfonl's Coin-
IM'niliuiii of ( ii'o);raiiliy and Travel, eiliti>(lanil extended by 11. W. ItateH.
1/ondon, 1H7S.
In the ajipendi.x are given, first, some of the more general charac-
teristics and peculiarities of Indian languages, followed by a classi-
fication of all the tribes of North America, after which is given an
;;1
II
i 1*'
1
1;
1
24
INDIAN LmoriSTIC FAMIIJES.
alpliabetiral list of Anu'ricaii tril)(>s iuul langiiagos, with their habi-
tats and the stock to wliicli they l)elong.
Tlie chissificatiuii is oumpiled from many sources, and althongli it
contains many errors and inconsistencies, it affords on the wliole a
good geneial u\oti of prevalent views on the subject.
1880. Powell (John Wesley).
Pueblo Indians. In the American NatuniliHt. Phihidelphia, 1880, vol. 14.
This is a two- page article in which is set forth a classification of
the Pueblo Indians from linguistic considerations. The Pueblos are
divided into four families or stocks, viz:
Shinunio.
Zuni.-in.
!t. Keran.
4. Ti'wan.
Under the several stocks is given a list of those who have collected
vocabxxlaries of these languages and a reference to their publication.
18H0. Kells (Myron).
The Twana laiiKiniKe of Washington Territory. In the American Antiqua-
rian. ChieaK". 18S0-'H1. vol. :{.
This is a brief article — two and a half pages— on the Twana,
Clallam, and Chemakum Indians. The author finds, upon a com-
parison of vocabulari"s. tliat the Chemakum language has little in
common with its neighbors.
1SH,5. Dall (William Healey).
The native triU^H of Ala-ska. In PrfK-eedinRs of the American Association for
the Advancement of Seienee. thirty-fourth meeting, held at Ann ArUir,
Mich.. August, 188."). Salem, IHSii.
This paper is a timely contribution to the subject of the Alaska
tribes, and carries it from tiie point at which the author left it in
18t)9 to date, lirieHy summarizing the several recent additions to
kntjwledge. It ends with a geogra]ihical cl.assilication of the Innnit
and Indian tribes of Alaska, with estinnites of their numbers.
188,-). Bancroft (Hubert Howe).
The works of Hubert Howe Bancroft, vol. ;i; the native races, vol. iJ. myths
and languages. San Francisco, 1883.
In the chapte'' on that subject tlnOanguages iire classified by divi-
sions win<'h appear to correspond to groups, families, tribes, and
dialects.
The clas.sification does not, however, follow any consistent plan,
and is in parts unintelligible.
1882. natschet (Albert .Samuel).
IndiairhuigUiiges of the Pacific .States and Territories and of the Pueblos of
New Mexico. In the Magazine of American History. New York, 1882,
vol. 8.
This pa])er is in Die naiur(> of a sui)i)leni('iit to a ])r('vions one in
the same magazine above referred to. It enlarges further on .several
POWKt.I..]
MNOITISTIC MAP.
25
of tlio stocks tlicro considered, and, as tlie title indicates, treats also
of the Piioblo langiiaj?es. The fauiillos mentioned are:
1.
Chiiuariko.
2. Waslio.
3. Yi'ikoim.
4. Sayuskla.
5. Kusa.
«. Takilma.
7. Kii) Grande Pueblo.
8. Kera.
',). Ziifii.
1883. Hale (Horatio).
Indian migrations. asevidcncod by lanprtiaKe. In The American Antiquarian
and Oriental Journal. Chicago. Ihh;!. vol. 5.
In connection witli the object of tliis paper — the study of Indian
inif^ration.s — several linguistic stocks are mentioned, and the lin-
guistic allinities of a number of tribes are given. Tlie stocks men-
tioned are:
Huron-l'lierokee. Algonkin.
Dakota. Chahta-MuMkoki.
188.1. Tolniie (W. Frascr) and Daw.son (George M.)
Comparative viK'almlaries of the Indian tribes of British Columbia, with a
map illustrating distribution (Geological and Natural History Survey of
CJanada). Montreal, 1884.
The vocabularies presented constitute an important contribution
to linguistic science. They represent "one or more dialects of every
Indian language spoken on the Pacific slope from the Columbia
River north to thcTshilkat River, and beyond, in Alaska; and from
the outermost sea-board to the nniin continental divide in the Rocky
Mountains." A colored map shows the area occupied by each lin-
guistic family.
LINGUISTIC MAP.
In 1830 Gallatin conferred a great boon upon linguistic students
by classifying all the existing material relating to this subject. Even
in the light of the knowK'dge of the present day his work is found
to rest upon a sound basis. The material of Gallatin's time, liow-
ever, was too scanty to permit of more than an outline of tho subject.
Later writers have contributed to the work, and the names of
Latham, Turner, Prichard, Buschmann, Hale, Gatschet, and others
are connected with important classificatory results. '
The writer's interest in linguistic work and the incei)tion of a plan
for a linguistic classification of Indian languages date back about
•^0 years, to a time when he was engaged in exfdorations in the West.
Being brought into contact with nifiny tribes, it was possible to col-
lect a large amount of original material. Subseciuently, when the
Bureau of Ethnology was organized, this store was largely increased
through the lal)ors of others. Since then a very large body of
literature published in Indian languages has been accumulated, and
a great number of vocabularies have been gathered by the Bureau
'. i>\
1 1
26
INDIAN MNOUISTK! FAM1MK8.
assistants and by collaborators in various i)arts of tlie country. The
results of a study of all this niatorial, and of niucli historical (hita,
which necessarily enters largely into work of this cliaractor, appear
in the accompanying map.
The contributions to the subject duriiig the last fifty years have
been so important, and the additions to the material accH'ssible to
the .student of Gallatin's time have been so large, that much of the
reproach which deservedly attached to American scholars because
of the neglect of American linguistics has been removed. The field
is a vast one, however, and tiie workers are comparatively few.
Moreover, opportunities for collecting linguistic material are grow-
ing fewer day by day, as tribes are (!onsolidated upon reservations,
as they become civilized, and as the older Indians, who alone are
skilled in their language, die, leaving, it may be, only a few
imperfect vocabularies as a basis for future study. History has
bequeathed to us the names of many tribes, which became extinct
in early colonial times, of whose language not a hint is left and
whose linguistic relations must ever remain unknown.
It is vain to grieve over neglected opj)ortunities unless their con-
templation stimulates us to utilize those at hand. There are yet
many gaps to be filled, even in so elementary a part of the study as
the classification of the tribes by language. As to the detailed
study of the <liiferent linguistic families, the mastery and analysis
of the languages composing them, and their comparison with one
another and with the languages of other families, only a beginning
has been made.
After the above statement it is hardly necessary to add that the
accompanying map does not purport to represent final results. On
the contrary, it is to be regarded as tentative, setting forth in visible
form the results of investigation up to the present time, as a guide
and aid to future effort.
Each of the colors or patterns upon the maj) represents a distinct
linguistic family, the total number of families contained in the
whole area being fifty-eight. It is belitived that the families of
langu.ages rejiresented upon the nuip Ciin not have sprung from a
common source; they are as distinct from one another in their
vocabularies and apparently in their origin as from the Aryan or
the Scythian families. Uncpiestionably. futun* and more critical
study will result in the fusion of some of these families. As the
means for auiilysis and comparison accumulate, resend)lances now
hidden will he brought to light, and relationships hitherto unsus-
pected will i)e shown to exist. Such a result may be anticipated
with the more certainty inasmuch as the present classification has
bt'cn made ujion a conservative plan. Where relationships between
families are suspected, but can not be demonstrated by convincing
evidence, it h.as been deemed wiser not to unite them, but to keep
IMIWKIJ,. I
UNOUIHTKr MAI'.
27
thdiu apart until moro material shall liavo accumulatod and proof
of a more uonvincinf^ cliaracter shall have boon broiij^lit forward.
While some of the families indicated on the map may in future bo
uiiittid to other families, and the number thus bo reduced, there
sccMus to \h\ no >irouu<l for the belief that the total of the linj^uistic
families of this country will be materially diminished, at least under
the [)roseiit metixxls of linguistic analysis, for there is little reason
to doubt that, as tlie result of investigation in tin* field, there will
be discovered tril)es speaking languages not classifiable under any of
the present families; thus the decrease in tlie total by re.ason of con-
solidation may be compensated by a corresponding increase through
discovery. It may even bo possible that some of the similarities
used in combining languages into families may, on further study,
prove to bo adventitious, and the number may b(! increased thereby.
To which side tlie numerical Ijalanco will fall remains for the future
to decide.
As stated above, all the families occupy the same basis of dissim-
ilarity from one another — i. e.,none of them are related — and conse-
(piently no two of them are either more or less alike tlian any other
two, except in so far as mere coincidences and borrowed material
may be said to constitutf! likeness iud relationship. Coincidences
in the nature of superficial word v> . I'lnblances are common in all
languages of the world . No matter how widely separated geograph-
ically two families of languages may Ije, no matter how unlike their
vocabularies, how distinct their origin, scjme words may always be
found which appear upon superficial examination to indicate rela-
(ionship. There is not a single Indian linguistic family, for instance,
which does not contain words similar in sound, i».nd moro rarely sim-
ilar inbothscmnd and meaning, to words in English, Chinese, Hebrew,
and other languages. Not only do such resemblances exist, but
they have been discovered and pointed out, not as mere adventitious
similarities, but as proof of genetic relationship. Borrowed lin-
guistic material also apjiears in every fiimily. tempting the unwary
investigator into making false analogies an<l drawing erroneous con-
clusions. Neither coiiiciihnices nor borrow«'d material, however, can
b(( ])roperly regarded as evidence of cognation.
Wliihf (Hicupying tlus stiuw plani>of genetic dissimilarity, the fami-
lies are by no means alike as regards either the extent of territory oc-
cupied, the number of tribes grouped under them respectively, or the
number of languages and dialects of which tlu^y are composed.
Some of them cover wide areas, whose dimensions are stated in
terms of latitude and longitudes rather than by mi](^s. ( )thera occupy
so little space that tlio colors representing them are hardly discern-
ible upon the map. Some of them contain but a single tribe; others
are represeuiteil by scores of tribes. In the cast! of a f(iw, the term
"family" is commensurate witii language, since there is but one
i:
: I:h
i
28
INDIAN LINGUISTIC KAMILIKS.
luiiguivgo and no dialocts. In tho case of othors, their tribes apoke
several languages, sodisiinct I'roni one another as to be for tho most
part niiitnally unintelligible, and the langiniges shade into many
diaUicts more or less diverse.
The map, designed primarily for the use of students who are en-
gaged in investigating the Indians of the United States, was at first
limited to this area; subseijuently it^ seope was extended to include
the whole of North Ameriea north of Mexico. Such an extension of its
plan was, indeed, almost necessary, since a number of important
families, largely represented in tiio United States, are yet more
largely rejiresented in the territory to the nortli, and no adctjuate
conception of the siz(! and relat've importan;'e of such families as
the Algoncpiian, Siouan, Salishan, Athapascan, an<l othors can be
had without inchuiing extralimital territory.
To the south, also, it happens that several linguistic stocks extend
beyond the boundaries of the United Stati's. TlirtH' families are,
indeed, mainly t*xtralimital in tlu'ir jOTsition, viz: Yuinan, the great
body of the trilies of which family inhal)ited the peninsula of Lower
California; Piman. which has only a snudl representation in south-
ern Arizona; and the Coahuiltecan, which intrudes into southwestern
Tei:as. The Athajiascan family is represented in Arizona and New
Mexico by the well known Apache and Nav.ijo, the former of whom
have gained a s'.rong foothold in northern Mexico, while the Taiioan,
a Pueblo family of the upper Rio Grande, has established a few
pueblos lower down the river in Mexitro. For the purpose of nec;es-
sary comparison, therefore, the map is made to include all of North
America north of Mexico, tho entire jjoninsula of Lower California.,
and so much of Mexico as is necessary to show the range of families
common to that country and to the United States. It is left to a
future occasion to attempt to indiciite the linguistic relations of
Mexico and Central America, for which, it may bo remarked in i)as.s-
ing, much material has been accumulated.
It is apparent that a single map can not be made to show tlio loca-
tions of tho several linguistic families at different epochs; nor can a
single ma]) be made to represent tho migrations of the tribes com-
posing the linguistic families. In order to make a clear presentation
of the latter subject, it would bo necessai'y to prepare a .series of
maps showing the areas successively occupied by the several tribes
as they wore disrupted and driven from section to section under tho
pressure of other tribes or tho vastly more potent force of European
encroachment. Altliough tho datfi necessary for a complete rei)re-
stiiitation of tribal migration, oven for the period subsequent to the
advent of tho FiUro[)oan, does not exist, still a very large body of
material Ix'aiMiig upon the subject is at haml. and (>xcoodingly valu-
able results in this direction could be presented did not tho amount
LINGUISTIC MAP.
29
of time and labor and tlio large oxponae attendant upon such a pro-
ject forbid the Httenii)t for the present.
The niaj) nndertakos to show the habitat of the linguistic families
oidy, and tlii.s is for Init a single period in imr history, viz, at the
time when tlio tribes composing them tirst became known to the
Euroi)oan, or whwi they first appear on recorded history. As the
dates when the different tribes became known vary, it follows as a
matter of course that tlu* periods represented by the colors in one
l)ortion of the map are not synchronous with those in other portions.
Thus the data for the C.)iunibia River tribes is derived chiefly from
the account of the journey of Lewis and Clarke in lH()3-'()5. long
before which period radical changes of location had taken place
among the triljcs of the eastei'ii United States. Again, not only are
the periods represented by the different sec^tions of the nnip not syn-
chronous, ])ut only in the case of a few of tlio linguistic families,
and these usually the stnjiller ones, is it possible to make the color-
ing synchronous for different sections of the same family. Thus
our data for the locatic^u of some of the northern members of the
Shoshonean family goes back to 1804, a date at whi(di absolutely no
knowledge had been gained of most of the southern members of the
group, our first acccmnts of whom began about 1850. Again, our
knowledge of the eastern Algoncjuian tribes dates hack to about
ICOO, while no infornnition was had conc(irning the Atsiaa, Black-
feet, Cheyenne, and the Arapaho, the westernmost members of the
family, until two centuries later.
Notwithstanding these facts, an attempt to fix upon tlie areas for-
merly occupied by the .several linguistic families, and of the pristine
homes of many of the tribes composing them, is by no means hopeless.
For instance, concerning the position of the western tribes during the
period of early contact of our colonies and its agreement with their
position later when they appear in history, it may be inferred that
as a rule it was stationary, though positive evidence is lacking.
When changes of tribal habitat actually took place they were rarely
in the nature of extensive migration, by which a portion of a lin-
guistic family was severed frcjni the main body, but usually in the
form of encroaclunent by a tribe or tribes ujion neighl)oring tern-
t<.)ry, which resulted simply in the ext(^nsion of the limits of one
linguistic family at the expense of another, the defeated tril)es being
incorpor.ated or confined within narrower limits. If the above infer-
ence be correct, the fact that differ(>nt chronologic periods are rep-
I'esented upon the map is t>f com{)aratively little importance, since,
if the Indian tribes wt^re in the main sedentary, and not nomadic,
the changes resulting in the course of one or two centuries would
not make material (liif(U'(in('es. Exactly the op))osito opinion, how-
over, has been expressetl by many writers, viz, that the North
^1
'i
30
INDIAN MNOIJISTK! KAMIMKS.
Amoricun Iiidiiui triboH -wore noiimdit!. Tlio picturn proHoiitod by
theso writora is of a medley of ovor-sliiftiiij? tribds, to-diiy horo,
to-morrow thorc, occiipyiiijif luiw torritory idkI fouiidiiiii; new Iioiikih —
if iioiniulH cuii bnaaid to bavo homoH — only to iibatidoii tlimu. Hiicli
a picture, bowttver, is believed to eoiivey an erroneous idea of tbo
former condition of our Indian tribes. As tbe ipu^stion lias signifi-
cance in tbo present connection it must l)e consider(Ml somewbat at
lengtb.
INDIAN TKIHES 8KDENTAKY.
In tbe first place, tbe linguistic map, based as it is upon (be (ear-
liest evidence obtainable, itself otters couidusive proof, not only tliat
tbe Indian tribes were in tbe main sedentary at tbo tinu* bistory
tivat records tbeir jHJsition, but tbut tbey bad been sedentary for a
very long period. In order tbat tbis may bo made plain, it sbould
be clearly understood, as .stated above, tbat eacb of tbe colors or
IKvtterns upon tbe map indicates a distinct linguistic! family. It
will bo noticed tbat tbo colors representing tJus sev((ral families are
usmvlly in single bodies, i. e., tbat tluiy represent continuous areas,
and tbat witb some exceptions tbo .same color is not scattered bero
and tbere over tbo map in small sjjots. Yet precisely tbis last state
of tilings is wliat woubl be expected bad tbo tribes representing tbo
families boon nomadic to a marked degree. If nomadic tribes
occupied Nortb America, instead of spreading out eacb fnmi a
comnuMi center, as tbe colors sbow tbat tbo tribes comitosing tbo
.several families actually did, tboy would bave been disi)ei'.sed bero
and tliero over tbo wliole face of tbe country. Tbat tbey are not so
dispersed is considered proof tbat in tbe main tbey were , sedentary.
It li.as boon stated above tbat more or le.ss e.Ktonsivo migrations of
.some tribes over tbo country bad taken place prior to Euroiiean
occupancy. Tbis fact is discloscul by a glance at tbe present map.
Tbo great Atliapascan family, for instance, occupying tbe larger
part of Britisb America, is known from linguistic evidence to bave
sent oif colonies into Oregon (VVilopab. TIatskanai, Cocpiille), Cali-
fornia (Smitli River tribes, Kenesti or Wailakki tribes, Huiia), and
Arizona and New Mexico (Apacbe, Navj'.jo). How long before
European occupancy of tbis country tbese migrations took jilaco
can not be told, but in tbo case of most of tbem it was undoubtedly
many years. By tbe test of language it is seen tbat tbe gr(«it
Siouaii family, wbicli wo bave; come to look upon as almost exclu-
sively western, bad one offsboot in Virginia (Tutelo), anotlier in
X(U'th and Soutb Carolina (Catawba), and a tbird in Mississippi
(Hiloxi); and tbo Algompiian family, so important in tbo early
bistory of tbis country, wliilo occupying a nearly continuous arcui
in tbe nortb and east, bail y(4 secured a t\)otliolil, doubtless in
very recent times, in Wyoming and Colorado. Tbese and otbor
rtiwKi.i.. I
INDIAN TUIItKS HKDKNTAUY.
81
Himilnr fiiotH HulluMciitly provo tlio powiT of iiwlividiial triboH or
j^oritus to HUiultT ruliitioiis with tlin j^rciit hody of tliiMr kiridrod
and to minovt) to <1i.stiiut lioiiics. Tustod l)y liiiK»isti(^ (ividciuio,
siicli iustaruioM appear to \m oxiutptioiial, and tlio fact rmiiaiiiH that
ill tlio Ki'Diit majority of casus tiio tl•ilJ(^4 coinpoHing liiiKnistic funi-
iiit's (j;'(Uipy coiitiinioiis artsas, and iioiicMi arc and liav(( liccn practi-
cally sedentary. Nur is the liond of a common laiiKuagc, st roii^^ and
cndiii'injJT as that bond is usually thouj^lit to Ikj, entirely siilli(rient to
explain th<i phciinmenoii here pointed out. When small in niiinlK-r
the linj;uistic tie would iindonhtedly aid in binding together tlie
members of a tril)e; but as the people speaking a coininon language
increase in number and cojiie to liavo coiiflictinj? interests, the lin-
guistic tie lias often i»r()ve<l to be an insutTicient })oiid of union. Jn
the case of our Indian tribes fouds and internee e conflicts were
common between members of tlio same linguistic family. In fa(^t,
it is [trobable that a very large number of the diahicts into which
Indian languages are split ori;.':inated as the result of iiilorneciiK!
strife. Factions, divided lui cparatofl from the ]>areiit body, by
contact, intermarriage, and incirporation with foreign tribes, devel-
op(«l distinct diahicts or languages.
But linguistic evidence alone need not bo reli(!d upon to prove that
the North Anierit^an Indian was not nomadic.
Corrol)oi'ativ(i proof of the sedentary character of our Indian tribes
is to be Pound in th(; curious form of kinship systcjin. with mother-
rite as its chief factor, which prevails. This, as has been jiointed
out in another place, is not adapted to tins necessities of nomadic
tribes, which need to be govorn((d by a patriarchal system, and, as
well, to be poss(!sseil of Hocks and herds.
There is also an abundance of historical evidence to sliow that,
when first discovered by Europeans, the Indians of the eastern United
States wenf found living in fixed habitations. This does not neces-
sarily imply that the ontiro year was spent in one place. Agricul-
ture not being practiced to an extent sufliciont to supply the Indian
with full subsistence, ho was compelled to make occasional changes
from his permanent home to the more or less distant waters and for-
ests to procure supplies of food. When furnished with foixl and skins
for clothing, the hunting parties returned to the villagi.' which con-
stituted their true home. At longer ])oriods. for several reasons —
among wlii('li probably the chief were the hostility of stronger trilics,
the failure of the fuel su[)ply near the village, and the compulsion
ex(U'cised by the ever lively superstitious fancies of the Indians — the
villages were abandoned and new ones fornie<l to constitute new
homes, new focal points from wliich to sot out on their annual hunts
and to wliich to return wIumi these were completed. The tribes of
the eastern United States lia<l fixed and deiinitely bounded habitats,
and their wanderings were in the nature of temporary excursions to
i
32
INDIAN LIN(»(TISTIO FAMIMKS.
OHtablisliod points roHorted to from timo iminomorial. Ah, however,
thoy liad not yi>t ciiturod couipK'toly into tlu» uffricuUnnil condition,
to wliicli tlu>y w«ro fust progn^ssinji; from the liiinttir state, tlmy may
1)0 said to liavc Itcon nomadic; to a very limitod extent. Tiie nictiiod
of life thns si<otched was 8ul)stantially th« ono wliicli tiie Indians
were found praotieiii),' througliout the eastern part of the Unitt^d
States, as also, tiionji;ii to a less (h-gree, in the Paeilie Stat«!s. Ujion
the Pacilic coast proper the tribes were even more sedentary tlnin
xi[)on the Atlantic, as the mild climate and tlu« great abiUKhmce and
IKirmanent sii])ply of lish and slu'lllish left no cause for a seasonal
change of abode.
When, liowever, tlie interior portions of the country were tirst
visited by Eurojamns, a different state i>f affairs was found to pro-
vail. There the ac(|uisition of the horse jind tlie possession of
firoarms liad wrought very great clianges in aboriginal habits. The
accpiisition of the former enai)led the Imlian of the treeless plains to
travel distances with ease and celerity whidi liefore wi're pi'actically
impossible, iind the possession of firearms stiniuluttMl tribal iggres-
sivene.ss to the utmost pitc^li. Fireai'ms were everywhere doubly
effective in prochicing changes in tribal habitats, since tlie sonu>what
grailual introduction of trade placeil llu'se deadly weajjons in tho
hands of sonu< trilies. and of whole congeries of tribes, long l)efoi-o
otliers could obtain tliem. Thus tlie general state of tril)al etpiilih-
rium whicli had Ijefore prevailed was rudely disturbed. Tribal
warfare, whicli hitherto liad lieen attended with inconsideraiile loss
of life and .slight territorial changes, a, as now made terribly destruo-
tive, and the tcsrritorial possessit)ns of whole groups of tribes were
augmented at the expense of those less fortiiiiat(\ The liors(> made
wanderers of many tribes which there is sutlicient evidence to show
were formerly nearly sedentary. Firearms enforced migration and
caused wliole.sjilo changes in the habitats of tribes, which, in the
natural order of (events, it would have taken many centuries to pro-
duce. The changes resulting from these combined agencies, groat
as they were, are, however, slight in comparison with the tremendous
effects of tlm wholesale occupancy of Imlian territoi'y by Europeans.
As the aciiuisition of territory by tho .settlers went on. a wave of
migration from east to west was inaugurated which affected tribes
far remote from the point of disturbance, ever forcing them witliin
narrower ami narrower bounds, and. as time went on. ])roduciiig
greater and greater changes througiiout the entire cnuntry.
So much of the radical change in tribal habitats as took place in
the area remote from European settlements, mainly west of the
Mississippi, is chiefly iinrecordeil. save imperfectly in Indian tra-
dition, and is chic^fly to lie inferred from linguistic evidence and
from tho few facts in our po-jsession. As, however, the most im-
portant of thes(! changes ocdrred after, and as a njsult of, European
PnWCLL.I
INDIAN rol'lU.ATION.
33
occupancy, thoyaro noted in histuiy, and thus tho map roally gives
abettor idoaof tho pristino or jjrohiHtoric habitat of tho triboH than
at first nii>;iit bo tlionght i)OMsil)lo.
Boforo spoiikiiiK of ti'o motiiod of ostablishing tho boundary linos
botwooii tho linguistio fnniilioH, as thoy appear ui)on the iniip, the
nature of tho Indian claiin to laud and thu uiaauur and uxtuut of its
occupation should bo clearly sot forth.
POPULATION.
As tho (pu*stion of the Indian population of the country has a
direct l)earing upon the oxttMit to which tiui land was actually oecu-
l)iod, a fow words on tho subject will be introduced liore, particu-
larly as tho area included in tho linguistic map is so covered with
color that it may convoy a false iinprossion of tho density of the
Indian population. As a result of au investigation of tho subject of
tho early Indian population, Col. Mallory long ago arrived at tho
conclusion that their sottlonionts were not numerous, and that tho
population, as compared with tho onormous territory occupied, was
extronu^ly small.'
Careful examination since the publicatiou of tho above tends to
corroborate tho soundness of tho conclusions there first formulated.
The subject may bo sot forth as follows:
The sea shon*, tho borders of lakes, and the banks of rivers, where
fish and shell-fish were to be obtained in large ipiantities, were nat-
urally tho Indians' chief resort, and at or near such places were to
bo found their permanent settlements. As the settlements and lines
of travel of tho early colonists were along tho shore, the lakes and
the rivers, early estimates of tho Indian population were cliit^Hy
based upon tho numbers congregated along these highways, it being
generally assumed that away from the routes of travel a like popu-
lation existed. Again, over-estimates of population resulted from
tho fact that the samt* body of Indians visited different points
during tho year, and not infrequently were counted two or three
times ; change of permanent village sites also tended to augment
estimates of population.
For these and other reasons a greatly exaggerated idea of tho
Indian population was obtained, and the impressions so derived have
been dissipated only in comparatively recent times.
As will bo stated more fully later, the Indian was dependent to no
snuiU degree ujion natural products for his f(jo(l supply. Could it
be affirmed that the Nortli American Indians had increased to a
point where they pres.sed upon the food supply, it would imply a
very much larger population than wo are justified in assuming from
other considerations. But for various reasons the Malthusian law.
I'rou. Am. Ass. Adv. .Sfience, 1877, vol. 26.
I ETH-
-3
! i!
84
mniAN i.iNoinsTic kamit.iks.
whotln'rui)i>li('abl<M'lHowIi<'ro or not, ciiii not l»tMi|i|)lit'(l tot ho TndiaiiM
of tliis country. Kvorywlmn- lumiitiful imtiin* liiul provided an un-
failinKaud practically inuxhaiistihlo food Hiipply. TliorivcrH toemwl
with HhIi and luollusks, and the forcstH with k'1"ip- whilo iijion all
Hides was an abundance of nutritious roots and seeds. All i>f thesu
sources wero known, and to a larK" extent they wer»( drawn upon hy
the Indian, but tho practical lesson of pi'ovidin^? in the season of
^/lenty for tho season of scarcity had been but imperfectly learnecl,
or, when learned, was but partially a])plied. Kv(>n when taught by
dire experience the necessity of layin>^ upadeipuite stores, it was tho
almost universal practice to waste gn^it (juantities of food by a con-
stant succession of feasts, in the sup(n'stitious obs(»rvances of w!ii(di
tho stores were rapidly wasted an<l plenty soon khvo way to scarcity
and even to famine.
Curiously onouKh. the hospitality which is so mark(«l a trait
unions our North American Indians liad its source in a law, tho
invariable practice (jf whi(^h has had a markeil etfect in retardinj^
the accpiisition by the Indiar. of the virtue of providence. As is
well known, the l)asis of the Indian social organization was tho
kinship system. By its provisions almost all property was jjossessed
in common by the ^ima or clan. Food, tho most iiviportant of all,
was liy no moans left to be exclusively enjoyed by tho individual or
tho family obtaining it.
For instance, the di.«tribution of game among the families of a
party was variously provided for in different tribes, but tlie practi-
cal ottect of tho several customs relating thereto was the sharing of
tho suf>i)ly. The hungry Indian had but to ask to '-eceivo anil this
no malier how simill the supply, or how dark the fuiuro prospect.
It was not only his privilege to ask, it was his riylif lo (lei)iainl.
Undoubtedly what was originally a right, conferred by kin.ship con-
nections, ultimately assumeil broader jiroportions, and finally ])asse;l
into the exercise of au almost indiscriminate hospitality. By reason
of this custom, the p(jor hunter was virtually placed upon eciuality
with th.! expttrt one, the lazy witli the industrious, tho improvident
with tho more jjrovident. Stories of Indian life abound with
instances of individual families or parties being called upon by
those less fortunate or provident to share their supplies.
The (itfect of such a system, admirable as it was in nuiny particu-
lars, practically placo<l a premium upon idleness. Under such com-
munal rights and privileges a ])otent spur to industry and thrift is
wanting.
There is an obverse side to this proi)lein, which a long ami inti-
mate acquaintance with the Indians in tin ir vill.'iges has forced
upon tho writer. Tho communal ownership of food and the great
hospitality i)racticed by the Indian have bail a very much greater
iuUueuce upon his character than that indicated in tlu! foregoing
COMMCNAMSM tiK INUIANH.
rt'iniirks. Tlui ]ioc-uliiir JMHtitiitiDiiH provailiiiK ii> tluH roHpi'ct KWMi
t(» (Mic'li trilxt or cliui ii prot'ouiKl inlcrcHt in l:io skill, iiliility iin<J
iuduHtry i>f ouch iiudiihor. lln wiw tiin most valimhli' j«-is()ii in the
coninmnity wlio Hiippliod it with the moHt of its in'ci-witioH. For
tliiw rciiMon tl'.c Huccissfiil hiintor or fislicrnwin was ulwuys liolil in
lii^h honor, an<l lli>' woman who ^atht-riMJ groat ston> of scods,
fruits, or roots, ir who cnltivatod a j<""d corn-fioM. was one who
fommamli'il tho n'spcct ami !■ '(uvod the hij^host appi-oliation of tiio
jicopUt. Tlio simpit^ and nu ethics of n Irihal people are vi<ry
iinijortant to them, the more so hecauseof theiv communal institu-
tions; an<l everywhere thiouKhoiit tiio trihes of the ITiiiteil States
it is discovered that their rules of conduct went deeply implanttMl
in the minds of the peoplti. An orpmi/.ed system of teachinj^ is
always found, as it is the duty of cevtain otlicers of the clan to
instruct tho young in all the industrios uocessary to their rude life,
and simple maxims of industry abound among the trihes and are
enforced in diverse and interesting ways. Tlie power of the t?lder
nioa in tiio clan over its young momhors is always very great, and
the training of the y(»uth is constant and rigid. Hesi(his tliis, a
moral sentiment exists in favoi- of primitive virtues which is very
effective in violding characitor. This may he illustrated in two
ways.
Marriage among all Indian trihes is primarily hy legal appoint-
ment, as the young woman receives a hushand from some other
l>rescrihod clan or clans, and the eldt rs of the clan, with certain excep-
tions, control these nuirriages, and personal choiccf has little to do with
the affair. When marriages are proposed, tiie virtues and industry
of tho candidates, and more than all, their ability to i)roperly live
as married coujjles and to supply tho clan or tribe with a duo
amount of siibsistence, are discussed long mid earnestly, and the
young man or maidiMi who fails in this respect may fail m securing
an eligible and desirable imitcli. And these motives are constantly
presented to tho savage youth.
A simple democracy exists among these people, and they h:ive a
variety of tril)al ollices to fill. In this way the men of the tribe are
graded, and they ])ass from grade to grade by a selection practically
made by the people. And tiiis leads to a constiint discussion of tho
virtues and abilities of all the male members of the <Oan, from boy-
hood to old ag<'. He is most successful in obtaining clan and tribal
promotion who is most useful to tho clan and the tribe. In this
nninnor all of tho ambitious are stimulated, and this incentive to
industry is very great.
Wlien brought into close contac^t with the Indian, and into inti-
mate ac([uaintanco with his languagt», customs, and religious ideas,
there is a curious tendency observable in students to overlook
aboriginal vices and to exaggerate aboriginal virtues. It seems to
1 >
•M
INDIAN MNdiriHTIC! KAMIMKrt.
i! !l '
hi) f()ix<)ttt>ii tliivt ut'trr nil th*) IikIIhii is iiHiiva^o, witli tiii' cliiinu'tcr-
iHtifH of a Huvaf(i), ami lui is oxaltod t>vvn itlxivn tlu' civili/.tMl iiiiui.
Tliu toudt'iioy is oxiictly tln< n>v»<rst> of wiiiit it. is iti tlio caso of tlioHi)
wiio viuw tiiu litditiu at a diHtaiicu and with no pi-ccisi' knowlt'd>(ti of
any of liis characttiristicH. la thu oHtiniation of Huch pursons tho
Indian's vio's greatly oiitwxiKh his virtues; liis lanK»aK<< is a k!'*-
horish, his luothodH of war cowardly, his icUuis of r(>li(d;ion titturly
[lucriU'.
Tlio al)ov« tondnnclofl aro adcontuatud in tlm attcinitt to cstiniato
thu coniparativt) worth and position of individual tril)t>s. No h<tin>{
is uiuro patriotic; than tin* Indian. Hu holicvus himself to liu tho
residt of a special croatioii by a partial deity and holds tiiat his Ih
th« one favored race. The name by which the tribes distinguisii
thems(Oves from other tribes indicat»w the further conviction that,
as the Indian is abovu all created things, so in like nuiiinur each par-
ticular tribo is exalted abovo all others. "Men of men" is tho literal
translation of one name; "the oidy men" of anothei-. and so on
tlironj?h tim whole cat(«Kory. A louf,' residence with any ono trilto
freijuently inoculates tho stud-'ut with tho Hamo patriotic Hj)irit.
Bringing to his study of a particular tiibu an inade<|uate concept ion
of Indian attainments and a low impression of their moral and in-
tellectual plane, tho constant recital of its virtues, tho bravery and
prowess of its men in war, their generosity, the chaste conduct and
obedience of its women as contrasted with the opposite (pialities of
all other tribes, speedily tends to partisanship. He discovers iinmy
virtues and finds that thu moral and intellectual attainnuints aro
higher than he supposed; but these advantages he imagines to bo
possessed solely, or at least to an unusmil degree, by the tribe in
(juestion. Other tribes are assigned much lower rank in thu scale.
The abovu is peculiarly true of the student of language. He who
studies only one Indian language and learns its manifoM curious
grammatic devices, its wealth of words, its capacity of expression,
is spoudily convinced of its superiority to all other Indian tongues,
and not infrecjuently to all languages by whomsoever spoken.
If like admirable characteristics are asserted for <jther tongues he
is apt to view them but, as derivatives from one original. Thus ho
is led to overlook the greattruth that the mind of man is everywhere
practicallj' the same, and that thu innumerable difTerences of its
products are indices merely of difTureiit stages of growth oi" are the
results of diflForent conditions of environment. In its development
the human mind is limited by no bounilaries of tribe or race.
Again, a long acquaintance with juany tri])es in their homes leads
to thu Ixdief that savage jxiople do not lack industry so much as
wisdom. They are capable of performing, and nften do perform,
great and continuous labor. The men and women alike toil from
day to day and fnjiu year tu year, engaged iu thoso tasks that aro
m«aLi..|
IMI'KOVII)KN( K OK I.NIMANH.
«7
|)n>M«*iitt><l with tliH r«*(MirriiiK hoiihdiih. In civilization. liuntiiiK aini
tiHliiri^ iii'i* iil'tt'ii cotiHiiliM-tMl Hpoi'ts, hut ill HiiviiKcry thi>y iir<> htliorx.
and call for i'n<liiranci>, patience, and Na^acity. And th**H<t arti tixor-
cJHt'd to a niaNonahle dc^i'cti anions all Hava^e pcoplcH.
It in prnlial>li' that the real dillicnlty of pnrchaMint; <|nantities of
fiHid IriMn IndiauH han, in numt cancH, not iieen propei'ly nnderstnod.
Uid(*HH tho alien in present at a time of Kreatahiindain'e, when there
Ih inure <in liand i>i' eanily nhtainalde than snilicient tn niipply the
wantH of the pi'iiple, I'dod can ridt lie ImuKht ul' the IndianH. ThiH
ariHcH fruni the fact that th« trilial tenure Ih com... Mml, and t<i ut-i
food hy purchase reipiires a treaty at which all the leadin>< inenihers
of the ti'ihe are present and K'^''' consent.
As an illustration of the improvidence of tlii< Indians ^eneially,
the haliits of the tribes alon^ the (.'oluniliia River may lie cited. The
C'Vilumhia Hiver has often lit>en pointed to as the proliahle source of
a great part of the Indian population of this country, hecausi' of tin-
onornious supply of salmon furnished l:y It and its triliutaries. If
an abundant and nuulily obtaiiu'd supply of food waH all that was
necessary to insuni a large population, and if population always iii-
creaseil up to the limit of food sii|iply, uu(|uestionalily the theory of
repeated, migratory waves of surjilns jKipnlation from the Columbia
VaUcy would be phiusible encnigh. It is only nocossary. however, to
turn to the accounts of the earlier explorers of this region, Lewis
and Clarke, for example, to refute the idea, ho far at least as th«
Columbia Valley is coiu-eriu'd, although a study of the many diverse
languages spread over the Hinted States would seem sufliciently to
prove that the tribes speaking them couhl not liavo originated at a
common center, unless, indeed, at a period anterior to the fornuition
of organized language.
The Indians inhabiting tlie Columbia Valley were divided into
nuvny tribes, belonging to stiveral distinct linguistic families. Thoy
all worn in the same culture status, however, and ditTered in habits
and arts only in minor particulars. All of them had recoui'se to the
salmon of the Columbia foi- the main part of their subsistence, and
all practiced similar crude methods of curing fish and .storing it away
for the winter. Without exception, judging frfim tin* nccount.s of
the above meutioni'il and of more recent authors, all the tribes suf-
fered piM'iodically nuire or less from iiisuflicient food supply, although,
with the exorcist! of due forethought and economy, even with their
rude methods of catching and curing salmon, emmgh might here
have been cured annually to suilice for the wants of the Indian popu-
lation of the entire Northwest for .several years.
In their ascent of the river in spring, before the salmon run, it
was only with gi'cat ilitTiculty that Lewis and Clarke were able to
provide themselves by purchase with tMiough food to keep themselves
from starving. Several parties of Indians from the vicinity of the
' '. It
38
INDIAN MN(UTISTIC KAMIMKS,
¥
Dalles, till' Lost Hsliiiig station on tlie river, were met on their way
down in (juest of food, their supply of dried salmon having been
entirely exhausted.
Nor is tiiero anything in the accounts of any of the early visitors
to the Columbia Valley to authorize the belief tiiat the ])opulati()n
there was a very large one. As was the case with all fish-stocked
streams, the Columbia was resorted to in tliu fishing season by many
tribes living at considerable distance from it; but there is no evi-
dence tending to show that the settled population of its banks or of
any part of its drainage basin was or ever had been by any means
excessive.
The Dalles, as stated above, was tlie best fishing station on the
river, and the settled population there nuiy be taken as a fair index
of that of other favorabl(> locations. The Dalles was visited by rloss
in July, 1811, and the following is his statement in regard to the
population :
The luain cami) of the IndianH is Hituateil at tlip head of the narrows, and may
••ontain, during tlie salmon season, iJ,0(M) souls, or more ; but the constant inhab-
itants of the place do not exceed 100 jHTSons.and are called Wy-ani-panis; the rest
are all foreigners from different trilK-s throughout the country, who resort hither,
not for the jiurposo of catching salmon, but chiefly for gambling and 8i)eculation.'
And as it was on the Columbia with its enormous supply tjf fisii,
so was it elsewhere in tins United States.
Even the practice of agriculture, with its result of providing a
more certain and bountiful food supply, seems not to have had the
etfect of materially augmenting the Indian population. At all events,
it is in California and Oregon, a region where agriculture was
scare ly practiced at all, that tin; most dense aboriginal population
livec. There is no reason to believe that tliere ever existed within
the limits of the region inchuled in the map, with the possible excep-
tion of certain areas in Calif(n"nia, a population equal to the natural
food supply. On the contrary, there is every reason for believing
that the popuhition at the time of the discovery might have been
many times more than what it actually was had a wise ecoiu)my been
practised.
The elfe<'t of wars in decimating the people has often been greatly
exaggerated. Since the advent of the white man on the continent,
wars have prevailed to a degree far beyond that (sxisting at an earlier
time. From the contest wiiich necessarily arose between the native
tribes and invading nations nuiny wars resulted, and their history is
well known. Again, tribes driven from their ancestral homes often
retreated to lands ])reviously occupied by other tribes, and intertribal
wars resulted therefrom. The accpiisition of firearms and horses,
through the agency of white nu'u, also had its infiuenct*, and when
a commercial value was given to furs and skins, th(« Iiulian aban-
' Adventures on the Cohunbiu liiver, 1S49, p. 117.
POWELL.]
OWNKKSIIII' OK LAND.
39
doned agriculturo to piirsiie luiiitiii^>- and traffic, and sought new
fields for such enterprises, and many new contests arose from tliis
cause. Altogether the character of the Indian since the discovery
of Columbus has been greatly changed, and he hiis bei-onie far more
warlike and predatf)ry. Prior to that time, and far away in the
wilderness lu^yond such influence since that time, Indian tribes
seem to have lived together in comparative ])eace and to have settled
their difficulties by treaty methods. A few of the tribes h.id distinct
organizations for i)urposes of war; all recognized it to a greater or
less extent in their tribal organization; but fnjui sudi study as has
been given the subject, and from the many facts collected from time
to time relating t(i the intercourse existing between tribes, it appears
that the Indians lived in comparative peace. Their accumulations
were not so great as to be tempting, and their modes of warfare
were not excessively destructive. Armed with clubs and spears and
bows and arrows, war could be prosecuted oidy by hand-to-hand
conflict, and depended largely upon individual prowess, while battle
for plunder, tributts and conquest was almost unknown. Such inter-
tribal wars as occurred originated from other causes, such .as infrac-
tion of rights relating to hunting grounds and fisheries, and still
oftener prejudices growing out of their superstitions.
That which kejit the Indian population down sprang from another
source, which has sometimes been neglected. The Indians had no
reasonable or efficacious system of medicine. They believed that dis-
eases were caused by un.seen evil beings and by witchcraft, and every
cough, every toothache, every headache, every chill, every fever,
every boil, ami every wouiul. in fact, all their ailments, were attrib-
uted to such cause. Their so-called medicine jjractice was a horrible
system of sorcery, and to such superstition human life was sacrificed
on an enormous scale. The sufferers were given over to priest doc-
tors to be tormented, bedeviled, and destroyed; and a universal and
profound belief in witchcraft made them suspicious, and led to th(>
killing of all susjjected and obno.xious people, and engendered blood
feuds on a gigantic scale. It may be safely said that while famine,
pestilence, disease, .ind war may have killed many, superstition
killed more; in fact, a natural death in a savfige tent is a compara-
tively rare phenomenf)n; but death by sorcery, medicine, and blood
fend arising from a belief in witchcraft is exceedingly conunon.
Scanty as was the jiopulation compared with the vast area teem-
ing with natural products capable of sujijiorting human life, it may
bo .safely said that at the time of the discovery, and long prior
th(»reto, practicidly the whole of the area included in the present
map was claimed and to sonu; (extent (/; .'upied by Indian tribes; l)ut
the possession of land by the Indian by no means implies occu-
pancy in th(> modei'ii or civilized sense of tlu* term. In the latter
sense occupation means to a great extent individual control -nd
III
it
I I*
40
INDIAN MNOUISTK! FAMILIES.
ownership. Very different was it witli the Indiana. Individual own-
ership of land was, as a rule, a thing entirely foreign to the Indian
mind, and quite unknown in the culture stage to which ho belonged.
All land, of whatever character or liowever utilized, was held in
common by the tribe, or in a few instances by the clan. Ajti)arentiy
an exception to this broad .statement is to be made in the case of the
Haida of the northwsst coast, who have been studied by Daw.son.
According to liim' the laud is divided among the different families
and is held as strictly personal property, with hereditary rights or
possessions de.scondii:g from one generation to another. "The lands
may be bartered or given away. The larger salmon streams are,
however, often tlie property jointly of a number of families." The
tendency in this case is toward porscmal right in land.
TRIBAL LAND.
For convenience of discussion, Indian tribal land may be divided
irto three classes: First, the land occupied l)y the villages; second,
the laud actually employed in agriculture; third, tiie land claimed
by the tribe but not occupied, except as a liunting ground.
Villaije .siVf.s'.— The amount of land taken up as village sites varied
considerably in different pai'ts of tiio country. It varied also in the
same tribe fit different times. As a rule, the North American Indians
lived in communal hou.ses (jf siiflicient size to accommodate several
families. In such cases the village consisted of a few large striic-
tures closely grouped together, so that it covered very little ground.
When territory was occupied by warlike tribes, the construction of
rude palisades around the villages and the necessities of defense
generally tendc<l to compel tiie grouping of houses, and the per-
manent village sites of even the more populous tribes covered
only a very small area. In the case of confederated tribes and in
the time of peace the tendency was for one or more families to
establish more or less permanent settlements away from the m.ain
village, where a livelihood was more readily obtainable. Hence, in
territory which had enjoyed a considerable interval of peace the set-
tlements were in the nature of small agricultural communities,
established at short distances from each other and extending in the
aggregiite over a considerable extent of country. In the case of popu-
lous tribes the villages were probably of the character of the Choc-
taw towns descrilied by Adair.' "The barrier towns, which are
next to the Muskohge and Chikkasah countries, are compactly set-
tled for social defense, according to the general method of other
savage nations; but the rest, both in the center and toward the Mis-
sissippi, are only scattered plantations, as be.st suits a separate easy
■ Report on the Queen Charlotte lalands, 1878, p. 117.
' Hist, of Am. Ind., 1775, p. 282.
7" 4
POWELL.)
INDIAN AGUICULTIIHAL LAND.
41
way of liviiifif. A stranger might l)o in tlie iniddio of one of tlieir
populous, extensive towns without seeing lialf a dozen houses in tlie
direct course of his path." More ch)soly grouped settlements are
described by Waynt* in American State Papers, 1793, in his account
of an expedition down the Maumi* Valley, where he states that
"Tlie margins of the Miamis of the Lake and the An Glaize app<!ar
like one continuous village for a number of miles, nor have I ever
beheld such immense fields of corn in any part of America from
Canada to Florida." Such a chain of villages iis this was probably
highly exceptional; but even under siu:h circumstances tiie village
sites proper formed but a very small j)ai't of tne total area occupitMl.
From the foregoing considerations it will be seen that the a. .Dunt
of land occupied as village sites under any circumstances was incon-
siderable.
AijrieuUural land. — It is practically impossible to make an accu-
rate estimate of the reljitive amiiunt of land demoted to agricultural
purposes by any one tribe or by any family of tribes. None of the
factors which enter into the i)roblem are known to us with sufficient
accuracy to enable reliable estimates to be made of the amount of
land tilled or of the jn-oducts derived from the tillage; and only in
few cases have we trustworthy estimates of the population of the
tribe or tribes practicing agriculture. Only a rough api)roximation
of the truth can be reached from the scanty data available and from
a general knowledge of Indian methods of subsistence.
The practice of agriculture was chiefly limited to the region
■south of the St. Lawrence and east of the Mississippi. In this
region it was far more general and its results were far more impor-
tant than is commonly sujjposed. To the west of the Mississippi
only cf>mparatively small areas were occupied by agricultural tribes
and these lay chiefly in New Mexico and Arizona and along the
Arkansas, Platte, and Missouri Rivers. Tlu* rest of that region was
tenanted by non-agricultural tribes — unless indeed the slight atten-
tion i)aid to the cultivation of tobacco by a few of the west coast
tribes, notably the Haida, may be considered agriculture. Within
the first mentioned area mo.st of the tribes. i)erhaps .all, ])racticed
.agriculture to a greater or less extent, though unquestionably the
degree of reliance v>hu'ed upon it as a means of support differed
much with different tribes and localities.
Among m.any tribes agriculture w.as relied upon to supply an
important — and perhaps in the case of a few tribes, the most impor-
tant — part of the food supply. The accounts of some of the early
explorers in the southern United States, where prob.ably agricul-
ture was more systematized tlian elsewhere, mention corn fields of
great extent, and later knowledge of some northern tribes, as the
Iroquois .and some of the Ohio Valley tribes, shows that they also
raised corn in great (|uantities.
1 11
42
INDIAN MNGUISTIC FAMILIES.
I;i
Tlie practice of agriculture to a point wliere it shall prove the main
and constant supply of a people, however, implies a degree of seden-
tariness to which onr Indians as a rule had not attained and an
amount of steady labor without immediate I'eturn which was pecul-
iarly irksome to them. Moreover, the imperfect methods pur.suod
in clearing, planting, and cultivating sufficiently prove that the
Indians, though agriculturists, were in the early stages of develop-
ment as such — a fact also attested by the imperfect and one-sided
division of labor between the sexes, the men as a rule taking but
small share of the burdensome tasks of clearing land, planting, and
harvesting.
It is certain that by no trilie of the United States was agriculture
pursued to such an extent as to free its members from the practice
of the hunter's or fislier's art. Admitting the most that can be
claimed for the Indian as an agriculturist, it may be stated that,
whether because of the small population or because of the crude
manner in which his operations were carried on, the amount of land
devoted to agriculture within the area in question was infinitesimally
small as compared with the total. Upon a map colored to show only
the village sites and agricultural land, the colors would appear in
small spots, while by far the greater part of the map would remain
uncolored.
HkuHikj rlaiins. — The great body of the land within the area
mapped which was occupied by agricultural tribes, and all the land
outside it, was held as a common hunting ground, and the tribal
claim to territory, independent of village sites and corn fields,
amounted practically to little else than hunting claims. The com-
munity of possession in the tribe to the hunting gnmnd was estab-
lished and practically enforced by hunting laws, which dealt with
the divisi(ms of game among the village, or among the families of
the hunters actually taking part in any particidar hunt. As a rule,
such natural landmarks as rivers, lakes, hills, and mountain chains
served to mark with suiTicient accuracy the territorial tribal limits.
In California, and among the Haida and perhaps other tribes of the
northwest coast, the value of certain hunting and fishing claims led
to thtnr definition by artificial boundaries, as by sticks or stones.'
Such precautions imply a large population, and in such regions as
California the killing of game upon the land of adjoining tribes was
rigidly prohil)ited and sternly punished.
As stated above. t<very pai't of the vast area included in the present
map is to Ixj regarded as belonging, according to Indian ideas of land
title, to t)ne or another of the Indian tribes. To determine the sev-
eral tribal pos.sessions and to indicate the proper boundary lines
between individual tribes and linguistic families is a work of great
I Powers, (^oiit. N. A. Ktli. 1877, vol. 3, [>. lOB; Dawson, yueen ChurlotU> Islands,
1880, I), 117.
INDIAN CLAIMS TO LAND.
48
difficulty. Tliis is due more to the imi)erfection and scantiness of
available data concornins tribal claims than to the absence of claim-
ants or to any ambiguity in the minds of the Indians as tcj the bcmnd-
aries of their several possessions.
Not only is precise data wanting respecting the limits of land
actually held or claimed by many tribes, but there are other tribes,
which disai)peared early in the history of our country, the bound-
aries to whose habitat is to be determined only in the most general
way. Concerning some of tlie.se. our information is so vague that
the very linguistic family they belonged to is in doubt. In the case
of probably no one family are the data sufficient ' amount and
accuracy to determine positively the exact areas definitely claimed
or actually held by the tribes. Even in re^jpect of the territory of
many of the tribes of the eastern United States, much of whose land
was ceded by actual treaty with the Government, doubt e.xists. The
fixation of the boundary poin+p, when these are specifically men-
tioned in the treaty, as was tht rule, is often extremely difficult,
owing to the frequent chanj;os of geographic names and the conse-
quent disagreement of present with ancient maps. Moreover, when
the Indian's claim to his land had been admitted by Government,
and the latter sought to acquire a title through voluntary cession by
actual purchase, land assumed a value to the Indian never attaching
to it before.
Under these circumstanci ither under plea of immemorial occu-
pancy or of possession by nght of conquest, the land was cjften
claimed, and the claims urged with more or lesa plauvsibility by
several tribes, sometimes of the same linguistic family, sometimes of
different families.
It was often found by the Government to be utterly impracticable
to decide between conflicting claims, and not infrequently the only
way out of the difficulty lay in admitting the claim of both parties,
and in paying for the land twice or thrice. It was customary for .a
number of different tribes to take part in such treaties, and not
infrefjuently sevei-al linguistic families were represented. It was
the rule for each tribe, through its representatives, to cede its share
of a certain territory, the uiitural boundaries of which as a whole
are usually recorded with sufficient accuracy. The main purpose of
the Government in treat y-niiiking being to obtain possession of the
land, comparatively little attention was bestowed to defining the
exact r.r"as occupied by the several tribes taking part in a treaty,
except in so far as the matter was jn'essed upon attention by dis-
I)uting claimants. Hence the territory cliiimed by each tribe taking
part in the treaty is rarely described, and occasionally not all the
tribes interested in the proposed cession are even mentioned cate-
gorically. The latter statenuMit applies more particularly to the
territory west of the Mississippi, the data for determining ownership
m
m
U\
44
INDIAN MNOUISTIO FAMILIES.
to which is much less precise, and the doubt and confusion respecting
tribal boundary lines correspondingly greater than in the country
east of that river. Under the above circumstances, it will be readily
understood that to determine tribal boundaries witliin accurately
drawn lines is in the vast majority of cases (piite impossible.
Imperfect and defective as the terras of the treaties frecpiently are
as regards tlie definition of tribal boundaries, they are by far tlie
most accurate and important of the means at our command for fixing
boundary lines upon tlie present map. By their aid the territorial
possessions of a considerable number of tribes have been determined
with desirable precision, and such areas definitely established have
served as checks up(}n the boun<laries of other tribes, concerning the
location and extent of whose po.ssessions little is known.
For establishing the boundaries i,f such tribes as are not men-
tioned in treaties, and of those whose territorial ])ossessions are not
given with sufficient nrnuteness, early historical accounts are all
important. Such accounts, of course, rarely indicate the territorial
posse-ssions of the tribes with great precision. In many cases, how-
ever, the sites of villages are accurately given. In others the source
of information concerning a tribe is contained in a general statement
of the occupancy of certain valleys or mountain ranges or areas at
the heads of certain rivers, no limiting lines whatever being assigned.
In others, still, the notice of a tribe is limited to a brief mention of
the presence in a certain locality of hunting or war parties.
Data of this loose character would of course be worthless in an
attempt to fix boundary lines in accordance with the ideas of the
modern surveyor. The relative jiositions of the families and the
relative size of the areas occupied by them, however, and not their
exact boundaries, are the chief concern in a linguistic map, and for
the purpose of establishing these, and, in a rough way, the bounda-
ries of the territory held l)y the tribes composing them, these data
are very important, and when compared with one another and cor-
rected by more definite data, when siich are at hand, they have usually
been found to be sufficient for the purpose.
SUMMARY OF DEDUCTIONS.
In conclusion, the more important deductions derivable from the
data upon which the linguistic map is based, or that are suggested
by it, may be summarized as follows:
First, the North American Indian tribes, instead of speaking
related dialects, originating in a single parent language, in reality
speak many languages belonging to distinct families, which have no
apparent unity of origin.
.Second, the Indian population of North America was greatly
exaggerated l)y eai-ly writers, and instead of being large was in
reality small as compared with the vast territory occupied iind the
POWiSU..]
LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
45
abundant food supply; and furthermore, the jjopuhition had nowhere
augmented .sulTiciontly, except possibly in California, to press upon
the food supply.
Tliird, although representing a small population, the numerous
tribes had overspread North America and had possessed themselves
of all the territory, which, in the case of a great majority of tribes,
was owned in comnu)n by the tribe.
Fourth, prior to the ailvent of the European, the tribes? were
probably nearly in a state of ecjuilibrium, and were in the nuiin
sedentary, and those tribes which can be said with propriety to have
been nomadic became so oidy after the advent of the European, and
largely as the direct result of th« acquisition of the horse and the
introduction of firearms.
Fifth, while agriculture was general among tlie tribes of the east-
ern United States, and while it was spreading among western tribes,
its products were nowhere sufficient wholly to emancipate the Indian
from the hunter state.
LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
Within the area covered by the map there are recognized fifty-
eight distinct linguistic families.
These are eiuimerated in al))habotical ovdor and etu-h is accom-
panied by a table of the synonyms of the family name, together with
a brief statement of the geographical area occupied by each family,
so far as it is known. A list of the principal tribes of each family
also is given.
ADAIZAN FAMILY.
= Adaize, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti<i. Six;., u, 110, HW. I83B. Latham
in Pr<K'. PliiloloK. S<k'., Lond., n, 31-59, IS4B. Lathiun, 0|mscula, 29;!. 1(<6().
Gallatin inTrans, Am. Eth. fSoc., n, -xc-ix, 1848. Gallatin in Sch(M)U'raft Ind.
Tribeif, m, 402, 1853. Ijitham, EU-monts tJomp. Pliil., 477, 1803 (referred to as
one of the most isolated languages of N. A.). Keane, Apj). to Stanford's
Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 478, 1878 (or Adees).
= Adaizi, Prichard, Phya. Hist. Mankind, v, 406, 1847.
= Adaise, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Sw., n, pt. 1, 77, 1848.
= Adahi, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 343, 18.50. Latham in Trans. Philolog. S(k'.. Lond.,
103, 18.56. Liitham, Oimsciila, 366,368, 1860. Latham. Elements Comp., Phil.,
473, 477, 186i (same as his Adaize above).
= Adaes, Buschmann, Spiu-en der aztekischen Sprache, 434, 18.59.
= Adees. Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.) 478, 1878 (same as
his Adaize).
= Adai. Gatschet. Creek Mig. Leg., 41, 1884.
Derivation: From a Caddo word hadai, sig. "brush wood."
This family was based upon the language spoken by a single tribe
who, according to Dr. Sibley, lived about the year 1800 near the old
I.
;,:
1l
I g
46
INIMAN I.INOriKTKl KAMIMKS.
SpiiiiiHli fort or mission of Adrnzc. "iiboiit 40 niilos from Natclii-
todies, hclow tlio Yiittiissccs. on ii liikt- ('!i11(mI Lac Miii'iloii. wliicli
c-omimmicatt's witii tiit' division of lied River that jJaHses by Buyau
Pierre."" A vonibuiary of about two hundred and tifty words is all
that renuiins to us of their hin^{tuiKt', whieh accordinj^ to the eol-
lector. Dr. Sibley. '• differs from all otiiers, and issoditlicult to speak
or understand that no nation can speak ten words of it."
It WHS iro'.n an oxaniination of Sibley's vocabulary that Gallatin
reached tlio conclusion of tlie distinctness of this lanjjuage from any
other known, an ojiinion accepted l)y most later authorities. A
recent comparison of this vocabulary by Mr. Clatschet, with Hoveral
Caddoan dialects, has led to the discovery that a considerable per-
centage of the Ac'iiii words have a more or less rejnote atHnity with
Caddoan, and he regards it as a Caddoan dialect. The amount of
material, liowover, necessary to establish its relationship to Caddoan
is not at present forthcoming, and it may be doubted if it ever will
be, as recent inquiry has failed to reveal the existence of a single
member of the tribe, or of any individual of the tribes once sur-
rounding the Adai who remembers a word of the language.
Mr. Gatschet found that some of the older Caddo in the Indian
Territory remembered the Adai as one of the tribes formerly belong-
ing to the Caddo Confederacy. More than this he M'as unable to
learn from them.
Owing to their small numbers, their remoteness from lines of
travel, and their uuwarlike character the Adili have cut but a small
figure in history, and accordingly the known facts regarding them
are very meager. The first historical mention of them ajjpears to
be by Cabe(;a de Vaca. who in his " Naufragios," referring to his
stay in Texas, about IMH. calls them Atayos. Mention is also made
of them by several of the early French explorers of the Mississippi,
as d'Iberville and Joutel.
The Mission of Adayes. so called from its proxhnity to the liome
of the tribe, was established in 1715. In 17\)'i there was a partial
emigration of the Atlai to the number of fourteen families to a site
.south of San Antonio de Bejar, southwest Texas, where apparently
they am.ilgamated with the surrounding Indian population and were
lost sight of. (From documents preserved at the City Hall, San An-
tonio, and examined by Mr. Gat.schet in December, 188G.) The Adai
who were left in their old homes numbered one hundred in 1802, ac-
cording to Baudry de Lozieres. According to Sibley, in 1809 there
were only "twenty men of them remaining, but more women." In
1820 Morse mentiims only thirty survivors.
' Travels of Lewis and Clarke, London, 1809, p. 189.
I11WK1.I.. I
AI.(i(IN»}riAN lAMII.Y.
47
AUlONgUIAN FAMIIiY.
>AlK"nkin-Ijpnaj)P, Oiillatin in TrmiK. Am. Aiifi(|. H<x\,ll,2ii, !)05, lH;)(t. BcrKhium
(IHIf)), Plij-Mik. AtliiH, map 17, \MH. Il>i<l. 1H.V,>.
> Aludiiquin, niincroft, Ilixt. U. S., ill, L':i7, IWd. I'ricliurd PlijH. HiHt. Mnnkiiul, v,
;W1, iH(7 (f()lli>\vH(iallati|il.
> AlKonkiiiH, (lallatin in Trans. y\m. Ktli. .Sen:., II, pt. 1, xc-ix, 77, 184N. (Jaljatin in
Schoolcraft Ind. Trilics, ill, -lOl, IM.'iH.
>Alj?(mkin, Turner in I'ac. R. K. Kept., Ill, pt. ;t, .">, lM,')fl (nivcM Delaware anil
Hlmwnee vix^alm.). Ilayden, (.'out. Kth. and I'liil. MiHKonri IndH,, 282, IH02
(treats only of ( Veen, HIacUfeet, ShyenncH). Hale in Am. Antic). , 112, Ai)ril,
188!t (treated with reference to migration).
< AlKonkin, Uithani in TraiiM. Pliilolon- Hoc., Lond., lH,"iO (add.s to (iallatiiiH list of
IHHOtlie Hetliuck, .Sliyenne, niackf<iot.and Arrapaho). ljilliam,(JpiiKcula, ;t27,
IHHO («H in precedinK). Latham. KlementH Comp. Phil.. 447, lH(i2.
<AlKo"'iuin, Keano, App. .Stanford's Comp., (Cent, uiiil S. Am.), 480. 46.5, 1878
(list includes the Matpias, an Ircxpiois trihe).
>Saskatscliawiner, BerKhaus, Pliysik. Atlas, ina|) 17, 1848 (probably designateB the
Ara])aho).
>Arapah(H's, Berjihaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1H.")2.
X AlKonkin und Beothuk , Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1HH7.
Derivation; Coiitnictcd from Alfi^oiiK^ciiiiii, an Aif^onkin word, sii;-
iiifyiiig '"tlioHo on tlin otlior side of tin; rivur," i. o., tlio St. Liiwruiico
River.
ALCIONQUIAN AREA.
The aroa formerly occupied l)y tlie Algonqiiian fiimily wa.s more
extensive tlian that of any other linguistic stock in North America,
their territory reaching from Labrador to the Rocky Mtmntains, and
from Churchill River of Hudson Bay as far .south at least as Pam-
lico Sound of North Carolina. In the eastern part of this territory
was an area occupied by Iroquoian trilies, surrounded on almo.st all
sides by their Algoiujuian neigliltors. On the sonth thtiAlgoiKiuian
tribes were bordered by those of Iroipioian and Siouan (Catawba)
stfick, on the southwest and west by the Jluskhogean and Sioium
tribes, and on the ncjrthwest by the Kitunahan and the great Atha-
pascan families, while along the coast of Labrador and the eastein
shore of Hudson Bay they came in contact Avith the E.skimo, who
were gradually retreating before them to tlii^ north. In Newfound-
land they encountered the Beothukan family, consisting of but a
single tribe. A portion of tlic Shawnee at some early period had
separated from the main body of the tribe in central Tennessee and
pushed their way down to the Savannah River in South Carolina,
where, known as Savannahs, they carried on destructive wars with
the surrounding tribes until about the beginning of tlie eighteenth
century they wert> finally driven out and joined the Delaware in the
north. Soon afterwards the rest of the tribe was e.\])clle(l by the
Cherokee and Chicasa, who thenceforward claimed all the country
stretching north to the Ohio River.
V,¥<
>]'•■
48
INDIAN I,IN(UflHTlr KAMIMKH.
i'i
Tlio Clioyoiiiio Hiid Ara])Hli(). two iillii'd triltcs of this stork, liiid
liucomu HoptiriittMl t'loni tlitur kindred on tiio north iind liiid forct'd
tlieif way tliroiiKli lioslilo trihos uoroHH tho Missouri to Mm Black
Hills country of Houth Dakota, and nioro recently into Wyoinin^
and Colorado, thus forming tho a(.vanr(» ^jnard of tho Alj^oiKjiiian
«t<H'k in tluit diroction, having? tho Hiouan tribes behind thorn ami
thoBo of tho Shoshonoan family in front.
Abnaki.
Alp>n((uin.
Arapaho.
Choyonno.
Conoy.
Croo.
Dolawaro.
Fox.
Illinois.
Kickapoo.
Mahican.
Massacihusot.
PRINC'U*.VL AUION(jL'l.\N THIBES.
^^l•nonlint;o.
Miami.
Micnnic.
Mohcj^an.
MontajL;nais.
Montauk.
Miinsfo.
Nantic'oko.
Nai'm^ansot.
Nansot.
Nipnuu;.
Ojibwa.
Ottawa.
Paniliio,
Pennacook.
Po(inot.
Piankishaw.
Pottawotoini.
Powhatan.
8a(t.
Shawnta),
Hiksika.
Waini)an(jag.
Wajipingor.
I'lijutlofioii. —Tho i>ro.sont nniubcr of tho AlKoiiquian stook isaboiit
05,fi()0, of wlioni about (!0,()()0 aro in Cana(huind tin! romaindor in tho
United Statos. Bulow is Kivcn the ixipulation of tlu) tribes officially
rocojjnizod, conipiUnl chiotly from tho United Htutes Indian Com-
missioner's report for 1HS!» and tho Canadian Indian report for 1888.
It is impossible to give exact figures, owing to tlio fact that in nniny
instances two or more tribes ai-e enumerated togetlier, wiiilo nniny
individuals are living with other tribes or amongst tho wliitos:
Ahniiki:
" Oldtown Indiana," Maine 410
PasHiiiuaciiUKlily Indians. Maine 315?
AlM'nakiH of .St. Francis ami rW'canconr. QnclK'c 369
" AnialecitcH" of Ti'tnitwouata and Vi^cr, QiicIht 11)8
'• Anialcoitos"' of Madawatska, etc., New Urunswick 083
1,874?
AlKo»(|iiin:
Of Renfrew, (iolden Lake and ("arleton, Ontario 7U7
With Inxiuois (total VM) at (iihson, Ontario 31?
Witli Ir(M)U(iiH at Lake of Two Mountains, yuelxjc 30
QnelH-Hj I'rovince 3, IH)9
Arapaho:
C;heyenno and Arapaho Agency, Indian Territory 1 , 373
Shoshone Agency, Wyoming (Northern Arapalio) 88.^
Carlisle school, Pennsylvania, and Lawrence school, Kansas . r>f)
4,707?
2,3ia
pownix'.) AUlOXtllTJAX KAMIt.Y. 49
('lu'.vcniit':
I'iiic Hiil^'' A^cncv, Hoiiih Diikola (Ndrtlifrn ( 'lit-y<iiini>) .117
('lit'yi'iinc and Arii|iuliii Aki'ik'.v, Iniliiin IVrritiiiy 3,()UI
CiirliNli- HcliiMil, I'cniisylvitiiiii, iinil liiiwrciii')' hi'Ikn)!, Kuiisiih. . . . IDM
Tdiikuc KivtT Ant'Mcy, Moiitiina (Nortlifrri ('hfyciinc) M»l,"i
1».«86
With Halti'iiu in Manitolta, I'tc, RritiNli Anifricu (truatlra Noh. .
1 , a, and "i; total, n.lHMt) ;1, (Hltl?
Plain and VVihxI ( 'rw, treaty No. (I, Matiit<)l>a, (itc 5, 7IM)
Cri'*' (with Saltuau, utc), truaty Nn. 4, Manitoba, etc H, .V)0
n,»86?
Di'lawuri', etc. ;
Kiowa, ( 'onuinchc, and Wichita AKcncy, Indian Territory 95
Inoornoratcd with » 'hcrokcc, Indian Territory 1, (KM)?
Delaware with the Heiieea in New York 3
Hampton and Ijiwrenee Hrhooln H
Muncie in New York, prineipally with Onondaga and Henwa . . . 90
MnnHee with Htoekliridj^e (total HIM), (Ireen Hay A({eney. Wis. . . 28?
MuMHee with (!hip|H-wa at I'ottawatoniio and Oreat Nemaha
A^eney, KaiiHaw (total 75) 1(7 ?
Miinsee with (^'hip|Hfwa on the Thames, Ontario 181
" Moravians" of the Thames, Ontario 288
Delaware with Six Nations cm (}rand River, Ontario 134
1,750?
KiekajKH):
Hae and Fox A«eney. Indian Territory 835
I'ottawatomie and (treat Nemaha Agency, Kansiw 237
In Mexico .' 200?
763?
Menon\inee:
(Ireen Bay A^eney , Wisconsin 1,811
( 'arlislu school 1
i,8ia
Miami:
(.juapaw Agency, Indian Territory 6',
Indiana, no agency L"" ?
Lawrence and (.'arlisle schools 7
374?
Micmac;
Uestinouche, Maria, and tiaspe, (jiieU'c 732
In Nova Hcotia 2, 145
New Brunswick 912
Prince Etlward Island 8U)
4,108
Misisaupi:
Alnwick, New Cretlit, etc., Ontario 774
Monsoni, Maakej^on, etc.;
East<'rn RuiKTt's Land, British America 4, 016
Montaxnais:
Hetsianiits, Lake St. John, Cirand Roinaine, etc., (Quebec 1,607
Seven Islands, Quebec 812
1,910
NascaiKie:
Lower St. Lawrence, Queliec 2, 860
7 ETH 4
BO
INDIAN I.INlil'iKTK' l< AM 11,1 IIS.
(».|il>wii;
\Vliiu> Kiiirtli AKi'ncy. Miiini>iw)tit
1.11 I'oliitr Aifi'iH'V, WlwciiiHiri
Miirkliiiii' Aki'ik'.v, Mit'liiKiiiMJilHiiitoiif.tlilnlorn.niUIOItiiwuitiiil
t 'lli|l|H'\Mt)
Miii'kiiiiir Ai(i'iirv, MiiliiKiin (< 'lii|i|H'W'u iiloiu-)
Ih'vU'M Ijiki' Aki'Iii'v. Niirth |)iiki>lii(Tiirtli' Mdiiiihilii ( 'lii|i|i«'\viii.
riiltiiwiiliiniii- mill Ui'i'iit Nriiiitliii Aki'IICv, Kjiiihiim (ciiii'-liiiir of
7'% ( 'lii|i|ii'\vii mill Miiiii'ic)
Ijiwri'lirc mill ( 'iirllMlc HrliiMilH
*'()jililH'\viiN" of I,aki'Hii|H'riiii' mill Ijtkr lliirnii. Oiititrlii
'•( 'IiIium'wiik" iif Siiniiii, «•(<•.. Oiitiiriii
"( '1iI|i|m'\viim" witli MiiiiwcM iin Tlimiit'H, < )iiliiriii
"('lijpiK'wiiH" with I'lilliiwalniiiicH nil \Val|iiil<' Ixlmiil. Oiitiirln .
"OjililH'WiiM" Willi OlliiwiiH (ti)liil 1.H.V11 Dii MiiiiitDiiliii ami CiH'k-
liiiin IhIiiiiiIm, ( )iiliirli(
"Saltcmix" i>f ti'fatv Niw. It iitiil I, fir., MiiiiitnlHi, t't<'
"CliipiM'waM" with Cri'i'H in Miiiiilnlia. rl<'., trcaticM Niih. 1. '.',
iukI 5 (total ( 'lii|i|K'w 11 ami t'ri'c, 11,01111)
(1, '.'OJI
1.77M
\.:m
i.;mii
15
5, •JIM
i,(iriO
451
tCiM
It'.'M?
4, mi
nj^m
Otttiwii:
(^iiapaw A);<'iiry. ImliMii Tcrritorv
Mmkinai' Aki'Mcv, MirliiKaii (."),. MUt Ottawa ami ('lii|i|H'wal
Ijiwrcmc anil ( 'arlinli' hcIhmiIs
\Vitli '•((jibU'was" nil Maiiitoulin aiul (NH-kliiirii iHlamlH, On-
tario
Pt-oria, t'tc:
(jua|iaw AjtciK'v. I mliaii Territory ,
Lawrence ami CarliNli' hcIiuoIh. . . .
-:il,03H?
PottawiitDiiiic:
Hac ami Vox AKcncy. Imlimi Territory
I'ottawiitoiiiii' anil (irciit Ncnialia Agency, Kansas
MarkiniK- Agency, Mielii^an
I'rairii' liaml, Wisconsin
Carlisle. Lawrenee ami Itmiipton seliiKils
With ('hi|)|K'\va on WaliMjlu Islaml, Ontario
Iil7
:l,701t?
'JO
1I','H
4,7(14?
KM)
5
1115
4m
4iia
77
•JKO
117
IllU
Sac. and Fox:
Sac anil Kox .\>;ency, Iniliaii Territory
Hac ami Kox ,\j;ency, Inwii
Pottawatnniie anil (ir(>at Neinalm .Aneni'y, Kiilisas.
I^awreiice, Uaiiiiitnli, ami Carlish- hcIiooIm
l,r)H3
Shawnee:
(^uiiptiw .\m'mv. Inilian Territnry
Kac anil Kox .\Keniy. Imlian Territory
liicor|iipraleil with t'herokee. Inilian Territory.
Lawrcme. ( 'arlisle. anil Haiiipton s<'liix)ls
51. -i
:1HI
77
H
71»
nio
Hooy
40
1)81
Siksika:
Hlackfoot Aneiic.v, Montana. (HIai'kfont. HIuimI. Pie>;an)
Hlac.kfoot reserves in Allx'rta. Hritish .America (with Siircee ami
Assinilmine)
l.Hll
4,0;!2
1,559?
6,74:{
niwiM..|
AIMAI'AM AN !• AMII.V.
51
Ht(K'kl>riilKi'(Miitiii'iin):
(Iri'fii lluy AKi'iicy , WiHcoriHlii
Ill Niw York iwilli Tiiwiiriini miil S<-iiii'ii)
('iii'liNli' mIiihiI
ATMAI'AHCAN KAMILV,
no
7
4
l:.'!
> AtliiiiuiMiiH, (liilliiliii ill 'I'ritiis. mill ('.ill. Am. Aiitli|. Hoc. ii, ID. Miri. jKltl, I'rlih-
iiril, I'liyH. IliHt. .Mmikiiiil. v. ;i;.'i. |H|7. Oulliitin iii'I'i
Am. Kill. .Sill'., II, |it.
I, xclx. 77, {"IH. HcrKlmilH (1H|.-i|, I'hyHik. AHiim. iiiii|i 17. IHIH, Ihlil.. |H,-|I>,
Tiinii'i- ill ■• l.llmir.v W.iiM," '.'Hi. April 17, !M."i^> (n^fcrM A|iii<lir mul Niivn.jn to
IIiIh I'liiiiil.v on lliiKiiiHili' I'viili'iirri.
> Allm|iiirril«. (iiilllltlll in .SiliiKilriiilt. Iliil. 'I'lilK'n. III. till, |H,"i;|. (Kviilrlit iiiIh-
prliil.)
> Alliii|iiiH<'iin.'riiriii'i' ill I'm. It. It. Ki'p.. Ml. |il.;l.H.|, IH.VI. (.Men' iiii'iilioii of fiiin-
ily: Apiiclii'H mul ioii^i'iicih Ih'Ioiik to this t'ltmily. iin mIiowii liy him
iry Worlil." Iloopiih uImo iisMciti'd lo hr ,\(liii|m.s<'Hn.)
I.il
> AlliMliiwkmiH, Ijithmii.Niit. IIImI. Mmi.:i(i-,'. In.MI. ilfiiilrr Noilhcrn AlhiiliiwkiiiiM,
liirhiili'H Cliippi'wymis I'ioiht. Ilt'iivci' liiillmiN. l)iiho-iljiiiiiH..Sli'oii^ IIowh, lliirii
liiilimiH, Don-iiliH. Vi'llow Knivi'H, ( 'miifiH. iriulrr SoiithiTii AlhiiluiMkiinH,
inrliiili-H (p. illW) Ku'aliiH|NVit, TIalHkiiiiiii. Umkwii.)
= .MIiiiliiiMkiin, Ijtthmii in TniiiM. I'IiIIoIok. N<k'. I.,onil., I>.'i, (Ml. IK'ilt. MiiHchinaiiii
(IH.'it). I)(>r alliapiiHkiMi'hi' Sprai'liNtaiiim, ^'.'lO. IKMIiHoopahs, Apachi'H. anil Navit-
,joi-Hini'lniU>il). Latham. ()piiHrnla,:i;i:l, IHlKl. Latham. Kl.Coinp. l'liil.,:iHH, |nii^>.
Latham in Trans. I'IiIIoI.l;. Sih', LoiiiI., ii. III-.'iI). IHIII (iniliiati'H thi' roali'KccnrK
of Atlialiasnin family itli KHipiiiiiaiix). Latham (IHII), in .lour. Kth. Sih'.
l/iii(l..l. DU. |H4H( Na;;. Ill anil Tai'iilli rffirri'il to .\tlialiasi an). .Siniilrr (IHIIi), in
.lour. Kth. .Sue. Loml.
t;iO. IM4H. I^itliam. Opiismla.
•J.W. 'J7II, |M(t().
Kraiif. App. to Htanforil'w < 'oiiip. (Cent, ami So. Am.). 4tlO, HIM, 1M7H.
>Kiiiai, (iailatin in Trans, anil ''oil. Am. Antii|. Sik'., ii. It, nUT), 1s:|t)(Kinai ami
UKiilJachmnt/.i: <'onsiil<>ri'il to form a iliHtinct family, though utiirmi'il to have
alllnitii'rt with wcNtt-rn Ksi|iiimmi.\ ami with Athapasras). I'rirhanl. I'hyH. Hist.
Mankind, v. I4ii~li:t, |H.)7(follows(lallatin; alsoatlirms a relationship to A/.tee).
(iailatin in Trans. Am, Kth. .Six'.. 11, pt. t. 77, 1H|H.
> Keiiay, liiitham in Proe. I'hiloloj;. H<h'. T^inil.. II, !1'.J-H4, IS-ltl. Uitliam. Opiw-
ciilii. -'irK iNliO. Latham, Klements Comp. I'hii.. llHd. 18(12 (referreil to l-rftqui-
niaiix stoek).
>Kiiia'l/.i. I'rleliiinl. I'hys. Hist. Mankind, v, M\. 1847 (same rh IiIh Kinai iil)<)vi>).
> Keiiai. (iailatin in Trims. Am. Kth. Soc.. II. .\ei.\. IH-IH (see Kinai alH)ve). BllHch-
inaiin. Spiiren der aziek. Spraehi', tiU"). IM.Ii! (refers it to .\tliapaskan).
X Northern. Seonler in .lonr. Hoy.(ieoi;.S(M'. Loml., XI,21K, 1K41. (Inclndes Atniis,
Kolchans, and KenaVes of present family.)
X llaidah. Seonler. iliid.. i'ii (Hatne as his Northern family).
> ('lie|M'yanH, I'ricliard. I'hys. Hist. Mankind, v, ;i7.1, IHIT (same as Athupaseas
nlKjVe).
>Tahkali-l'mkwa. Hale in U. S. K.\pl.E.vp., vi, l!IH,i>01.,Wil, IMOCa hrancli of the
Kieat Cliippewyan. or .Athapa.scan, slock:" inclndes Curriers, yniilioKUas, Tlats-
kanies. Univcnas). (iailatin. after Hale in Trans. Am. Kth. Sih\. ii, pt.1,9, IHIW.
>Din<>thi. HiTKhaiis (IHJ.'i), I'hysik Atlas, map 17, 1H4K. Dipitlii. Lonchenx, iliiil.
\Hr,-i.
> Lilians, Iiathain. Nut. HiHt. Man, i)4U, ItiQU (Lipiuiti ^Sipauu) betwuvu Uiu Arkunsus
niul liiu Oruiidt!).
f i
52
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
> Tototune, Lathaiu, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, iiHiO (seacoast south of the SaintHkla).
> Ugaljachmutzi, Oallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1858 (" perhaiM
Athapascas").
>Umkwa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Sec. Lond., vi, 72, 1854 (a single tribe).
Latham, Opuscula, »- 1860.
> Tahlewah, Oibbs in Sciioolcraf t, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a single tribe). Latham
in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1866 (a single tribe). Latham. Opuscula, 342,
1860.
> Tolewa, (Jatschet in >Irig. Am. Hist., 108, 1877 (vocab. from Smith River, Oregon;
affirmed to be distincc from any neighboring tongue). Gatschet in Beach, Ind.
Miscellany, 488, 1877.
> Hoo-pah, Oibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 111,422, 1853 (tribe on Lower Trinity,
California).
>Hoopa, Powers in Overland Monthly, 155. August, 1872.
>Hu-p&, Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth., Ill, 72, 1877 (affirmed to be Athapascan).
= Tinneh, Dall in Pi . Am. Ass. A. S., xvill, 269, 1869 (chiefly Alaskan tribes).
Dall, Alaska and ta Resources, 428, 1870. Dall in Cont. N. A. Eth., I, 24, 1«77.
Bancroft, Native ivdces. III, 562, 583, 603, 1882.
= Tinne, Gatsciv ; in Mag. Am, Hist., 165, 1877 (special mention of Hoopa, Rogue
River, Umpqua.) Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 440, 1877. Oatacliet in Oeog.
Surv. W. lOCth M., vil, 406, 1879. Tolmio and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884.
Bcrgiious, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
=:Tinney, Keane, App. to Stanford's Conip. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878.
X Klamath, Kear.e, .\pp. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 475, 1878; or
Lutuanj, (Lototens and Tolewahs of his list belong here.)
Derivation: From the lake of the same name; .signifying, accord-
ing to Lacorabe, " place of hay and reeds."
As defined by Gallatin, the area occupied by this great family is
included in a line drawn from the mouth of the Churchill or Mis-
sinippi River to its source; thence along the ridge which separates
the north branch of the Saskatchewan from those of the Athapas-
cas to the Rocky Mountains; and thence northwardly till within a
hundred miles of the Pacific Ocean, in latitude 52° 30'.
The only triV)e within the above area excepted by Gallatin as of
probably a different jtock was the Quarrelers or Loucheux, living
at the mouth of Mackenzie River. This tribe, however, has since
been ascertained to be Athapascan.
The Athapascan family i hus occupied almost the whole of British
Columbia and of Alaska, and was. with the exception of the
Eskimo, by whom they were cut off .i nearly all sides from the
ocean, the most northern family in Noith America.
Since Gallatin's time the history of this family has been further
elucidated by the discovery on the part of Hale and Turner that
isolated branches of the stock have become established in Oregon,
California, and along the southern border of the United States.
The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are
best given under three primary groupb— Northern, Pacific, and
Southern.
I 1.
POWELL.]
ATHAPASCAN FAMILY.
63
Northern group. — This includes ail the Athapascan tribes of Brit-
ish North America and Alaska. In the former region the Athapas-
cans occupy most of the western interior, being bounded on the
lOrth by the Arctic Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow strip of coast;
on the east by the Eskimo of Hudson's Bay as far south as Churchill
River, south of which river the country is occupied by Algonquian
tribes. On the south the Athapascan tribes extended to the main
ridge between the Athapasca and Saskatchewan Rivers, where they
met Algon(iuian tribes; west of this area they were bounded on the
south by Salishau tribes, the limits of whose territory on Fraser
River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and Dawson's map of
1884. On the west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes
nowhere reach the coast, being cut oflP by the Wakashan, Salishan,
and Chimmesyan families.
The interior of Alaska is chiefly occupied by tribes of this family.
Eskimo tribes have encroached somewhat upon the interior along the
Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, an<l Noatak Rivers, reaching on the
Yukon to somewhat below Shageluk Island,' and on the Kuskok-
wim nearly or quite to Kolmakoff Redoubt.' Upon the two latter
they reach quite to their heads.' A few Kutchin tribes are (or have
been) north of the Porcupine and Yukon Rivers, but until recently
it has not been known that they extended north beyond the Yukon
and Romanzoff Mountains. Explorations of Lieutenant Stoney, in
1885, establish the fact that the regioii to the north of those mount-
ains is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map is colored
accordingly. Only in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes
reach the coast — the K'uaia-khotana, on Cook's Inlet, and the Ah-
tena, of Copper River.
Pacific group. — Unlike the tribes of the Northern group, most of
those of the Pacific group have removed from their priscan habitats
since the advent of the white race. The Pacific group embraces
the following: Kwalhioqua, formerly on Willopah River, Washing-
ton, near the Lower Chinook;* Owilapsh, formerly between Shoal-
water Bay and the heads of the Chehalis River, Washington, the
territory of these two tribes being practically continuous; Tlatscanai,
formerly on a small stream on the northwest side of Wapatoo
Island.' Gibbs was informed by an old Indian that this tribe
" formerly owned the prairies on the Tsihalis at the mouth of
the Skukumchuck, but, on the failure of game, left the country,
crossed the Columbia River, and occupied the mountains to the
' Dall, Map Alaska, 1877.
' Fide Nelson in Ball's address, Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. , 1885, p. 18.
'Cruise of the Coririii, 18M7.
«Oibl)s in Pai'. R. H. R.'p. I, IH.'i,'), p. 428.
' Lewis and Clarke, Gxp., 1814, vol. 2, p. 882
I '■ '■
54 •
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAM1MK8,
III'
south" — a statement of too uncertain character to be depended
upon; the Athapascan tribes now on tlie Grande Ronde and Silotz
Reservations, Oregon," whose villages on and near the coast extended
from Coquille River southward to the California line, including,
among others, the Ui)per Coquille, Sixes, Euchre, Creek, Joshua,
Tutu tunnS, and other "Rogue River" or "Tou-touten bands,"
Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tfinn? and Chetco villages;"
the Athapascan villages formerly t)n Smith River and tributaries,
California;' tliuje villages extending southward from Smith River
along the California coast to the mouth of Klamath River;* the Hupa
villages or "clans" formerly on Lower Trinity River, California;'
the Kcnesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: "They live along
the western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River,
above Round Valley, to Hay Fork ; along Eel and Mad Rivers,
extending down the latter about to Low Gap; also on Dobbins and
Larrabio Creeks;"' and Saiaz, who " formerly occupied the tongue
of land jutting down between Eel Rivisr and Van Dusen's Fork."'
Soufkeni group. — Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan.
Engineer Jose Ctn-tez, one of the earliest authorities on these tribes,
writing in ITUi), defines the boundaries of the Lipan and Apache as
extending north and south from 2!t° N. to 30" N., and east and
west from !»!)" W. to 11-4° W.; in other words from central Texas
nearly to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they met tribes of
the Yuman stock. The Lipan occupied the eastt^rn part of the
above territory, extending in Texas from i\w Comanche country
(about Red River) south to the Rio Grande.' More lecently both
Lipan and Ajjache have gradually moved southward into Mexico
where they extend as far as Durango.'
The Navajo, since first known to history, have occui)ied the coun-
try on and south of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico
and Arizona end extending into Colorado and Utah. They were
surrounded on iiU sides by the cognate Apache ex(U'pt upon the
north, where they meet Shoshonean tribes.
' (Jatschet ami Dorsey. MS., ISSJ-'SI.
«lJoi>*y, MfS., iiia|). ISHl. H. E.
•'Ilainiltiin, MS.. HayimrKiT V<k"vI>., B. E.; Power's, Coiitr. N. A. Etliii., 187
vol. ;t. I), (i."). ^
MJorscy. MS., map. 18H4. R E.
'Powers, C;ontr N. A. Etiiii.. 1877, vol. 3, -tp. 73,7:?.
«l'owei-H. (;ontr. N. A. Etlm., 1877, vol. 8, |). 114.
'I'owi'i-H. Coiitr. N. A. Etlin.. 1877, vol. :!, p. Vi'i.
"Cort •/. in I'ae. I{. |{. Itep., ISjt!. vol. :i, pt. ;t, pp. 1 18, Hi).
" lUitlett, l'er.s. Nan-., is,")-!; Oro/Aoy Henu, (ieoK., 18()4.
POWELL.] ATIIAHASKAK FAMILY. 00
PRINCIPAL TUIUES,
A. Northern group:
Ah-teiia. Kiitchin. Sluacus-tinneli.
Kaiyuli-khotana. Moiitagnais. Taculli.
Kcaltaiia. Montaguards. Tahl-tan (1).
K'liaia-khotana. Nagailer. Unakliotana.
KoyukiTkhotaua. Slave.
B. Pacific group:
Ataftkut. Kwalhioqua. Taltftctun tfttle (on
Cliasta Costa. Kwa^ami. Galice Creek).
Clietco. Micikqwutnie tiinnP. Tceme (Joshuas).
Dakuho tede (on Ap- Mikono tiinnf . Tcetlfistcan tiinng.
plegate Creek). Naltunne tunnP. Terwar.
Euchre Creek. Owihipsli. Tlatscanai.
Hupa. Qwinctunnetun. Tolowa.
Kftlts'erea tfiniii". Saiaz. Tututfinur',
Kenesti or Wailakki.
C. Southern group):
Arivaipa. Lipan. Navajo.
Chiricahua. Llanero. Pinal Coyotero.
Coyotero. Mescalero. Tclifkun.
Faraone. Minibreno. Tchishi.
Gilefio. Mogollon.
Jii'arilla. Na-isha.
J'opiihilion. — Tlie prc^seiit number of the Athapiiscan family is
about iJ-i.sO!), of wlioni about S,5!i.'), constituting tlie Northern group,
are in Alaska and Britisli North America, according to Dall, Daw-
son, and tlie Canadian Indian Report for bS88; about SltS, comprising
the Pacific gnjup, are in Wasliington. ()reg(Jii, and California; and
aliout •^:{,4(i0, belonging to tlie Soutliern group, are in Arizona, New
Mexico, Colorado, ami Indian Territcu'y. Besides these are the Lipan
and sorao refugee Apadie, wlio ai-e in Mexico. These luive not been
in(dii<h'd in the above enumeration, as tiiere are no means of ascer-
taining their nuinbcr.
Nortliern grou]). — This may lie said to consist of the following:
Ah-tciuv (IHTT) 364?
Ai-yan (ISHH) 350
Al-ta-tin (Siciinnie) i'Htimal<-(t (IHSH) 000
of \v1k)Iii thfi-c iiri' at Kurt Halkctt (1SK7) 73
of wlidiii tlH'iv arrat Fort T-iar(l(lss7) 78
Cliippcwvan, Yellow KiiIvi'h, wiili a few Slave ami Dok Hlli at Fort Res-
olution 109
Dofj; Kil) at Fort Noniiaii 133
D(« Uili, Slave, and Yellow Knives at Fort Kae 0.")7
Hare at Fort (jood Ho|)e 304
Mii
56
INDIAN lilNOUISTlO FAMILIKS.
Hare at Fort Norman
Kai-yuh-kho-U'iiia (1877), Ku; akukl.ufiina ( tH77), and ITnakliotana (1877). . .
K"nai-a Khotana (1«80)
Kutchin and Baj^tard Louclieux at Fort Good Hope
Kutchin at Peel River and La Pierre's House
Kutcliin on the Yukon (six trilies)
Nahanie at Fort Good Hope 8
Nalianie at Fort Halkett (includin); Mauvais Monde, Bastard Na-
hanie, and Mountain Indians) 3i>3
Nahanie at Fort Liard 38
Nahanie at Fort Norman 43
10»
2, 000?
350?
05
887
843
Nahanie at Fort Simp ~ in anil Big Island (Hudson Bay Company's Terri-
tory)
Slave, Dog Rib, and . Ii. e at Fort Simi>son and Big Island (Hudson Bay
Company's Territory ,
Slave at Fort Liard
Slave at Fort Norman
Tenan Kutchin (1877) .'
To the Pacific Qroiip may be assigned the followiner:
Hupa Indians, on Htwpa Valley Reservation, California
Rogue River Indians at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon ....
Siletz Reservation, Oregon (almut one-half the Indians thereon).
Umpqua at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon
431
87
668
381
84
700?
8,595?
468
47
300?
80
8C5?
Southern Gronp, consisting of Apache, Lipan, and Navajo:
Apache children at Carlisle, Pennsylvania 143
Apache prisoners at Mount Vernon Barracks, Alabama 3^
Coyotero Apache (San Carlos Reservation) 738?
Jicarilla Apache '■ luthern Ute Reservation, Colorado) 808
Lipan with Tonka Nvay on Oakland Reserve, Indian Territory 15?
Mescttlero Apache (Mescalero Reservation, New Mexico) 513
Na-isha A|)ache (Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian
Territory) 836
Navajo (most on Navajo Reservation, Arizona and New Mexico; 4 at Car-
lisle, Pennsylvania) 17, 308
San Carlos Apache (San Carlos Rei^rvation, Arizona) 1, 353?
White Mountain Apache (San Carlos liescrvotion, Arizona) 86
White Mountain A|>ache (under military at Camp A|)ache, Arizona) 1,930
33,400?
ATTACAPAN FAMILY.
=Attacapa8, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 116, 306. 1836. Galla-
tin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc-., n, pt. 1, xcix. 77, 1848. Latham. Nat. Hist. Man,
343, IH.'iO (includes Attacapos and ('aranktias). (iallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Trilxjs, ni, 403, 1H53. Rusclnnann. Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, laiO.
=Attacai»a, I^iitham in Pnx'. Pliilolog. .S<h'. I.Kmd.. il, SI-.TO, 1H46. Pricliard, Phys.
Hist. Mankind,' 406. 1H47 (or" Men caters"). Latham in Trans. Philolog.
Soc. lAMid., 105, IB.'JO, Latham, Opuscula, 303, I860.
Hi i
FOWKLL.J
ATl'AOAPAN UEOTIIUKAN FAMILIES.
57
— Attakapa, Latham in Trans. Pliilolog. Soc.Lond., 103, 18.'i6. Latham, Opuscula,
ma. \m). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 477, 1863 (referred to as one of the two
most isolated languages of N. A.).
=Atukapa, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., I, 45, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, Apr.
3«, 1887.
Derivation: From a Choctaw word meaning "man-eater."
Little is known of the triV)e, the hmguage of which forms the
basis of the present family. The sole knowledge possessed by Gal-
latin was derived from a vocabulary and some scanty information
furnished by Dr. John Sibley, who collected his material in the
year 1805. Gallatin states that the tribe was reduced to 50 men.
According to Dr. Sibley the Attacapa language was spoken also by
another tribe, the " Carankouas," who lived on the coast of Texas,
and who conversed in their own language besides. In 1885 Mr. Gat-
schet viaited the section formerly inhabited by the Attacapa and
after much search discovered one man and two women at Lake
Charles, Calcasieu Parish, Louisiana, and another woman living
10 miles to the south; he also heard of live other women then
scattered in western Texas; these are thought to be the only survi-
vors of the tribe. Mr. Gatschet collected some two thousand words
and a considerable body of text. His vocabulary differs considera-
bly from the one furnished by Dr. Sibley and published by Gallatin,
and indicates that the language of the western branch of the tribe
was dialectically distinct from that of their brethren farther to the
east.
The above material seems to show that the Attacapa language is
distinct from all others, except possibly the Chitimachan.
l!
BEOTHUKAN FAMILY.
=Bethuck, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (stated to be "Algonkin
rather than aught else"). Latham, Opuscula, 337, 1860. Latham, El. Comp.
Phil., 453, 1862.
=Beothuk, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 408, Oct., 1885. Gatschet, ibid.,
411, July, 1886 (language affirmed to lepresent a distinct linguistic family),
Gatschet. ibid. , 1 , Jan . -June, 1890.
Derivation: Beothuk signifies "Indian" or "red Indian."
The position of the language si)oken by the aborigines of New-
foundland must be considered to be doubtful.
In 184G Lathfim examined the material then accessible, and was
led to the somewhat ambiguous statement that the language " was
akin to those of the ordinary American Indians rather thau to the
Eskimo; further investigation showing that, of the ordinary Ameri-
can languages, it was Algf)nkin rather than aught else."
Since then Mr. Gatschet has been able to examine a much larger
and more satisfactory body of material, and although neither in
amount nor quality is the material sufficient to permit final and
58
INDIAN LINGUISTK! FAMI!,IKS.
'CT
satisfactory dodut'tions, yt't so far as it goos it slunvs that the lan-
guaj^o is (luito distinct from any of tlio Algonciuian dialects, and in
fact from any other American tongue.
OEOORAPHIO DISTRIBUTION.
It seems higlily probable that the wliole of Newfoundhxiid at the
time of its discovery by Cabot in 14!t7 was inhabited by Beothulv
Indians.
In IH'-U Cartier met witli Indians inhabiting the sonthea.stern part
of the ishind, wlio, very liltely, were of tliis people, though the
description is too vague to pcu-init certain identification. A century
later the southern portion of the island appears to have been aban-
(h>ned by these Indians, whoever tliey were, on account of European
settlements, and only the nortliern anil eastern parts of the island
were occuj)ied by tiu'in. About the b((giiiuing of the eighteenth
century western Newfoundland was colonized by the Micmac from
Nova Scotia. As a conseiiueiice of the persistent warfare which
followcid the advent of the latter and which was also waged against
tlie Beothuk by the Europeans, especially the French, the Be.ithuk
rapidly wasted in numbers. Tlu ir main territory was .soon confined
to the neighborhood of the E.Kploits River. The tribe was finally
lost sight of about 18^7, having become extinct, or i)ossibly the few
survivors having crossed to the Labrador coast iind joined tlie Nas-
ca])! with whom thi.^ tribe had always been on friendly terms.
Upon the maj) only the small portion (jf the island is given to the
Beothuk which is known definitely to have been occupied by them,
viz., the neighborhood of the Exploits River, though, as stated
above, it .seems probable that the entire island was once in their
possession.
CADDOAN FAMILY.
>CiiiUliH's. Callatiii in Trans. juiil Coll. Am. Aiitii). .Soe., II. 11«. :«)(>. lS;iO (himotl on
(,'ml(l(K'sal(>n('). I'liilianl. I'hys. Hist. .Mankiiwl. v,40((, 1S47. (iallatiii in S<lio<il-
craft, Inil. Trilx's. m. tO'J, IS.")!! Ikivi's as lanKuaKes Caddo, Ki'd Kivcr. (Nanda-
k<«'s, Taohii's. Nabi'daclu's)].
^("addokii's, (iailatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antici. Soc, ii. IKi. ls;t(> (same jls liis
Ca<ld(H's). I'riclianl, I'livs. Mist. Mankind, v, 4(m. 1S4;.
>Caddo, liiitham in Trans. I'liilolo);. Soe. I>ond.. II. :i 1 -.")<), I S4ti (indicates altinities
with Ini(|Uciis, Mnskoffc. Catawlia, I'awnci'). (iailatin in Trans. Am. Etii. Sck-.,
n.|)t. 1. xi'ix. 77, ISIS. (Caildo only). Hcrnlians ( 1S4.")). I'liysik. Atlas, map 17,
1H4S (Caddos.i.tc). Iliiil.. |S.V,>. r,atliaM', Nat. Hist. Man. IlliS, ls,-)(( (iK'twwn the
Mississippi and Saliinc). l-atliam in Trans. I'hiloloj;. Sik'.. liond.. KM. IS.'ifl.
Turner in I'ae. 1{. K. Ifep., ui, pt. :!. .Vi, 7(1. 1S,")(! (tinds rcsenddances to l'awne«>
laitkeepstliem separate). Hnselunanii.Spnren dera/.tek.Spra<'lie,4'.J(i.44H, ts,"»0.
r,atham.()pusi'iila. L'!l(l. ;!(')(>, lS(i().
><'a(ldo. r.atliam. Elements Conip. I'liil.. 47(1. IHtVJ (inchides Pawni and Kiecari).
>l'a\vnees. Calltilin in Trans, and Coll. .Vni. Anti(|. Sik'., U. I'.'S, :t(M!. ls;i(i (two
nations: Pawnees i)ro|)er and Hicarius or lilaek Pawnees). I'riclianl, I'liys. Hist.
Mankind, v. 4(tS. IS47 (follows (J.illatinl. (iallatm in Trans. Am. Ktli. S.h'.,
POWKLU]
OADDOAN FAMILY.
S9
II, pt. 1, xcix, 1S48. Lothiiin, Nat. Kist. Miui, :)44. 1850 (or Panis; includes L<nip
uml Ut'publk'un Pnwnce.s). (iiUlatiii in ScliiM>lcruft, Ind. TriU-n, ill, 403, 1853
(j;ive8 iiH laiiKniinti'w: PawnceH, KicaraH, TawaltenK'H, TowekoH, Waclios?).
Haydi'n,Cont. Eth. anil Phil. Miwouri IndianH, 233, .S45, 1802(incliidt'sPawnei'«
and Aril<araH).
>Pa'iiH, (lallatin in Trans, and CkiU. Am. Antiq. Soc.. u, 117, 138, 18;i8 (of Red
Kivei- of T»'xa.s: ini^ntion of villant's: doulitfuUy in<licated an of Pawnee family).
Pricliard. Phys. Hint. Manl<ind, v. liiT, 1847 (supposed from name to Ix! of same
race with Pawnees of the Arkansa). Latham, Not. Hist. Man, ;t44, 18.'»() (Paw-
nees or), (iallatin in Seli(K)k'raft, Ind. Tril)es, in, 402, 18,53 (here kept separate
from Pawnee family).
>Pawnies, (tallatiii in Trans. Am. Eth. Hoc., ii, pt. 1, 77. 1848 (see Pawnee aliove).
>Pahnie8, I)erghaus(1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1*18. Ihid.. 18.53.
>Pawneo(?), Turner in Pae. It. R. Rep., in, jrt. 3, 55, 05, 1850 (Kiihai and Hueco
vocabularies).
=Pawnee, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (dent, and So. Am.), 478, 1878(>;ive8
four grmips, viz; Pawnees proiHT; Arickarws: Wicliitas; Caddoes).
=Pani,(}at8chet, (Jreek Mig. Lt!gen<l, i, 43, 1884. Pernhaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72,
1887.
>Towlaches, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Hoc., n, 110, 138, 1830 (same
ius Panis al)ove). Pricliard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 407, 1847.
>Towia<'lis, Ijathain, Nat. HLst. Mau, 349, 1850 (includes Towiach, Tawake'noes,
Towecas ?, Wacos).
>Towiacks, (iallatin in f^choolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 403. 1853.
>Natchitoclies, (Iallatin in Trans, and (loll. Am. AntiipHoc., ll, 110, 1830 (st.ated by
Dr. Sibley to sjH'ak a lanjj^aKe different from any other). Liitliam, Nat. Hist.
Man, 343, 1850. Pricliard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 400, 1847 (after Uallatin).
Gallatin m Schoolcraft, Ind. Tril)es, in, 402, 18.53 (a single trilw only).
>Aliche, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 340, 18.50 (near Nacogdoches; not classified).
>Yaliussees, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., ll, 110, 1830 (the single
trilH'; siiid by Dr. Sibley to Ih! different from any other; referred to as a family).
>Riccarecs, I^itham, Nat. Hist. Man. 344, 1850 (kept distinct from Pawnee family).
>\Va.sliita, Uitham in Trans. Philolog. S<k:., Lond., 103, 18.50. Hu.si'hnuinn.Simren
der iiztek. Sprache, 441, 185!) (revokes previous opinion uf its distinutuetis and
refers it to Pawnee family).
>Witchita8, Uuschmann, ibid., (same as his Washita).
Derivation: From tlio Caddo term ka'-edt^ signifying "chief"
(Gatscliet).
Tlio Pawnee and Caddo, now known to lie of the same linguistic
family, wore supposed by Gallatin and by many later writers to
be distinct, jind aeconlin^ly botli names appear in the Archieolo^ia
Americana as family designations. Botli names iire unobjection-
able, but as the term Caddo has priority by a few pages preference
is given to it.
Gallatin states "that the Caddoes formerly lived ;?0() miles up Red
River but have now moved to a brunch of Red River." He refers
to the Nandakoes. the Inies or Tachies, and tlie Nabedaches as sjjeak-
ing dialects of the Caddo language.
Under Pawnee two tribes were included by Gallatin: The Paw-
nees ))ropei' and the Ricaras. Tlie Pawnee tribes occu])ie(l the
country on the Platte River adjoining the Lou j) Fork. The Rieara
towns were on the upper Missouri in latitude W •'!(•'.
!M'
i
60
INDIAN MNOnsTIO KAMH.IRa
The boumliiritiH of tho Caddoan fiiinily, oh at prnHont uiirlorRtood,
can host he »<ivun luulor tlirini primary groiipH, Nortlmni, Mitldlu,
and Houthern.
Northtrn tjroup. — This comprisPH tlio Arikara or Roe, now confined
to a snuvU villaK« (on Fort Bert hold Reservation, North Dakota,)
which they share witli tlio Man(hin and Hidatsa tribes of the Sionan
family. The Arikara are the remains of ton different tribes of " Pa-
neas," who had been driven from their country lower down the Mis-
souri River (near tho Ponka habitat in tiorthern Nebraska) by tho
Dakota. In 1804 they were in throe villageH, nearer their present
location. '
AccordiuK to Omaha tradition, the Arikara were their allies when
those two tribes and several others were east of the Mississippi River.'
Fort Borthold Reservation, their present abode, is in the northwtwt
corner of North Dakota.
Middle (/roup. — This includes the four tribes or villaj?es of Paw-
nee, the Grand, Republican, Tapage, and Skidi. Dunbar says:
"Theoriginal hunting ground of the Pawnee extended from tho Nio-
brara," in Nebrjiska, " south to tho Arkansas, but no definite bcjun-
daries can be fixe<l." In modern times their villages have been on
the Platte River west of Columbus, Nebraska. The Omalia and
Oto were sometimes southeast of them near tlio mouth of the Platte,
and the Comanche were northwest of tliem on tho upper part of
one of the branches of the Loup Fork.' The Pawnee were removed
to Indian Territory in 1876. The Grand Pawnee and Tapage
did not wander far from their habitat on tho Platte. The Republi-
can Pawnee separated from tlie Grand about the year 1700, and
made a village on a " large northwardly brancli of the Kansas
River, to which they have giver, their name; afterwards they sub-
divided, and livu.'. in different parts of the country on the waters
of Kansas River. In 1805 they rejoined the Grand Pawnee." The
Skidi (Panimaha, or Pawnee Loup), according to tJmaha tradition,'
formerly dwelt east of the Mississippi River, where they were the
allies of the Arikara, Omalia, Ponka, etc. After their passage of
the Missouri they were con(iuered by the Grand Pawnee, Tapage,
and Republican tribes, witii wliom they have remained to this day.
Do L'Isle* gives twelve Panimalia villages on the Missouri Ri .r
north of the Pani villages on the Kansas River.
Southern (jroup. — This inclr.des tho Caddo, Wichita, Kichai, and
other tribes or villages whicli were formerly in Texas, Louisiana,
Arkansas, and Indian Territory.
' Lewis, Travels of Lewis and Clarke, 15, 1809.
'Doraey in Am. NaturaliHt, March, 1H86, p. 215.
' Dorsey, Omaha map of Nebraska.
*Dor«eT in Am. Nat., March, 1H86, p. 215.
' Carte de la Louisiane, 17 18.
POWRI.!.]
tJADDOAN FAMILY.
01
Tlio Caildo and Ki(;tiiu hiivn umloiihtodly hdon romovod from their
priHcaii liabitatH, hut th<t WifOiitii, judKiiiK f njiii tho Hiirvival of local
namos (WaHhita Rivor, Indian Territory, Wichita Falls, TttxaH) and
tho Htatomont of La Harpo,' are now in or near on« of thoir oarly
ahodcH. Dr. Sihley' locatoa the Caddo habitat 35 niihw wost of tho
main branch of Rod Rivor, being 120 miloH by land from Natchi-
tochoH, and thoy formerly lived 375 miles higher up. Cornell's Atlas
(1870) jilacos Caddo Lake in the northwest corner of Louisiana, in
Caddo County. It also gives both Washita and Witchita as the name
of a tributary of Red River of Louisiana. This duplication of names
seems to sliow that the Wichita migrated from northwestern Louis-
iana and southwestern Arkansas to the Indian Territory. After
comparing tho statements of Dr. Sibley (as above) resfiecting tlio
habitats of tho Anadarko, loni, Naba<lache, and Eyish with those of
Schormerhorn respecti'ig the Kildo hadatco,' of Le Page Du Pratz
(1768) concerning the Natchitoches, of Tonti* and La Harpe' about
the Ytttasi, of La Harpe (as above) about the Wichita, and of Sib-
ley concerning tho Kichai, we are led to fix upon the following as
tlio approximate boundaries of tho habitat of tho southern group
of tho Caddoan family: Beginning f)n the northwest with that part
of Indian Territory now occupied by the Wichita, Chickasaw, and
Kiowa and Comanche Reservations, and running along tho south-
ern ))order of tho Choctaw Re.sorvation to tlio Arkansas line; thonco
due east to tho lioad waters of Wasliita or Witchita River, Polk County,
Arkansas; thence through Arkansas and Louisianaalong thewostern
bank of that river to its mouth; thence southwest tlirough Lf)ui8i-
ana striking the Sabine River near Salom and Belgrade; thence south-
west through Texas to Tawakonay Creek, and along that stream to
the Brazos River; thence following that stream to Palo Pinto, Texas;
tlience northwest to the mouth of tlio North Furk of Red River;
and thence to tlie beginning.
A.
PRINCIPAL, TRIBES.
Pawnee.
Grand PawiKte.
B.
Tappas.
Republican Pawnee.
Skidi.
Arikara.
C.
Wichita.
(Ki-(fi'-tcac, Omaha pronunciation of the name of a Paw-
nee tribe, Ki-dhi'-chash or Ki-ri'-chash).
' In \T\9,flde Margry, vi, 289, " the Ousita village is on the southwest branch of
the Arkansas River.
« 18()5, in Lewis and Clarke, Discov., 1806, p. 66,
'Second Mass. Hist. Coll., vol. 3, 1814, p. 23.
• 161)0, in French, Hist. Coll. La., vol. 1, p. 72.
» 1719, in Margry, vol. 6, p. 264,
til
I' d^l
'i
69
IMMAN lilNUUIs'iiO KAMII.IKH.
1). Kicliiii.
E. (Jiidiii) (Kii'-<1«.).
I'(il>nliiti<i)i. — 'rii(i|ir()S(Mitiiuinbnr()f thoCiKMoiiii stcxik is "J.'-J.Vi, of
wlium U7 iiro oti tlui Ft»rt Bcrtliold Uosorvatioii, Ninth ])i'.k(»tii, and
tim rest in tlio Iiidiiiii Tctrritory, soiiid on tlm Poiicii, Piiwnoo, iind
()f,o»t llosnrviition. i\w otlutrH on tlic Kiowa, Coniaii(du», and Widiita
R^l^^((^vatioIl. Hclow is jjivon tlui ()oimlation of tlu^ trilx-s olli(!ially
rocoKiiizi'd, c"onii)ii(!d chioHy from the Indian Rt-port for IH8!):
Arikarii 448
I'llWIKM' 8!i4
Wichita 176
Towakarchu 143
Wuco 04
iWr.
Kirhai (l;t
Cttdilo :m
Totivi a, a5«
CHIMAKLTAN KAMILY.
=(?hiiiiakiiiii, (>il)hH in l'a<-. U. li. Rt']).. I, 4:lt, IH'tri (ftiiiiily ilmilttfiil).
=Ch('iiiakuiii, VavWn in Am, Aiiti(|iiariiin,52, Oct., 1880 (conMidcrH laiiKiiaK*' (lilTcrt'iit
from any of itH iieinlihorH).
<;E*UKt't Hound Group, Koune, App. .Stanford's Conip. (Cent. and 'io. Am,), 474, 1878
((!liiimkiini included in this p;roup).
<^N<K)tka, Bancroft, Native Races, ni, 504, 1883 (co'ituins Chinia [um).
Derivation uiiknow.'i.
Concerning this language Gibl)s, as above cited, .states as foHows;
The language of the Chimakuni " differs materially from either
that of th(! Clallam.s or the Nisqually, and is not undei'stood by any
of their neighbors. In fact, they seem to hav(i maintained it a State
secret. To what family it will ultimately be referred, (^anuot now
be decided."
Eells also asserts the distinctness of tliis language from any of its
naighbors. Neither of the above authors assignt^d the language fam-
ily rank, and accordingly Mr. Gatschet, who has made a (compari-
son of vocabularies au<l finds the language to be ijuite distinct from
any other, gives it the above name,
TheChimakum are said to have been fornxerly oneof the largest
and most powerful tribes of PugetSound. Their warlike habits early
teuded to diminish their numbers, and when visited by Gibbs in 1H.")4
they counted (jnly about seventy individuals. This small remnant
occupied .some fifteen small lodges on Port Town.send Bay. Accord-
ing to Gibbs "their territory seems to have em])raced the shore from
Port TowiKsend to Port Ludlow." ' In 1H84 there were, according to
'Dr. Boas was informed in 1889, by a survivinj? Chimakiim woman and several
Clallam, that the trilte was confined to the peninsula between Hood's Canal and
Port Townsend.
'!■!■
niWKi.i.. I
CIIIMAKIKAN— ClinniKSYAN I AMiMKS.
es
Mr. Myrim KcIIh. alioiit twenty iiKlivuliiiils Id't, iiiust, of wlioiii uro
living? imar I'ort TuwiisimuI, VVuHliiiij.fl(>ii. Tht'iM or f'luir livi; tipon
tlii^ Sk(>kuiiii.sli Ili'Sfrviitioii iii tin- suiitlicrii t«nil of Hood's (!iiniil.
'riin(^iiil(Mit(s of whom ill IHHli tliiiri! werc! ^iri'^ liviiifjoii llir I'ucilic
soiifli of (Jiipe Kliitttiry. lioloiiK to tlid fiiinily. Tlui IIoli, a siil)-lril)o
of the lutti'i', iiiiinlMir 71 iiinl ai'<< iimlrr tlio Ptiyallu|i AgiMicy.
l-KINOIHAL TI(IUK8.
Thu followiii^ triliUH tiro rtjcogiti/iiMl:
Cliiiiiakuin. l^iiiU<-ute. *
rillMAKIKAN KAMII.Y.
=t;iiiiii-iiri-ki>, Powell in (!<)nt. N. A. Ktli.. Ml. 474, IS77. (liitscliut in Miik- Am.
HiHt., 2r,r,, Apr.l, IHsa (HtiU.Ml to W u tliHtinct fiiniily).
At'oordiiiff to Powers, tliJH family wa,s rrprt'sciitod, so far as known,
by two trilios in (!alifornia, one the C.lii-niiil-a-kwe, livinjf on New
River, a braruili of tlie Trinity, tiie other the ("hiinariko, residinj^
ni)on the Trinity itself from Hnrnt Rancli np to tiie moutii of North
Fork, Ciilifornia, The two trihes are said to have been us mimer-
ous formerly as tiie Hupa, liy whom tliey wore overcome an<l nearly
((xterminated. Upon thoarrival of the Americans only twenty-five of
the Cliimalukwe were left. In 187^) Powers collected a (Miimariko
vocabulary of about two liundrtMl words from a wcjman, supposed to
1)0 one of tlio last three women of that tribe. In 1HK9 Mr. Curtin,
while in Hoopa Valhty, found a Cliimariko man seventy or more
years old, who is believed to be one of tint two living? survivors of the
tril)o. Mr, Curtin obtained a good vocabulary and mucli valuable
information relative to the former habitat and history of the tribe.
Although a study of these vocabularies reveals a number of words
having correspondences with the Kulanapan (Pomo) ('(piivalents,
yet the greater number show no aflinities with the diah^cts of the
latter family, or indooa with any other. Tho family is theroforo
classed as distinct.
riUNCIPAL TKIBF.S.
Cliimariko.
Chimal.ikwo.
CHIMMKSVAN FAMILY.
=CliimniPsyiin, Ijjithani in Jimu-. Ktli. Soc. I/imd., i, 154, 1S4H (iK-twoon 5!} 30' .ind
'm :tO k. I,.). Latham. Opusi-iilii. liM). isdo.
UluMaiuiwyan, Ltitliarn, Nat. Hist. JIan.JlOO, IS.IO (inclmlcs Nauftkok, Clii'niniosyan,
Kitshatlah. Kcthuniisli). Latham in Trans. Philoloj;. Soc. I/jnil.. 7a, laid.
Ijitham. Oimscnla, HHI), IHIiO. Liitham. ElomcntH C'om|). I'hil., 401, 1863.
=('hynis('yaiis, Kane. WanderinKS of an Artist, app., IH.IO (a census of tribes of
N. W. coa.st classilied hy lansnages).
=C'hinisyans, Sclioolcraft, hid. Tribes, v, tS7. 1S5,") (t;ives Kane's list but with many
ortho|i;rnphical changes). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 209, 1860 (published in 1870),
P
64
INDIAN MNCII'IHTIC KAMII.IKN.
Dull In font. N. A. Ktli., i, :i«, ;m, 40, 1H77 (prDUilily dlHtlnct from riihketi).
Huncroft, Nativf ItiiccH, in. ftiM, «(>7, \HH'i.
TNliiniHiun, Toiiiiix itiitl DawMin, Coinp. V<k'iiIm,, U-'jn, IHS|.
.::^THinipHl-nn , Dull In TrtM'. Am. Ahm., !I70, IHH.'i (mcrt' nu'ntion of fiiniily).
xNortlutrn. Ht'cmler in Jour. Kny. U(h)K. Hoc. I.,ond., XI, liiJO, 1841 (IncludcH Chltn*
nuwyunH).
XHikiduii. Ht'oulcr in Jour. Roy. Oeog. Hoc. Lonil., XI, 'i'H), 1841 (muiuc iU4 IiIh North-
ern fiimily).
<NnHH, Oallntin in TriuiH. Am. Ktli. Hoc., ii, pt. 1, c, 1848(im'lu(linK CliinimcHyan),
I4erKliauM(tH.'il), I'liyHik. AtliiH. map 17. IM'i.
<NiutHH. Oallntin in TnuiH. Am. tCtli.HiK., ii.pt. 1.77, 1848. Oallatin in Hchm>lcraft,
Ind. TrilH-H. ill, 4oa, IHrtll.
=NaHw. Uall in Cont. N. A. Ktli., I, !W, 40, 1877 (or I'himHvan).
<NaHH, Hamrort. Nat. Rtu cm, ill, im, 606, 1883 (iiicluiltu* Nam and HcIwimma Indiano
of tliiH family, alxo Maillza).
=HydahH. Kcano. App. to Hfnnford'H (''imp. (Cent, and Ho. Am.), 47!), 1878 (includcM
TMiniHliccaiiH, Niuw, HkccnnH, Htibaiwi'H of prcm-tit fiiiMJIy).
Dorivatidu: B'rom tho Chini.sian tH'om, •'on kciaii, " nuiin river:"
"On tli»i main (Skfcniv) iivt>r."
This imnu' appi-ars in a i)aper of Latham's puhli8litMl in IH-tH. To
it is referrod a vocabuhiry of Tolmio's. The arua whnw it is spdkon
iH said by Latham to bo 50' :t()' and 56" .Jd'. Tho namo lias boi-dino
eHtablish('<l by hmg usage, and it is cliiofly on this at'count that it
has boon k>voii preforonco over tho Naas of (jaihitin of tho saiiio
year. Tho hittor namo was givon by Oalhitin to a group of iau-
guagos now known to be not rohvtod, viz, Haiistla, Hacoltzuk
Billechohi. and Chimoy.san. Billechola belongs undor Salishan, a
family namo of Gallatin's of IHUd.
Were it necessary to take Naas as a family name it would best
apply to ChiiMsian, it being tho namo of a dialect and village (if
Chimsian Imlians, whih) it lias no jxu-tinency whatever to Haiistla
and Hacoltzuk, wiiicli are do.sely related and belong to a family
quite distin(!t from tlie Chiinmesyan. As stated uliove, Iniwtiver,
the term Naas is rejected in favcjr of Chimmesyaii of the same date.
For the boundaries of this family the linguistic map published
by Tolmie and Dawson, in 18H4, in followed.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Following is a list of the Cliinimesyan tribes, according to Boas:'
A. Nasqa': Gyits'uinrii'lon.
Na.sqa'. Oyits'ala'ser.
Gyitksa'n. Gyitcp'i'tla.
B. Tsirashian proper: Gyitg'fi'ata.
Ts'emsia'n. Gyidesdzo'.
Population. — The Canadian Indian Report for 1H88 records a total
for all the tribes of this family of 5,000, In the fall of 1887 about
1,000 of these Indians, in charge of Mr. William Duncan, removed
'B. A. A. H. Fifth Rep. of Committee on NW. TrilieH of Canada.
upon-Tyne meeting, 1889, pp. 8-9.
Newcastle-
PiiWKLL.)
I'HINOOKAN KAMILY.
65
to Annotti) ImIuuiI, tthoiit til) tnili'H north of tlic Houthorri lioumliiry
of AluHka. iifiir I'ui'l Clicstcr, wlicrc they liuvc fniiinli'd it iii-w nut-
tlunit'iit ciiIIimI Now Motliikiilitlu. Ki-I'k Iiouhch Inis'o lii>(>ii i>i't'cti>il,
<liiy ami indiislrial hcIiohIn cHtHMisln'il, uml tlic Imliaim ui'o umlt'i'-
Htuoil to bu making riiiaai'kal)lu proxn-HH in civili/ution.
CHINOOKAN KAMII.Y.
>(?hiri<H>kH,(iikllittin in TranH.iuiiU'oll. Am. AmiIij. Sim., ii. |:||. !lu<l, {nmia nIiikIh
triU' itt iiiiiutli of ('iiliiiiiliiii).
--.('l.iiKMikH. Hull- ill r.H. Kx|<l. KximI., VI, lim.lNlir. (lulintin, after IIul<', in Tmim.
Aim. Kth. Hm.,ll,i)t. 1. 1.">. |M|s ,„r THiiniki.
=THliiiiiik.Hiilc in t'.S. Kxpl. Kxpcl., vi. Wi. VHt. IHKl (contniMK WatliilHor Up|ier
Cliinciok. inrliKliiiK Wntlitlii. Niliiilciitih. or Kclii-lootH: and THliiiiuk, infludiiiK
'rHliinuk.Tliitn;i|>. Wi'kiiikiiin).
^TMiiiiik.Oitllulin. aftiT llalr. in Train. Am. KiIi.Hih.. ii.pt. I. t.'i. IH.|M. lierKliailH
(1H.")I), I'liyMik. Allan, map 17, l«.'r.'.
>('liH<>niiok, Uttliain in .lour. Ktli.S<K'. Ixaiil., I, '.'IHI, IK|H. Liitlmni, 0|hucuIu, li.lil,
IMIK).
>('luimk, Uithain, Nat. lliHt. Man. ^117, IH.VI (Haiiic as Tsliim'ik: ini'liuli'H CliiniikH
proiNT, KliitHopK. Katlilamiit. Wakaikam, Watlala, Nihiiloitili). Uilliani in
TranH. Pliiliil(iK.H<><'. l<<>ii(l..7:l. IH.VI iinrrc iiii'iitiiiiict' t'ainilv name). Ijttliain,
UpiiMMila. :M(I, m\i\. HuKi'limann. Spiiri'ii iliT axli'k. Hprai'lir. (Illl-llll). |M.-|U.
=T(«;himik.HcrKliaiiK(|M.->l), I'liVMik. .Vtlan.map IT, IH,"),'. Uttliam in Trans. I'liiloliiK.
HiH-. IaiiiiI.. 7:t, IH.'il) (ini'rc nii'iitiDM <>l' famllv nann'i. Ijitliain, Opiisciila.IMO,
IHIKl. Uilluiiri, Kl. ('((iiip. riiil.. Id'.'. IHt;',> (cites a sliort voealmlary of Watlala).
=Tsliin(X)k,(tallatiniM,Si'li(M)lcraft, Itiil. Trill's, in. 40'.', |s,"(:!(( 'hiii(«iks,( 'latsiips.and
Watlala). Tolmie anil Kawson, Comp. VihiiIis. Ilril.('<il.,.'il.lll, |hm|.
>Tsliinuk, Bnselsmanii, Mpiiieii ilcr aztek.Spraelu', (IH(, IK'd) (same as liis Cliiniik).
—T'sini'ik.Dall.after (lihlis, ill Ciait.N..\. Ktli.. 1,^41. 1M7T (mere mi'iition of family).
=ChinrMik.(}atseliet in .MaK- -Vm. Hist., KI7, IH77 (nuniesandKivKHlii^bitatH of trilM>s),
(Jatscliet in Beaeli, In.l. .Mis... I f,'. 1^77.
<Chinix)ks, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. ((Vnt. and So. Am.), 474, 1H7H (ini'liuli'H
Skill<Kits, VVatlalas. l/>\ver Cliiiiooks, \Vakiakiiiiis,('at)ilainets, ('IatHo|>s, Calii-
]KH>yaii,ClaL'kaiiia.s, KillanuMiks, Vainkiilly,('liimiMik .lari^on: of these (,'ala|KK>-
yas and Yumkally are KalapiK)iaii. KillaniiMiks are Halislian).
>(;iiinook,Baneroft.Nat. Haees.lll,. ■)(!.">, (I'.'tl-tC.'H, 1HM,> (enumerates Chinook, Wakia-
kuin. ( 'atlilanu't, ( lalsop, Multiioniah, SkilliMit. Watlala).
XNootka-Columliiaii. Seouler in .lour. Koy.deoji. Sor. I^md.. .XI. '•"•'4, 1H41 (ineludiM
('heeniM)kH,aiid ( 'athlaseons of present family).
XSoutliern, Heouler, il)id..'J'J4 (same as his Nootka-Columhian family alK)ve).
Tlip voi-abulary of tli« ('liiiinnk trilie. upmi wliii'li tlio family
name was ha.scil. was dcri veil frum the moiitli of tlio Colmiiliia, As
now luidcrstdoil the family cmlirac'cs a iiiimbci' of tfilics. speaking
alliud lanj^tia^ffs, whoso foi'iiuT homos oxtoiidod from tlio mouth of
tho river foi' some tiOO miles, oi' to The Dalles. Acconliii^f to Lewis
mid Clarke, our best authorities on the [iristine home of this fiimily.
most of their villages were on the banks of tho river, chiotly ui)on
the iiorthorii bunk, thotinh they probably claimed tlm land upon
either bank for several miles back.
7 ETH 5
!i
1 i
' i
I I
66
INDIAN MNOUISTIO KAMIMKS.
Their villages also extended on tlio Pacific coast north nearly to the
nortii»:rn extreme of Shoalwater Bay, and to the south to about Tilla-
mook Head, some 20 miles from the mouth of the Columbia.
I'RINcn-AI, TRIBES.
Lower Chinook:
Chinook.
Clatsop.
Upper Ciiinook:
Cathlamet.
Cathlapotle.
Chilluck(iuitte(iuaw.
Clackama. •
Cooniac.
Echcloot.
Multi, ' >!a.
Wahkiaciim.
Wasco.
Poimhifioii. — Ti.ore are two hundred and eighty-eight Wasco on
the Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon, and one hundred and fifty
on the Yakamn, Kcservation, Washington. On the Grande Ronde
Reservation, ( )rogon, there are fifty-nine Clackama. t'rom informa-
tion derived from Indians by Mr. Thonuis Priestly, United States
Indian Agent at Yakama. it is learned tiiat thei'f* still i-eniain three or
four families of '• regular Chinook Indians," probably belonging to
one of the down-river tribes, about (J miles above the mouth of the
Columbia. Two of these speak the Chinook proper, an<l three have
an imperfect command (jf Clatsop. There are eight or ten families,
probably also of one of the lower river tribes, living near Freeport,
AVashington.
Some of the Watlala, (jr Ui)per Chinook, live near the Cascades,
about 55 miles below Tlie Dalles. There thus renniin i)roi)al)ly be-
tween hvo and six hundred of the Indians of this family.
C'HITLMACHAN FAMILY.
= ChitiinacliaH. (rallatiii in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiii. Soc. , n, 1 14, 1 IT, 183«. Prich-
artl, I'li.vs. Hist. Mankiml, v. 407, 1847.
= Clii-tiinacliaK.(iallatin in Trans, and I'oll. Am. Antiq.Soi-.,n,;iOO, 1880. Gallatin
in Trans. Am. Kth.Soc.. n.pt. 1, xcix, 1848. I^tham, Nat. Hist. Man, ;i41, lH,-)0.
(iallatiii in S(li(M)UTttft,Ind.TrilK-s.ni.4(t>, IS.!;),
= Clu-tiniaclia, Uitham in Phk;. I'hiiolog. Sw. Lond,. n, Dl-.IO, 1840, I.athiiin,
Oi)iisculi>,29:t, IHOO.
= ('li('tf madias, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ktli. Sim'., n.pt. 1,77. 1848 (same as C'liiti.
inaclias).
= Sliutimaslia, (Jats<'lu'l. Creek Mig. l.<'Kenil. l, 44, 1884. Gatschet in Sc'ienee. 414,
April •,>!!, 1887.
Derivati<in; From Choctaw words tchnti. "cooking vessels,"
masha, "they possess." (fJatscliet).
This family wfis based upon the language of the tribe of the same
name, " formerly living in the vicinity of Lake Barataria. and still
existing (I8;j<i) in lower Louisiana."
Du Pratz asserted that tlu^ Taensa and Cliitimacha were kindred
tribes of the Na'htchi. A vocabulary of tlip Shetimasha. however,
revealed to Cialiatin no traces of such adinity. He considered both
l'tlWEI.L.|
CHUMASIIAN FAMILY.
67
to represent distinct families, a conclusion subsequent investigations
have sustained.
In IfSSl Mr. (iatscliot visited the remnants of tliis tribe in Louis-
iana. He found about fifty individuals, a portion (jf whom lived
on Grand River, but the larfi;er part inCiuironton, St. Mary's Parish.
Tile tribal organization was abandoned in 187!) on the death of their
chief.
CHUMASHAN FAMILY.
> Santa Barbara, Latham in TraiiH. VhiloloK. W"''-. Ij<in(l.,8."). isrifl (inoludi's Santa
RiU'hara. .Santa Inez, San Luis Obisix) lanj^uaRes). BuHchniann. Spurcn dcr
aztfk. Spraclu', ."):(!,. IM. 5ii8, OOa, law. Latham, Opuscula, ItTil, IHIiO. Powell
in Cont. N. A. Eth., in, .WO, 587, 18*7 (Kawua, Santii Inez, Id. of .Santa I'niz,
Santa Barl)ara), fJatschet in U. S.v'eiig. Surr. W. lOOth M.. vn.41!». 1879 (cites
La Piirisima.San^.t Inez, Santa Barbara. K'-..iua, Muf;ii. Santa ("ruz Id.).
X Santa Barbara, (^atschet in Mag. Am. Hist.. 1.16, 1877 (Santa Inez,.Sant« Barbara,
Santa ('ruz Id., San Luis Obisjw.San Antonio).
Derivation: From Chumasli, the name of the Santa Rosa Islanders,
The several dialects of this family have long been known under
the group or family name. "'Santa Barbara," which seems first to
have b(*en used in a (iomprehensive sense by Latham in 185(t. who
included under it tlireo languages, viz: Santa Barl)ara, Santa Inez,
and San Luis Obispo. The term has no special pertinence as a
family designation, except from the fact that the Santa Barbara
Mission, around which one of the dialects of the family was spoken,
is perhaps more widely known than any of the others. Neverthe-
less, as it is tiie family name first applied to tlie group and has, mcn-e-
ovor. passed into current use its claim to recognition woidd not be
questioned were it not a ccnnpound name. Under the rtile adopted
the latter fact iieces.sitates its rejection. As a suitable substitutij
the term Chumashan is here adopted. Clmmash is the name of
the Santa Ros.'i Islanders, who spoke a dialect of this stock, and is a
term widcdy known among the Indians of this family.
The Indians of this family lived in villages, the villages as a
whole apparently having no political connection, and hence there
appears to have been no a])pollation in use among them to designate
themselves as a whole ])eople.
Dialects of this language were spoken at the Mi.ssions of San
Buenaventura, Santa Barbara. Santa Ifiez, Purisima. and San Luis
Obispo. Kindred dialects were sjjoken also upon the Islands of
Santa Rosa and Santa Cruz, and also, probably, upon such other of
the Santa Barbara Islands as formei'ly were permanently inhabited.
These dialects collectively form a remarkably homogenetms family,
all of them, with the exception of the San Luis Obisjio, being
(dosely related and containing very many words in common. Vo-
cabularies representing six dialects of the language iiro iniiossession
of the Biireau of Ethnology.
' -11
6S
INDIAN LINGUISTIC KAMIIJKS.
The inland limits of this faniilj' can not 1)0 exactly defineil,
although a list of more than one lunKlrcd villages with thoir sites,
obtained l>y Mr. Henshaw in 1884, siiows that the tribes were essen-
tially maritime and were closely confined to the coast.
Poi)uhili(>n. — In 1S,S4 Mr. Henshaw visited the several counties
formerly inhabited l»y the populous tribes of this family and dis-
covered that about forty nu'u, women, and childn>n survived. The
adults still speak their old langu'ige when conversing with each
other, though on other occasions they use Spanish. The largest
settlement is at San Buenaventura, where perhaps 'iU individuals
live near the outskirts of the town.
I
COAHUILTECAN FAMILY.
= Coaliuilteco, Orozco y Berra, Oeografia ile las Lenguas do Mexico, map, 1804.
= Tejano 6 Coaliuilteco, Pimentel, C'uadro Descriptivo y Coiiipariiti vo de las LeiiKuaa
Indigenas de Me.xii-o, n, 409, 186r>. (A preliminary notice with example from
the language derived from Oarcia's Manual, 1760.)
Derivation: From the name of the Mexican State Coahuila.
This family appears to have included numerous tribes in* south-
western Texas and in Mexico. They are chiefly known tlirougli the
record of the Rev. Father Bartolome Garcia (Manual jiara adminis-
trar. etc.). published in 17(i(i. In the preface to the "Manual" he
enumerates the tribes and sots forth some phonetic and grauimatic
differences between the dialects.
On page (i;{ of hisGeografia de las Lenguas de Mt^xico, 18G4, Orozco
y Berra gives a list of the languages of Mexico and inchuh's
Coaliuilteco, indicating it as the language of Coahuila, Nuevo Leon,
and Tamaulipas. Ho does not, however, indicate its extensicju into
Texas. It would thus seem that he intended the name as a general
designation for the language of all the cognate tribes.
Upon his colored ethnographic map, also, Orozco y Berra desig-
nates tiie Mexican portion of tlie area formerly occujiied by the
tribes of this family Coahniltec(3.' In his statement that the lan-
guage and tribes are extinct this author was mistaken, as a few
Indians still survive who speak one of the dialects of this family,
and in 18S(i Mr. (Jatscliet collected vocabularies of twi, iribes, the
Comecrudo and Cotoname, who live on the Rio Orande. at Las
Prietas. State of Tamaulipas. Of the Comecnulo some twenty-five
still renuiin, of whoni seven speak the language.
The Cotoname are [jractically extinct, although Mr. (fatschet
obtained one hundred and twenty-five words from a man said to b(^
of this bloud. Besides the above. Mr. Gatschet obtained information
of the existence of two women of the Pinto or Pakawa ti-ibe who
live at La Volsa, near Reyno.si, Tamaulipas, on the Rio Grande, and
who are said to speak their own language.
' Ueografla dc las Lenguas de Mexico, map, 1864.
POWILL.J
Alasapa.
Cachopostato.
Casa chiquita.
Cliayopine.
Comecrudo.
Cotouame.
Mano tie perro.
Mescal.
COPEIIAN FAMILY.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Miakau.
Orejoiie,
Pacuilche.
Pajalate.
Pakawil.
Pamuque.
Pampopa.
COPEHAN FAMILY.
69
Pastancoya,
Patacalc.
Paiisane.
Payseya.
Sauipao.
Tdi-aine.
Veiiado.
> C<>i>-eh, Oibbs in Schoolcraft. Iiiil. Triix-s, ill, 431 , IMS (mentioned as a dialect).
= C(>pel), Liithain in Trans. Philolog Soc., Lond.,T9, 1858 (of UpjH'r Sacramento;
oitt'8 vocabs. from Gallatin and Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 341, 1800.
Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 412. 1862.
=:\Vintoons, Powers in Overland Monthly, 530, June, 1874 (Upiier Sai'ramento and
Upper Trinity). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 100, 1877 (defines habitat and
names tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 434, 1877.
= Win-tun, Powell in Cbnt. N. A. Eth.,lll, 518-534, 1877 (vocabularies of Wintun,
Sacramento Kiver, Trinity Indians). Gatschet in U. S. Qeog. Surv. W. UKlth
M. , VII, 418, 1879 (defines area tK'cupie<l by family).
X Klamath, Kenne, App. to Stanford's (Aimp. (Cent, and So. Am.). 475, 1878 (cited
as including CoiKihs, Patawats, Wintoons). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, .565,1882
(contains C'opah).
> Napa, Kcane, ibid., 476, 524, 1878 (includes Myacoraas.Calayomanes. Caymus, Ulu-
cas. Suscols). Bancroft, Nat. Itaces, in, 567, 1882 (includes NajM, Myacoma, Calay-
omane, Caymus, Uluca, Suscol).
This name was jiroposed by Latliani with evident hesitation. He
says of it: '■' How far this will eventually turn out to he a conven-
ient name for tlie group (or how far the group itself will be real),
is uncertain." Under it he places two vocabularies, one from the
Upper Sacramento and the otlier from Mag Redings in Shasta
County. The head of Putos Creek is given as headquarters for the
language. Recent investigations havo served to fully confirm the
validity of the family.
OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The territory of the Copehan family is bounded on the north by
Mount Shasta and the territory of the Sastean and Lutuamian
families, on the oast by the territory of the Piilaihnihan, Yanan, and
Pujunan families, and on tlie .south by the bays of San Pablo and
Suisun an<l the lower waters of the Sacramento.
The eastern boundary of tlie territory begins about 5 miles east
of Mount Siiasta, crosses Pit River a little east of Squaw Creek, and
reaches to within 10 miles of the eastern bank of the Sacramento at
Redding. From Redding to Ciiii'o Creek the boundary is about 10
miles east of tlie Sacramento. From Chico dowuwai'd thi; Puju-
nan family encroaches till at the mouth of Feather River it occupies
Ml
70
INDIAN LINdl'ISTir FAMILIES.
the eastern bank of tlie Sacramento. The western boundary of the
Copohau family l)egins at the northernmost point of San Pablo Bay,
trends to tiio northwest in a somewiiat irregular line till it reaches
John's Peak, from which point it follows the Coast Range to the
upper waters of Cottonwood Creek, wlience it deflects to the west,
crossing the headwaters of the Trinity and ending at the southern
boundary of the Sastean family.
Patwiii
Chenpi.sel.
Guilitu.
Korusi.
Liwaito.
Lolsel.
Makhelehel.
Malaka.
rSINflPAL TRIBES.
Napa.
Olelato.
01 pose 1.
Suisun.
Todetabi.
Topaidisel.
Waikosel.
Wailaksel.
OOSTANOAN FAMILY.
B. Wintu:
Daupom.
Nondaki.
Nommuk.
Norelmuk.
Norniuk.
Waikeiunuk.
Wailaki.
= rostaii<). liatluiin in Trans. Philolon. S<x;. Lond.. 83,18.')« (includes the Ahwastes,
Ollioiies or C!oNtiino8, Roiuonans.TuloinoM, Altatiuos). Latliani, Opuscula, 348,
IStiO.
<Mutsi!. .Gatst'het in Ma^. Am. Hist., LIT, 1877 (includes Ahwastes. Olliones.Al-
tahnios. Romonans.Tulunios). Powell in C'ont. N. A. Etii.. ni.T)!!.'), 1877 (includes
underthisfamily vocalw. of Costuno, Mutsun. Santa Clara. .Santa Cruz).
Derivation: From the Spanish costano. "coast-men."
Under this grouj) name Latham included five tribes, .given above,
which were uniler the supei'vision of the Mission Dolores. He
gives a few words of tlie Honionan language, comparing it with
Tshokoyem which he linds to differ markedly. He finally expresses
the opinion that, notwithstanding the resemblance of a few words,
n )tal)ly personal pronouns, to Tshokoyem of the Mo(|uelumnan
group, the atlinities of the dialects of the Costano are with the
Salinas group, "ith which, however, he does not unite it but pre-
fers to keep it by itself. Later, in 1877, Mr. Gatschet,' under the
family name Mutsun, united the Costano dialects with the ones
cla.ssified by Latham under Mo(|uelumnan. This arrangement was
followeil by Powell in his classification of vocabularies." More
recent comparison of all the jjublished material by Mr. Curtin. of
till' Bureau, revealed very decided and apparently radical differ-
ences between the two groups of dialects. In LSSS Mr. H. W.
Henshaw visited the coast to the nortii and south of San Fi'ancisco,
and obtained a consi<lcrablv body of linguistic nuiterial for further
comparison. The result .seems fully to justify the .separation of the
two groups as distinct families.
' Mag. Am. Hist., lS77,i). ir)7.
' Cont. N. A. Eth. 1877, vol. fi. p. ridTi.
POWELL.]
ESKIMAUAN FAMILY.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
71
Tlie territory of tlie Costanoan family extends from the Golden
Gate to a point near the southern end of Monterey Bay. On the
south it is bounded from Monterey Bay to the mountains by the
Esselenian territory. On the east side of the mountains it extends
to the southern end of Salinas Valley. On the eabt it is bounded
by a somewhat irregular line running from the southern end of
Salinas Valley to Gilroy Hot Springs and the upper waters of Con-
estimba Creek, and northward from the latter points by the Sau
Joaquin River to its mouth. The northern boundary is formed by
Suisun Bay, Carquinez Straits, San Pablo and San Francisco Bays,
and the Golden Gate.
Population. — The surviving Indians of the once populous tribes
of this family are now scattered over several counties and i)robably
do not number, all told, over thirty individuals, as was ascertained by
Mr. Henshaw in 1888 Most of these are to be found near the towns
of Santa Cruz and Monterey. Only the older individuals speak the
language.
E8KIMAUAN FAMILY.
> Rakimaux, GallatininTrans.and Coll. Am. Autiq.Soc., II, 0,305, 1880. Oallatinin
Trana. Am. Eth. Soc., n, pt. 1 , xci.x, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Inil. Tribea.
Ill, 40' IS-^B.
= E8kiiuo, Bergliaus (184.')), Physik. Atlas, map IT, 1848. Ibid., 1853. Latliam, Nat.
Hiat. Man, 388, "^-lO (general remarks on origin and habitat). Buachmann.Spuren
der aztek. Sprav^'ne, 089, 18.59. L;itham, El. Comp. Phil., 385, 1863. Bancroft,
Nat. Kaces, in, .563, .574, 1883.
>Esquhuaux, Priihard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 367-371, 1847 (follows Gallatin).
Latliam in Jour. Eth.S<x;. Lond., I, 183-191, 1848. Latham, Opuscula. 360-374,
1860.
> Eskimo, Dall in Proc. Am. Asa., 366, 1869 (treats of Alaskan Eskimo andTuski
only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 73, 1887 (excludes the Aleutian).
> Eskimos, Keane,App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 1878 (excludes
Aleutian).
> Ounangan, Veniamlnoff, Zapiski ob ostrova;i; Unalashkinskago otdailo, ii, 1. 184(1
(Aleutians only).
>Uniigun, Dall in Cont. N. A. Etli., I, 33, 1877 (Aleuts a division of his Orarian
group).
> Unangan, Berghaus, Physik. Atl.ia, innp 73, 1887.
X Northern, Scouler In Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 318, 1841 (includes Uga-
lentzes of present family).
X Haidah, Scouler. ibid., 334, 1H4I (same as his Northern family).
> Ugaljaclimutzi.Cirallatin in Sch(M)lcraft, Ind.Trilx's, iii.403. 18." '- (lat. 60% between
Prince Williams Sound and Mount .St. Eliaa, jierhapa Athapa-scus).
Aleuten, Hohul)erg, Ethnog. Skizzen d. Viilker Rush. Am.. 1855.
> Aleutians. Dall iu Prix-. Am. .\^ss.. 306. 1H69. Dall. Alaska and Resources, 874,1870
(in both places a division of his Orarian family).
> Aleuts, Keane, App. Stanford's Conip. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 1878(conaiat of
Unalaskans of mainland and of Fox and Shumagin Ida., with Akkhaa of rest of
Aleutian Arch.).
> Aleut, Bancroft, Nat, Races, iii..56'\ 1883 (two dialects, Unalaska and Atkha).
II
li
72
INDIAN LINGITISTIC FAMII.IKS.
>KonjaKt'n, HolmlierK. Ktlinograph. Skizzoii Viilker Russ. Am., 1855 (Island of
Koniog or Kadiitk).
= Oiurians, DiUl in Proc. Am. Ash.. !.'tJ5. 18Ut) (group name; inclu^ea Innuit, Ak'U-
tianH, TuHki). Dall, Alaska and Resources, 87-4, 1870. Dall in Cent. N. A. Eth. ,
1,8,9.1877.
X Tinneh, Pall in Pnw. Am. Ass. ,369, 1869 (includes " Ugalense ").
>Inni"iit, Dall in I'ont. N. A. Eth.,I.l), 1877 (" Major group" of Orarians: treats of
Alaska Innuit only). Berghaits, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the Aleu-
tians).
Derivation: From an Algonkiii word eskimaiitik, "eaters of raw
flesli."
0EO<mAPHIC DI8TU1BUTI0N.
Tlie geographif boundaries of this family were set forth by Gal-
latin in 18JG with considerable precision, and require comparatively
little revision and correction.
In the linear extent of country occupied, the Eskimaiian is the most
remarkable of the North American linguistic families. It extends
coastwise from eastern Greenland to western Alaska and to the
extremity of the Aleutian Islands, a distance of considerably more
than 5,000 miles. The winter or permanent villages are usually sit-
uated on the coast and are frequently at considerable distances from
one another, the intervening areas being usually visited in summer
for hunting and fishing purposes. The interior is .also visited by the
Eskimo for the purpose of hunting reindeer and other animals,
though they rarely penetrate farther than 5(' miles. A narrow strip
along the coast, perhaps ;J0 miles wide, will probably, on the average,
represent Eskimo occupancy.
Except upon the Aleutian Islands, the dialects spoken over this
vast area are very similar, the unity of dialect thus observable being
in marked contrast to the tendency to change exhibited in other lin-
guistic families of North America.
How far north the east coast of Greenland is inhabited by Eskimo
is not at present known. In IS'i'-i Capt. Clavering met with two
families of Eskimo north of 74° 30'. Recent explorations (18&-l-'85)
by Capt. Holm, of the Danish Navy, along the southeast coast
reveal the presence of Eskimo between ti5" and 011° north latitude.
These Eskimo profess entire ignorance of any inhabitants north of
themselves, which may be taken as proof that if there are fiords
farther up the coast which are inhabited there h.as been no interconi-
municationin recent times at least between these tribes and those to
the .south. It seems probable that more or less isolated colonies of
Eskimo do actually exist along the east ccjast of Greenland far to
the north.
Along the west cotist of Greenlanl, Eskimo occupancy extends to
about 74°. This division is sejiarated by a considerable interval of
uninhabited coast from the Etali Eskimo who occupy the coast from
Smitk Sound to Cape York, their nKJst northerly village being in
POWELL.]
KSKIMAUAN FAMILY.
78
78" 18'. Fur our kuowhsilsjo of tho.sn interesting people we are
cliierty in(l(0)te(l to Ros.s ami Bossels.
In Grinnoll Land, Gen. Qreely found indications of permanent
Esitinio iiabitations near Fort Conger, lat. HI" 44 .
On tlie coast of Labrador tlie Eskimo reacli as far soutli as Ham-
ilton Inlet, about 50" 30'. Not long since they extended to the
Straits of Belle Isle, 50° :»()'.
On the east coast of Hudson Bay tiie Eskimo reach at present
nearly to James Bay. According to Dobbs' in 1744 they extended
as far south as east Maine Riv(*r, oi' about 52". The name Notaway
(Eskimo) River at the .soutliern end of the bay indicates a former
Eskimo extension to that i)oint.
A(;cording to Boas and Bessels the most northern Eskimo of the
middle group north of Hudson Bay reside on the .southern ex-
tremity of Ellesmere Land around Jones Sound. Evidences of
former occupation of Prince Patrick, Melville, and other of the
northern Arctic islands are not lacking, but for some unknown cause,
probably a failure of food supply, the Eskimo have migrated thence
and tiie islands are no longer inhabited. In the western part of tiie
central region the coast appears to be uninhabited fi'om tiie Copper-
mine River to Cape Bathurst. To the west of the Mackenzie, Her-
schel Island marks the limit of permanent occupancy by the Macken-
zie Eskimo, there being no permanent villages between that island
and the settlements at Point Barrow.
The intervening strip of coast is, however, undoubtedly hunted
over more or less in summer. The Point Bfirrow Eskimo do not
penetrate far into the interior, but farther to the south the Eskimo
reach to the headwaters of the Nunatog and Koyuk Rivers. Only
visituig the coast for trading purjwses, they occupy an anomalous
position among Eskimo.
Eskimo occupancy of the rest of the Alaska coast is practically
continuous throughout its whole extent as far to the .south and east
as the Atna or Copper River, where Ijegin the domains of the Kolu-
schan family. Only in two places do the Indians of the Athapascan
family intrude upon Eskimo territory, about Cook's Inlet, and at the
mouth of Copper Rivei'.
Owing to the labors of Dall, PetroflF, Nelson, Turuci, Murdoch,
ami others we are now pretty well informed as to the distribution of
the Eskimo in Ala.ska.
Nothing is said by Gallatin of the Aleutian Islanders and they
were probably not considered by him to be Eskimauan. They are
now known to belong to this family, tlumgh *^b • Aleutian dialects are
unintelligible to the Eskimo proper, 'fiieir u otrilmtiijn has been en-
tirely changed since the advent of the Russians and the introduction
' D()l)l)H (Arthur). An account of tlie Countries luljoiuing to Hudson's Bay. Lon-
don, r' ■
I II
I
fi
!::
II
T4
INDIAN MmUIsriC FAMILIKS.
f i
i *
of tlu' t'ur trado. and at preaont lliey occupy only a very small
portion of the iwlandb. Fonni'ily they worn much more nunicious
than at pri'scnt and cxtunded througliout the chain.
The Eskiinauan family is represented in nortiieast Asia by the
Vnit of the Chukchi peninsula, who are to lie distiiif^nished from
the sedentary Chukchi or the Tuski of authors, the latter heinj,^ of
Asiatic orij^in. According to Dall the fornu'r are comparatively
recent arrivals from the American continent, and, like their brethren
of America, are confine-' oxidusiv^ely to the coast.
■t, TRIBES AND VILLAdES.
,tG
0. 'dand villngeM ;
KikK : .tai'soak.
Kinarbik.
Maneetsuk.
Narsuk.
Okkiosorbik.
Greenland grcnip-
Akorninak.
Aluik.
Anarnitsok.
Angmagsalik.
Ig<llolnarsuk.
Ivimiut.
West coast villages :
Akbat.
Labrador grouj):
Itivimiut.
Kigua(itagmiut.
Middle Group :
Aggomiut.
Ahaknanelet.
Aivillirmiut.
Akudliarndut.
Akudnirmiut.
Anntormiut.
Iglulingmiut.
Alaska group :
Chiglit.
Chugachigmiut.
Ikogmiut.
Imahklimiut.
Inguhklimiut.
Kaialigmiut.
Kangmaligmiut.
Kaviagndut.
Aleutian grouj) :
Atka.
Asiatic group :
Yuit.
Pojiiihifioii. — Only a rough ajjproximation of the population of
the Eskimo can be given, since of some of the divisions ne.xt to
Karsuit.
Suqinimiut.
Kangorraiut,
Kinnei)atu.
Krainalit.
Nauvuktormiut.
Netchillirmiut.
Nugumiut.
Okomiut.
Kittegareut.
Kopagmiut.
Kuagnnut.
Kuskwogmiut.
Magemiut.
Mahlemiut.
Nunatogmiut.
Nunivagmiut.
Unalashka.
Sermiligftk.
Serinilik.
Taterat.
Umanak.
Umerik.
Tesauisak.
Taqagmiut.
Pilingmiut.
Sag<llirmiut.
Sikosuilarmiut.
Sinimiut. ,
Ugjulirmiut.
Ukusiksalint'iniut.
Nushagagmiut.
Nuwungmiut.
Oglemiut.
Selawigmiut.
Shiwokugmiut.
Ukivokgmiut.
Unaligmiut.
li-
powiu..)
ESSEf.KNIAN KAMILV.
75
iiotliiiij; is l\iu)wii. Dull coiiipilot tli(< followiii)^ estimates of the
Aluskiiii Eskimo from tlio most roliiiliU* (iKUM's up to IHS5: Of the
Nortliwi'sterii Iiiiuiit :t,l(»(i (•''). inchuliiif^ tlic KopfiKniiut, KiiiiKmii-
liKiniut. Niiwukinlut, Nimatoj^miut, Kuii>?miut, the Iiif^uhklimiut
of Littk* Dicmiede Islaml 40 (?), Shiwoku>j;miut of St. Liiwronco
Island 150 (:■•), the Wrateni Innuit 14,500 (?), tlie Aleutian Islaml-
ers (Unungun) 2,-im) (?); total of the Alaskan Innuit, about -.'O.OOO.
The Central or Baffin Land Eskimo are estimated by Boas to
number about 1,100.'
From figures given by Rink, Paekard. and otliers, the total num-
ber of Labrador Eskimo is l)elieved to be about :i.OOO.
Aeeording to Holm (1884-'H5) there are altout 550 Eskimo on the
east coast of Greenland. On the west coast the mission Eskimo
mimbcrt'd 10,122 in 18K0, wliile the northern Greenland Eskimo,
the Arctic Highlanders of Ross, number about 200.
Thus throughout the Arctic regions generally there is ; otpl of
about ;J4,000.
E8SELENIAN FAMILY.
< SiiliniiM, Lathain in Trans. PIuIdIok. -Sih'. Lond., s,"), is.Vt (includes Oioloco?, RuHlen,
Siilt'dud, t^^slen, Curniel, Hun Antonio, and San Miguel, cited as including Etilen).
Latliuni, Opuscula. iWO. 1880.
As afterwards mentioned under the Salinan familv, the present
■B family was included by Latham in the heter<jgeueo group called
Tiy him Salinas. For reasons there given the term Salinan was
restricted to the San Antonio and San Miguel languages, leaving
the ])resent family without a name. It is called Esselenian, from
the name of tlie single tribe Esselen, of which it is composed.
Its history is a curious and interesting one. Apparently the fir.st
mention of the tribe and language is to be f(mndin the Voyage de la
Perfuise, Paris, 17H7, page 288. where Lamanon (178G) states that the
language of the Ecclemachs (Esselen) differs "absolutely from all
tluj.se of their neighbors." He gives a vocabulary of twenty-two
words and by way of comparison a list of the ten numerals of the
Achastlians (Costanoan fanuly). It was a study of the former short
Vijcabulary, published by Taylor in the California Farmer, October
24, 18(12. that Mrst led to the sui)position of the distinctness of this
lang'iage.
A few years later the Esselen people came under the observation
of Galiano,' Avho mentions the Eslen and Runsien as two distinct
nations, and notes a variety of differences in u.sagcs and customs
which are of no great weight. It is of intei-est to note, however,
that this author also appears to have observed essential differences
I Sixth Ann. Rep. Ru. Ktli.. 42(5. 1SS8.
' Kclafion del viajci' lieclio |>or las Goletas Sutil y Mexicaim en el uflo de 1793.
Madrid, isr,,!,|,. 172.
i
i
I
II
II
|-
I :
ill
i i:
76
INDIAN LINtU'IsriC FAMILIKH.
iiithi! luiimingeBof tlio twopeoplon, coiiferninK which ^^^ Huys: "Tlio
HuiiitMliftVnMU'G UH ill ushk" h'kI cuHtoiii in ohsorved in tho hiuguagcs
of tlit< t\vi» luitidiis, as will be ihmch'ivciI I'loin tlit- foUowiiif^ coim-
parisun witli which wt> will ctiiiciiKlt' itiis rha|iti'r."'
(laliaim supiilics Kssclcii and Rimsi<"i vooabuhiiit'S of tliirty-ono
woid.s, iiKwt of wliich aKi't'i- witli tlicfavlior vocabulary of Lainaiioii.
Tl'fst< wtTi' publishi'il by Taylor in tho Califoniia Fariuor under
date of April '2(1, IHCO.
In till! fall of 1H8H Mr. H. W. Henwhaw visited tlio vicinity of
Mojitt'i'ny with tho hop« of discovi'rinj? survivors of thesn Indians.
Two women were found in thc^ Salinas Valley to the south who
claimed to bo of Essolen blood, but neither of them was aide to
recall any of tlie laiiKuaKo, both having learuvd in early lifo to speak
tho Riinsii-n langua>;o in pliict< of their own. An old woman was
found in the Cariuelo Valley lusar Monterey and an old man living
near tho town of Cayucos. who, thouj^h of Itiinsien birth, remoni-
borod considorablo of th(i languaj?e of their nei)j;hl)ors with whom
they were connoctod by marriaK«. From tliem a vorabnhiry of one
hundre(l and ten words and sixty-eight phi'asos and short sentenceH
wore obtained. These .'ierve to establish the general correctness of
tlio sliort lists of words collected so long ago by Lamaiion and (lali-
ano, and they also prove beyoiKJ reasonable doubt that tho Esseleii
hmguago forms a family by it.self and lias no connection with .my
other known.
Tho tribe or tribes composing tliis family occupied a narrow strip
of the California coast from Monterey Bay south to the vicinity of
tlie Santa Lucia Mountain, a distance of about 50 miles.
IROQUOIAN FAMILY.
> Ir<xiuois.(Jallatin in Trans. Am. Antiij. S<x;.,il, 21. 2H, itO.'), ISilO (excludes Chero-
kee). Prichard, Pliys. Hist.Mankind.v.iiSl, 1847 (follows (Jallatin). (Sallntin in
Trans. Am. Etli.Hof., ll, pt. 1, xcix, 77. WH (us in \m\). (lallatiii in Stliool-
craft. Iiul. Trilies. ill. 401, IWa. Latham in Trans. Philolog. 8oc. Lond..58,
itm. Latham, Opiiscula, :W7, 1860. Latluun, Elements Comii. Phil., 40a, 186^.
> Irokesen, Berghaus (184.'i), Pliysik. Atlas, map 17, 184S. Ilml.. imi.
X Irokesen, lierghaus.Physik. Atlas, map Ti, 1887 (includes Kataba and said to be
derived from Dakota).
> Huron-IriH|uois. Haiuioft, Hist. U.S., ill, 243, 1840.
> Wyandot-Iro»iuois, Keane, A pp. Stjinford's (..'omp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460,
4((S, 1878.
> ( 'herokt>eH, Qallatin in Am. Anti(|.Soc.. li.slt, ;i06, \HM (kept apart from InHpiois
though proUible affinity u.sserted). Himcroft, Hist. U. H.. in, 24tt, 1840. Prichard,
Phys. Hist. Mankind, v. 401 . 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. S(k'. . ll. pt. 1, xcix,
77, 1848. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Ixjnd.. !>8. IS.'ifi (a separate group
|K'rhai)S to be classed with Innpiois and Sioux). Oallatin in Schoolcrnft, Iiid.
TrilH'H. Ill, 401, IS.'i!). Liitham. Opuscula, ;t27, 18(H). Keane, App. Stanford's
Coinp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 472. ISTH (same as Chelekees or Tsalagi —
"apiMirently entirely distinct from all other American tongues").
> Tschirokies, Berghaus (1)^5), I'hysik. Atlas, map 17, 1848.
IlKXitrolAN KAMIt.V.
7T
>('lii'li'k('<'H, Kt-aiu', Apit.HlimfdnrM ('iiiii|>.(('i'iit.iiiiil Ho. Airi. ).473. 1H7H (or C'lioro-
kwH).
>('la>roki. ( liitwlit-t. ( reck MIk. U-kcikI. I. Jl. IHHt, OutM'hct in H<'i<-iiri'. 4I:<,
A))ril u'l», iw;.
s=llur(iii-('lii'i'(>ke(>. Hull' in Am. Aiitii|., 30, .Inn.. |hh!) (proixwil iw ii I'aiiiily iiiiint'
iiiHtt'iiil of iliiri)ii-Ir<M|u<iiH; n'la(iiiiiHlii|) In Ii'iN|iiciiH iitHniii'd).
Dcriviitiiiii: Fiviicli udaptiitioii of tlu« IrnqiioiH word hiro, used to
coiifhulc H Hpi'CH'li, iind koiu', an t'xclfiiuiition (Cliarli'voix). Halo
j^ivt's as possililt' dci-ivatioiis icrokwa. tlic iiidt'tfriiuiiatf foi'iu of tlio
verb to Hinoki', Hij?uifyiii^j " thoy wlio Hiiioki';" also tlio Cayuga
.formof bear, iakwai.' Mr. Hi'witt' HUKKestilho AlK">iikin words irlii,
Inio, or roiil; ako. snake; with the J'rcntli termination ois. he word
l>eco'nes Irinakois.
Witli roferonco to this family it is of iiitero«t to note that as
early as l7!tH Barton" coniiiared the Chttroki languaj^e with tlnit
of the Iro(|no)s and stated his belief that there was a connec-
tion between them. Gallatin, in the Aiciweoloj^ia Americana, I'cfers
to the opinion expressed by Barton, and although he states that ho
is incline<l to agree with that author, yet he does not formally refer
Cheroki to that family, concluding tliat " We have not a sulHcient
knowledge of the grammai'. and gt^norally of the language of the
Five Nations, or of the Wyamlots, to decide that question.'"
Mr. Hale was tlie first to give formal oxpri'ssion to his belief in
the aflinity of tlie Choroki to Iroquois." Recently extensive Cheroki
vocabularies have come into i)ossession of the Bureau of Ethnology,
and a careful comparison of them with ample Inuiuois material Inis
been made by Mr. Hewitt. The result is convincing proof of the
relationship of the two hmguagos as affirmed by Barton so long ago.
OEO<»KAPHI0 DISTHIBUTIOS.
Unlike most linguistic stocks, the Trociuoiiin tribes did not occupy
u continuous area, but when first known to Europeans were settled in
three distinct regions, separated from each other by tribes of other
lineage. The northern group was suri'ounded by tribes of Algon-
(|uian stock, while the more southern groups bordered u\nni tho
Catawba and Maskoki.
A tradition of the Iroquois points to tho St. Lawrence region
as the early homo of the Irocpujian trii)es, whenc*? thoy gradually
moved down to the southwest along the shores of the Great Lakt\s.
When Cartitjr, in 15;{-i, first explored the bays and inlets of the
Gulf of St. Ijawronce he met a Huron- Iroquoian people on the shores
ot the Bay of Gaspe, who also visited the northern coast of the gulf.
Iri the foUowing year when he sailed up tho St. Lawrence River he
' Iroquois Bcx>k of Rit<>s, 1883, app., p. 17!!.
■• Aiiifricmi AntliroiH)lonist, ISSS, vol, 1, p. iss.
'' New Views of tlie OriKi" of the TrilH>s and Nations of America. Phila., 1798.
' Trans, Am. Antiif, Sw., ISliO. vol. 3, p. il3.
' Am.Antiq.,18s;t. vol,r),i).','0.
ft
INIUAN imullSTIC KAMIKrKS.
fouMil tli(> biiiik.s nf till) rivtM' from Quchiu; to Montreal occupioil liy
an lro(|U<iiiiii |H>n|ili>. From Htat<>iiii>iitH of Cluiin|iliiiii iiinl otliiT
t'lirly ('.\|)lor('rs it si-cnis proltaltlc that the Wyandot oiiro (H'('upi(><l
till' country alonjif tlif nortlit>ra Hliorc of Lake Ontario.
TiitiC'oncHtopi. ami pcihaiiM HoinoallitHl tribos, occupiod tho coun-
try about tht< Lower Sus(iurlianiia, in I'ttnnsylvania ami MarylamI,
ftuil ba\' nunonly Im-imi rcKanltMl as an isolatoil l)o(ly, but it sccins
proltablt" that tiicir territory was contiguous to tliat r)f thi< Fivo
Nations on thtt iiortli before tlie Delawarn began their westward
inovoment.
A:i tho Cherokei! wore tiie principal tril)e on the borders of tlni
Houtherii colonies and occiipiod the ieailin^ p!ac(> in all the treaty
negotiations, they (^aine to lie conf*idered as the owners of a largo
territory to which they had no real claim. Their first salo, in 17v'I,
t'luliraced a tract in South Carolina, between the Congaroe and the
South Fork of the Edisto.' but about one-half of this tract, form-
ing the present Lt^xington County, belonging to the Congaroe.' In
K."»."i they sold a second tract ai)ove the first and extiMiding across
South Carolina from the Havannah to the Catawba (or Watero(<).'
but all of this tract east of Broad River belonged to othei- tribes.
Tho lower part, iM-tweeii the Congaroe and the Wateri'o, had been
sold -U) years before, and in the upper part the Broad Rivt-r was
acknowledged as tho western Catawba boundary.' In 1770 they
sold a tract, principally in Virginia and West Virginia, bounded east
by the (Jreat Kairawha," but the Irotjuois claimed by conquest all of
this tract northwest of the main ridge of the Alleghany and Cuni-
l)erland Mountains, and extending at least to the Kentucky River,"
and two years i)revioiisly they had made a treaty with Sir William
.Johnson by which they were i-ecognized as the owners o( all between
Cumberland Mountains and the Ohio down to the Tennessee.' The
Cumberland River basin was the only part of this tract to which
the Cherok(Kf had any real title, having driven out the former
o 'ciipants. the Shawne,', about I7'il." The Cherokee hail no vil-
lages north of the Tennessee (this prol)ably includes tho Jiolston as
its upper part), and at a conference at Albany tlieCherokeo delegaies
presented to the Iroi|uois the skin of a iloei-, which they said belonged
to the Iroquois, as the animal had been killed north of the Tennes-
see." In 1805, 1800, and 1817 they sold several tracts, mainly in
' CesHion No. I, on Royce'H Clicroki'i- nmp, 18S4.
' Howe in S<-liiH)lcriift. Iiiil. TiIIk's. 1S.-)4, vol. 4, p. 163.
•'CoHsion i, on R<iy<'i''« Clu'roki'c map, 1M84.
* Howe in H<li.H)l(Taft, Iml. TiilH'H, 1S.-.4, vol. 4, pp. lM-159.
'OHHion 4, on Koyce's t'herolteo lunp, Ihh4.
'Sir Willinni JohiiHon in I'urknian"s Conspiracy of Pontiac.app.
'Bancroft. Hint. U.H.
* Riimiwy, Annals of Teniii'sst'p, 1W.");J.
* Ramsey, Annals of Tenni'ssee, 18.5:5.
llttKirnl.vN KAMir.Y.
T9
iiiiddUt Ti'i iipsviip, nortli of tli" ToruioMHtm River lunl I'xtoiKliii^t to
lln' ('miiltorliiiiil lilvci' wiitorslicil, liiit this Icrritury was clitiinml
mill had lii'cii ui'cii|iifd hy tiio CliiitkuHiiw, mid iit nii(> runfcrciifti
th»* C'iion)ktt(< iidmittcd tlmir (diiiin.' Tho (i<ljiitiMit tract in iiortli.
»<rii Aliiliuriiii mid (Ji'mxi'i. '>ii thu iiiuidwiitci's <if flic ('cmhh, wiih not
|MM'iiittiiiMitly nccii|iicd liy till' (jlit'iujitic iiiitii tlit-y linKmi to iiiovo
wi'stwiird. iibout I'T'i.
Tim wliolc rof^ioii of VVrst V'irKiiiiii. Koiitn('l<y. und tlu' ('iiiiil)or-
land Itivi'i' roj^ion of Tt<iiiu«MMi'i' was ciainind liy tln^ Iro(|UiiiM and
Cht'i'oltt'tt, l)ut tlitt Iro((noiH novor ociv.picd any of it and tlic Clicro-
IctHi I'onld not ho Haid to 'iiiiyany hcyonil tlic ('nnil)t'rland Monn-
taiiis, Tht'C'iiMiiM'rland liivn- was <ii'i>;inally held liytiir Sliawi ,
and tlin roHt was occnpitMl, so far as it was occniiiiMi at ail, liy tlm
Hhawiiuu, Dolawarc. and occasionally l»y the Wyandot and .Miiit;u
(Ii'o(|noian), who niailc D'^ular cxinirsions soiitliward across the
Ohio every year to iuinl and to make salt at the licks. Most n( tlni
temporary camps or villages in Kentucky ami West V'irginii' \ver«
hiiilt liy the Shawneo and Dehiware. The Sliawiiee and Dela-
ware were tlie priiicijial harrier to the Hcttlenieiit of Kentncky ami
West Virgniia for a perimi of -vMlyears, while in all thai time neither
the Cliorokwn nor the Irocpiois offered any resistance or checked the
opp<isition of the Ohio trihes.
The Ciieroktiti hounds in Virginia should he extended along tln»
moiiiitain region as far at least as the Jaines Kiver, as they claim
to have lived at flie Ti-aks of Otter.' and seem to he identical with
tho Hickohockan or Rechahecrrian of the early Virginia writers,
who lived in the monntains beyond the Monacaii, and in Hl.Vi i-av-
agod tile lowland country us fai' as the siU; of Itichrnond ami i|e-
featod till) Engli.-iii and tlie Powhatan Indians in a pilcJM'd hattle at
that plact'."
Tho language of the Tuscarora, formerly of northeastern Xortli
Carolina, connoi^t thtMU directly witli tho northern lro((uois. The
Cliowanoc and Nottoway ami other ccjgnate trihes adjoining the
Tuscarora may have been offshoots from tliat tribe.
PRI.Nlil'AI, TUIBKS.
Cayuga, . Neuter. Soiioca.
CiierokoH, Nottoway. ' Tiomuitato.
Conestoga. Oneida. Tuscarora.
Erit!. Onondaga. Wyandot.
Miiliawk.
/*()/ ''(//(*M.— Tho i)re.sent number of the Iroipioian stock is about
4:l,tioo. i/f whom over ;U,0()(t (inchuling tho Chemkees) are in tho
LTnited States while* nearly ii, ()()() are in Canada. Below is given
tho population of the different tribes, compiled chiefly from tho
' Bldiint (171(2) in Ain.Stntc I'ii|icrs. lH:i2, V(il.4,|i.:l2«.
'Schdolernft.Xott's mi lro<|Uiiis, |S4T.
'Bamidft, ULst. U.S.
80 INDIAN LINOriHTIO KAMlIilKS.
Canadian Indian Ruport for 18fS8, and tho United States Census
Bulletin for 1890:
C'hcrokei':
ChtTokcr' and C'lux-taw Nations, Indian Territory (oxclusive of adopted
Indians, negroes, and wliites) 25, r)."i7
Eastern Hand, Qualla Reservation, Cheowah. etc., North Carolina (ex-
clusive of those practically white) 1, 5(K) V
liUwrence scluwl, Kansas (1
27,(Hl;fi'
Caughnawaga:
CaughnawaKn, QueU'c I , flTIt
Cayuga:
(irand Uiver, Ontario Wil
With Scnecii, Qiiapaw i» gi'iicy, Indian Territory (total 255) 12H'j'
Cattaraugus K(?serve, New York 165
ether Reserves in New York iiO
l.itOl?
" Iroijuois ":
Of Lake of Two Klountains, Quel)ec. mainly Mohawk (with Algon-
(piin) ;(-l5
\Vith .'Mgoncjuin at (Jilwon, Ontario (total llil) !tl ?
Mohawk:
guinte Bay, Ontario UOoO
(irand River, Ontario I,;i(l2
Tonawanda, Onondaga, and Cattaraugus Reserves, New York (!
2, !15H
Oneida:
Oneida and other Reserves, New York 21(5
(ireeii Ray Agency, Wisconsin (" including homeless Indians'') 1,71(1
Carlisli' and Hampton schools 1(14
Thames Uiver, Ontario IW
(Jrand River, Ontario 2iM!
it, 120
Onondaga:
< )nondaga Reserve, New York IWO
Allegany Reserve, New York 77
< 'attartiiigus Re.-erve, New York JtS
Tiiscarora (41) and Tonawanda (4) Reserves. New Y'ork 45
Carlish" and liamnton stduH)ls 4
Cirand River. Ontario 114(1
Senjru:
With ( 'ayuga. (^ua|)aw Agency. Indian Territorj (total 355) 127?
Allegany Reserve, New York 8(12
Cattaraugus Reserve, New York ; . . . l.itlM
Tonawanda Reserve. New York 517
Tuscarora and Oiuindaga Reserves. New York 12
LawreiK-e. Hampton, and Carlisle schools l<t
Grand River. Ontario 2(10
U,055?
KAI.APdOIA.V FAMILY.
SI
St. l{.'Ki«:
Ht . Ht'Kis Reserve. New York 1 , (WH
OiKimlaKa Jiiiii other Reserves. New York 17
St. Reiris Reserve, ytielxx; 1 . 179
Tusearorii:
Tiiscnrora Reserve, New York , .
Cattaraugus and Tonawaiida Reserves, New York,
(iraiiil River. < )ntariii
Wyaiiilot :
(juapaw Ajteiiey .Indian Territory
L»-vrei)ce, Hampton, anil Carlisle schools.
" Hiirons" of F-orette. QuelKX'
'• Wvaiulots" of .Vuileriloii. Ontario
2, 3-ll»
(I
7:l:!
IS
•.'7i»
its
(IM:i
Tho Ii'C)(iH()is of St. Rt'K's, Ciiiifi'liimwaf^ii, Laki' of Two Mountains
(Oka), and Gibson spoak a (liali'ct mainly Moliawk and Oneida, but
HIV a nii.xture of all the tribes of tin- orijifinal Five Nations.
KAhAPOOIAN KAMIliY.
= Kala|M)oiah.)Seouler in ,Jonr. Roy. (iiM)ji.S(K". Ix)nd. . XI. 22."), 1S41 (includes Kala-
piHiiah and Yanikallie: thinks the linpipia and Cathla-M-on lanjjuaKcs are re-
lateili Buschniann.Spurendi'r a/,tck. Spraclic. 'M). til7, 1S,')9. (follows Scouler).
^-^ ICalapuya. Hale in U.S. Expl. K.\p.. vi,2l7. "ilU, lHt« (of Willainet Valley alKive
Falls). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Etli. S(k\, n. pt. 1. c. 17, 77. I His. Hert;haus ( is.ll ).
Physik. Atla.s, map 17. XSTri. Gallatin in Sch(K)lcraft. Ind.Tril>es, ni, 402. is.vt.
I^atham in Trans. PhiloloK.Stx'. liOiid.. 71!. lS.")(i. VSuKchnaini. Spm-en deraztek.
Sprache. »tl7, IS.W. Uitham.Opus<ula. ;(40. (StIO. (Jatsi'het in Maj;. Am. Hist..
1«7, IH77. (Jatschet in Itaich, Ind. .Misc.. 442. 1S77.
>CalaiK)oya. Binn-roft."Nat. Ra<is.ni.. ■>(!.">. (i2», IHS2.
X Chinooks, Keane. A|«(). Stanford's Coinp. (Cenl.aiid So. .\iii. 1,474, IH7S (includes
Calapiioyas an<l Yanikally).
> Yamkally,Hancroft. Nat. Racess. ni, .■")«.■), 080, 1SS2 (In'ars a certain relationship to
C:daiMio.va).
Under this fanuly name S'-onier [)laces two tril)Os, the Kalapooiali,
inhabiting "the fertilt! Willania^ pbiins" and the Yanikullie. who
live "more in the interior, to ards tlie sources of tiie Willamat
River." Scouler adds that the IJmpciua " aijjiear to belonjj to this
Family. althoiiKh their ianjifnaye is rather more remote from the
Kalapooiah tiian the Vamkallie is." The lTm[)iina lanj^uage is now
placed undei' the .\tliapa,sean family. Scouler also asserts the inti-
nuiti' relatiinisliip of the Catlilascon trii)es to the Kalapooiah family.
They are now clas.sed as Chiiiookan.
Tile tribes of the Ivalapooiaii family inhabiteil Ilu> valley of Wil-
hiniette River. Oregon. al)ove tlm falls. ,ind e.\tended well uj) t(^ the
7 KTH (1
r
82
INDIAN LINoriSTU; FAMII.IKS.
headwaters of that stnMiu. Tliey appear not to Imve readied the
Columbia River, being cut ott' by tribes of the Ciiinooiiau family,
and conseipiently were not met by Lewis and Clarke, whose state-
ments of th(Mr liabitat were derived solely from natives.
Ahiin t (■ hu y u k
(Pudiliiig River
Indians).
Atfalati.
I'RI.NX'U'AI. TRIBES
Calapooyu.
Chelamela,
Litkmiut.
8antiam.
Yiimil.
Yonkalla (AyankCdd).
Population. — So far as known the surviving Indians of this family
are all at the (irandc Ronde Agency, Oregon.
The following is a census for 181M1:
Atfalati 28 .Santiam 27
C'alaiMXjya 23 Yuiiiil 30
Laktuiut 29 Yonkalla 7
Marv's River 28
Total
171
KARANKAWAN FAMILY.
= Karanka\va, (Jatschet in (Jlotnis. xi.ix, No.H, l',>i(, 1HS6 (viRalmlarv of 'i't tenim;
(listiiiguisluHl as a family provisionally). (latst'liet in Htiunct', 414, Ajiril i),
1887.
The Karankawa formerly dwelt upon the Texan coast, according
to Sibley, upon an isjland or peninsula in the Bay of St. Bernard
(Matagorda Bay). In 1804 this author, upon hearsay eviilence,
stated their number to be SOO men.' In several places in the jiaper
cited it is explicitly stated that the Karankawa sj)()ke the Attakapa
language; the Attakapa was a coast tribe living to the east of them.
In 1.S84 Mr. (iatschet found a Tonkawe at Fort (Jrillin, Texas, who
claimed to have formerly lived among the Karaid<awa. From him
a vocabulary of twenty-live terms was obtained, which was ail of
the language he remembered.
The vix^aiiulary is unsatisfactory, not only because of its nieager-
ness. but because most of the terms are unimportant for c(iiH])ai'isun.
Nevertheless, such as it is. it represents all of the language that is
extant. .Judg(>d by this vocabulary the language seems t(j be dis-
tinct not (inly from the .\ttaka])a but from all others. Unsatisf.ac-
tory as the linguistic evidence is. it appears to be safer to (dass the
language provisionally as a distinct family upon the strength of it
than to accept Sibley's statement of its identitv with Attnkapa,
especially as we know nothing (jf the extent of his iid'ormation or
whethei' indeed his statement was based upon w personal knowledge
of the language.
' Aiii.Stiiti' I'a|>tMs.1N;i','.vol.4.p.;22.
I
KKKKSAN FAMILY.
S3
A careful sciurh lias bouii ma<ln with tli(^ hope of tiiidiu^ a fow
survivors of this family, hut thus far not a siuglo descoudant of the
tribe has boeu discoveretl aud it is probable that not one is now
living.
KERESAN FAMILY.
> Keies. Turner in Par. U. R. Rfp. .Ul. pt.H. 55. 8(1-90, IHJti (include.s Kiwomi.(JiHhi>
temi. Acoimi).
= Kern, Powell in K<K'ky Mt. Presbyterian. Nov., IH7H (ineluiles San Felipe, Smto
Domint^o, CiKjliiti.Hiinta .\ila.('ia. Acmna. Lanuna. Povate, Hasatch, Monino).
(fatst'het in U.S.Cleog. Surv. \V. KHitli M., vu, 117, lH7i). (ialscliet in .Man.
Ain.Hist.25i), 1SH3.
= Keraii, Powell in Am. Nat., Ot)-t, Au>;.. IHSO (enunieruteH pueblos ami gives linsuist-
ie literature).
- - <,|ueres. Keane. App. .Stanford's Coiup. (Cent, and 'jo. Am. ), 479, 187H.
r^Chu-elia-ca.s. Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tril)es,v, ((H9, lH.55(includesLiiKuna. .Vconia,
Santo Uomin(>;o,San Feli|)e, Santa Ana.CiK'liite.Sille).
= Chii-clia-cha.s, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 187H (mi.s-
print; follows I.ane).
= Kes-whaw-hay, Lane in Scluxilcraft, Ind. TrilK>M, v, (iSil, 1855 (same as Chu-clia-ciis
above). Keane, .\pp. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 179,1878 (follows
Lane).
Derivation unkut)wn. The name is pronounc('(l with an explosive
initial sound, and A<1. F. Baudelier spells it Qij'ueres, Quera, Qneris.
Under this name Turner, as above (luoteil. includes the vocabu-
laries of Kiwonii, Cochitemi. lud Acoma.
Th(! full list of pueblos of Keresan .stock is given below. They
are situated in New Mexico on the upper Rio (irande. on several of
its small western alHuents, and on the Jemez and San Jose, which
also are tributaries of the Rio Grande.
Santo Domingo.
Seemunah.
Sia.
Wapuchuseamma.
Zianima.
VU.I.AUES.
Acoma. Puel)lito.'
Acomita.' Punyeestye.
Cochitf. Punyekia.
Ha.'^atch. Pusityitcho.
Fiaguna. Sau Felipe.
Paguate. Santa .\na.
/'o/>m/((//(;/(.— According to the census of IH'M) the total poptdatioii
of the villages of the family is .J, 500, distributed as follows:
.\coma'' 5tUt San Felipe 554
Cochiti 2«.S Santo Dominso (170
Lauuna ' 1 , 148 Sia 190
Santa .\na 25.1
' Summer piiel]|<is only.
' Includes .\coniita and Pueblito.
'Includes llasatcli. Paifuatc. Punyee.stye, Punyekia, Pusityitcho, Seemunah,
Wapuchuseamma, and /iamma.
I
m
INDIAN MNOUISTK; KAMIMPX
KIOWAN f'AVlIiV.
= Km ways. Gallatin in Sohoolcraft, Ind. Trilies, in, 402, 1853 (on up])er waters Ar-
kansas).
= Kioway , Tu ner in Pac. R . R. Kep. , m, pt. 3, 5,';, 80, 18.56 (IwwhI tm I he Kioway (Cai-
jiua) trilii only). Kuschniann, Spuren der aztek. Spniflie, 4;t'J, 41!;!. lH."i)l,
l^itli.iin. Kl. romp, l'iiil.,444. lH(i:J (" more I'adiKa tlianaiiKlit else").
i^Kayowo.datHilu't in Am. Anti(i..a80, Oct., 1882 (^ivcs plionetics of).
Derivation: From tlu' Kiowa word Ki'»-i. plural Ki'>-i^ii, mt^aniiit;
" Kayowt" man." The Comanche term kayowe means " lat."
The author who tii'.st Foriiuilly separatcnl this family ap|)cars to
liHve been Turner. (Jallatin mentions the tribe and remai'ks that
owing to che loss of ])r. Say's vocabularies "we only know that
both the Kiowas and Kaskaias languages wtM'e harsli. fjfnttiiral. and
extremely dillicult." ' Turner, upon the strength of a vocabuhiry
furnished by Lieut. Whip|)le, dissents from the opinion expressed
by Pike and others to the etfect that the language is of the sjimc
stock as the ("onumche. and, whih> admitting that its relationship
to Camanche is greater than to any othei' family, thinks that the
likeness is mei'tily the result of long intercommunication. His
opinion that it is entir(»ly distinct from any other language has lu'en
indorsed by Busclunann and other authorities. The family is r(>p-
resented by the Kiowa tril)e.
So intimately associated with the Comanches have the Kiowa
been since known to history that it is not easy to (httermine their
pristine home. By the Medicine Creek treaty of October IS, ISC.^
they and th(> Comanches were assigned their present resei'vation in
the Indian Territoi'v, l)oth resigning all claims to other tcriitory.
especially their claims and I'ights in ami to the country north of the
Cimai-ron Kiver and west of the eastern lutundai'y of New ilexico.
Tlu' tei-ms of the cession might be take^' *o indicate a, joint owner-
shijt of territory, l)ut it is more like^. ..hir tlie Kiowa tei'ritory
adjoined the ('omanche on the northwe; ' ,.1 fact PoiJe" detinitely
locate;, the Kiowa in the valley of the Uppi-r Arkansas, and of its
tributary, the I'nrgatoi'V (f^as Anim is) River. This is in substan-
tial accord with the statements of other writers of about the .same
])ei'iod. SclitM'merhorn (IMri) places the Kiowa on the heads of the
Arkansas and Platte. Earlier still they api)ear ujxm the headwaters
of the l*latte. which is the i-egion assigned them upon the map.'
This region was occupied later by the Cheu'une and .\i'apaho of
Algonquian stock.
/'()l>iiliifioii. — According to the Fllited States census foi- ISlKi there
are 1,140 Kiowaontlie Kiowa. Comanche, and VV'i(diita Resei'vation,
Imliaii Territory.
' Tran;:.anil Coll. Am. \iiti.|.S(«., |.s;i(i, vol ii.p. i;l:l.
» I'ac. R. R. Rep.. Is.Vi. vol. ,>. pt. ;!. p. Ul.
' I'ikc. K.xp.to .soin-ci's of the Mississippi. A|(p. . isio.pt.;!. p. !(.
PUWKLL.j
KITI'N.' IIAN-K'JU'SC'H.VN I AMIUES.
85
KITUNAHAN FAMILY.
= Kitunalia, Halo in U.S. Expl. Exp., Vl,204.ri8r). 1W4« (l)etwooii the foik.s <>f the
('"lunihiiu. (lallalin in Trans. .\in. Etii. Sm-., ll.pt, l,(s 10.77, I84H (Klatlxiw).
Hci-KliauH (1H,")1), l'liy«ik..\tliiM, niap 17,1852, huliain in Tran.s. l'liil(iIo(r.S(ic.
l,<.ml..70, lH."iH. Latham. Opuscula. ;i!W, 186(1. I.iithani, p:i. ("oiiip. Phil., :H»."),
\xtVi (l)et'voi'n 'yi anil 48 N. !>., wcHt i)f main riilne of Rot'ky .Mountains).
(iiits(-h(*t in Maj;. Ain.Hist., 170. 1877 (on Kootenay River).
r Contanii's. Hale in U.S. Kxpl. E.\p.,vi. 204. 1846 ( ^kilnnalm).
Ki'itanis. Ijitlmni, Nat. Hist. Man. .:ilO. ISoO (Kitunalm).
Kituanaha, ( iailatin in Sch<K)lcraft, Ind. Tribos, ill, 103, 18.58 (Coutaria or Flatbow.H,
north of lat.4!l ).
Kootanii'H, Biischinann, Simnm dcr azt<'k.Sprachi',661, 18.59.
-: Kutani. Uithani, El. Cornp. Phil., Hl«. 1862 (or Kitunaha).
-=CiM)tanie. L.athani. El.t'onip. Pliil..;i»."), 1862 (synonymous with Kitunaha).
= Kootenai. (iatsi-het in Majj- Am. Hist.. 170, 1877 (defines area o<vupieil). (Jatsehet
in Beacli. IniL Misc., 446, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. R.iceH,lli,r)6.5, 1882.
= K<M)tenuha, Tolmie and Dawson. C'onip. Vcx'alw. , 79-87, 1884 (vcx'aliulary of
LTpi)er Kootenuha).
— Flatliow, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp.,vi, 204, 1846(- Kitunaha). (Jallatin in Trans.
Ani.Eth.So<\,ll, pt. 1,10,77. 1848 (after Hale). Buschmann.Spuren der aztek.
Spraclie. Hfil . |8.-i9. Uithani, El. Conip. Phil., 39.5, 1862 (or Kitunaha). ( iatsehet
in MaK. Am.Hist..l7(t. 1877.
- Klaelil)OK<'ii. Bernhaus (18.51), Physik. Atlas, ma|) 17. 18.52.
X .Shushwaiis, Keane. .\pp. .Stanford's Cotnp. (Cent, and .So. .Vin.;. 460, 474. 1878 (in-
cludes Kootenais (Flatbows or .Skalzi).
This family was based upon a tril)e variously termed Kitunaha,
Kutcnay. Cootenai. or Flatbow, liviiif^ on the Kootonay liivor. a
branch of the (kdumbia in Oregon.
Mr. Gatsflu't tliiniis it is i)robable that Ihort* are two dialects of
the lanj^ua.ii;e spoken respectively in the extreme northern and south-
ern portions of the territory 'M-cui)ied. but the vocabtilaries at hand
are not suthcient to definitely settle the (lue.stion.
Tlio area occupied by the Kitunahan triljes is inclosed l)etween the
northern fork of the Columbia Rivei'. extending on tiie south along
the Cootenay River. By far tiie greater part of the territory occu-
pied by these tribes is in British Columbia.
TKIBES.
The ))i'inci))al divisions oi' tribes are Cootenai, or Upiier Coottmai;
Akoklako, or Lovvei' Cootenai ; Klanoh-Klatklam, or I'hithead Coo-
tenai; Yaketahnoklataknnikanay. or Tobacco Plains Cootenai.
Popiildtinii. — There are about 42.5 Cootenai at Flathead AgtMicy,
Montana, and .5:$!) at Kootenay Agency, British Columbia; total, n()4.
KOLUSCHAN FAMILY.
— Kohischeii.t Jallatin in Trans, and Coll. .\m. .\ntii|.So<'., ll, 14. 18:!6 (islands and ad-
jacent coa.st from 60 to .5.5 N. L.).
=^Koulisclien, (iailatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti(|.Soc., n, .306, 18:^0. (iailatin in
Trans. Am. P'.th. .Soc., n. pt. 1, c, 77. 184s. (Koulisclien and Sitka laMKuanes).
Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Iml. Tribes, in, 402, lS,5i{ (Hitka, l)et, .52 and .59° lat.).
'lt'.':-*ii
m
li
86
INIUAN MNfMISTIC KAMIMKS.
Ijj
■ ■■■:Vi
<Kol(XK'li, Lnthaiii in Tiiins. PIuIoIok. S(k'. Lond., ii, ;il-ri(i, Ih-MI (tt'iids to iimtko
KoltHX'h into Ksi|uinmux). I^iitliani in Jour. Ktli. Sih'. l,onil., 1, KKl, IH4M(coni-
pari'il with KHkiino lanKiiaKi>. ). Latham, Opnscula, '^5)), :;27t), IHtUI,
= Kohisi!!ians, I'richanl, I'hvs. Hist. Mankind, v, 4:i:\. 1H47 (follows (iailatin).
SiMmlcrllKttI) inJour. Kth. Woe. bind., I, *tl. 1H4S.
<Koliich, Latham, Nat. Ilist. Man, «iH, lH,"i()(nion' likely forms a NulxliviMion of Ks-
kimo than a wparatc chuts; includt's Kenay of tlook's Inlet, Atna of ('o|ipcr
Kivcr. Koltshani. I'Kali'rits. Sitkans. TutiKaas. Inklnduklait. MaKinuit. Inkalit;
Di>;othi and Ni'haiuii :ir<' cl.iHst'd as "doiihtful Kolucht's").
= Koloschen,BerKliaus(lH45i, Pliysik. Atlas, map IT, 1H4H. Ihid., IH.")t>. Unschniann,
Spurcn dcr a/.tck. Hpraihf, tWO, lH5i». HiMKhans, PhyHJk. .Vtlas, map T->. ISHT.
= Kolush. Latiiani, El.Conip. l*hil.,4()l, IHtU (niert" mention of family with short
v(K'ahulary).
= Kaloshians, Dall in I'rcM'. .\m. Ass., ;n5. IHH.5 (j^ives triU's and population).
X Northern, .Scouler in Jour. Koy. (ieoK. Soe. l,ond., .\l, '.ilH. 1841 (includes Koloshes
and Tun (iha-sse).
X Haidah. .Seouler, ihid. ',>l!l, 1841 (same as his Northern).
— Klen-ee-kate. SchiMileraft, Ind.Tril«'s. v,48il, 18.>'>.
-- Klen-e-kate. Kane. Wanderinj'^s of an .\rtist, app. . 1851) {a census of N.W. coast
tril)es chwsiHeil hy lauf^iajre).
==Tlilinkitlien. UolmlH'rt; in Kinlanil .S(x-.. y84. 18.')(l (tide liusclimann,6Tl). 18."ii»).
= Thrnkets. Dall in l'r<K-. Am. Ass., 2(i8,a«(), lH«9(divide<linto .Sitka-kwan,Stahkii,-
kwan, " YakiitJits").
— T'hnkets, Dall in font. N. A. Eth.. I, ;!0, 1877 (diviiled into Yak'fitatw. Chilkaht -
kwan. Sitka-kwan. Stakhin -kwiin. Kygah ni).
= Tliliiik"( I. Keane. App. Stanford's (•omp.(t;ent. and So. .Vin.), 400,403, 1878 (from
Mounts' . Elias to Na.ss Kiver: includes r>;alenzes. Yakutats. Chilkats, llixxlnids,
HoodsiniMis, 'riik(K)s. Auks. Kiska-s, ,Stikiiies. Eeliknus. TunKiV.ss.,Sltka»). Ban-
<roft. Viit.Wacs. III. .•.«•,>. .W). !88'J.
=Tliriikii. Tolmieand Dawson, ("omp. VcK'ahs.. 14. \»M (viK'al). of SkutUwan Sept;
als (inapshi H 'iijjdistrihution of family). IVrKhaus. Physik. .\tlas, map 7".', 18,S7.
= Tlink't. Dall in l'r(K'. .\m. VH.s..l!7r). lH8."i(eiiumeratestril) sanilgives |H)pulati(m).
l)fri\ atioii: Fi'om tlif Ali'titw(H'(l k-olosli.oriiioi'opfoporlyjkaluga,
meaning "dish," tht'alliisiuii lu'iiiu; to tluMli.sli-^li.'ipcil li))ui'iiaiiifi!ts.
Tlii.s fa.iiily was h^.-ifd hy (iailatin upon tlu* Koiusclioii ti'iho (tiio
Tsliiiikit.iiii of Mai'i'liaini). '* wiio inliabit tlio islands aii<l tlic adja-
cent coast tVoiii tli ' ~ixti('tli to tli(. fif'ty-lit'tli dcsfree of noi'tii lati-
tude."
In tlio Koluschaii family, Gallatin oh.serves that the i-emote analo-
gies to the Me.xii'an tonj.;n(' to l)t> found in several of the noi-theiii
tribes, as the Ki, ai, ai'e nior(i marked than in any other.
The bouiid;-ries of this family a.s k'^'''" '•>' tJallatin are substan-
tially in accordance with our present knowledge of the subject.
The '.oulliern ;o\''iilary is sonu'what imleti'iMninate owiiif to the
fact, a-c, rtained iiy 'he cei:sus a^-ents in IMSO. tiijit thf Haida tribes
e.\teud sonu what fiiither north than was fornu'ily suitpftsed and
occupy the southeast half of Pi-inctM)i Wales Island. About lati-
tiiile .')<>", or the mont '! (d' Portland Canal, indicates the so itherii
limit of the family, and (10'. or iie.-ir the mouth of Atna Hivei', the
northern limit. Until recently they have bee)i supposed to be excdii-
II:
KIU.ANAI'AN I AMII.Y.
S7
sivcly an insnliir jiml cojist |m'()|)1(', l)iit Mr. Dawson lias jnailc tlio
iiiti'i'i'stiiiK discovery ' llial iic Taj^isli. a trilui living inlaml on tlio
lioadwaturs of tho Jj«wis llxvcr, who liavo hitherto heon supposed
to ))e of Atliapascan extraction, helonj; t(j tho Koluschan family.
This tribe, therefore, has crosseil the (M)ast I'an^e of nionntains,
which for the most i)art limits the extension of this jieople irdand
and coutinos tiiem to a nai row co.'ist strip, and have gained a perma-
nent foothold in the interior, where they share the habits of the
neighboring Athapascan tribes.
r..nKs.
Tagish.
Taku.
Tongas.
Yakiitat,
Population. — The following figures are from the census of 1880.'
The total population of the tribes of this family, exclusive of the
Tagisli, is i'>A'-i7, distributed iis follow,-'.:
TL.nKS
Auk.
llnnah.
Chilcat.
Kek.
Hanega.
Sitka.
Hoodsnnn.
Stahkin.
Auk 640
Chilciit !t8H
Ilaiiegii (iiicludiiij; Koiiyoa and
Klanak) '>»'
Hooilsiinu (ittd
Huimh SMIS
Kek rm
•Sitka in
Htiihkiii :tl7
Taku mt
Tonkas iTii
Yakutnt r.iKt
KULAXAI'AN FAMILY.
X K ula-iiaixi, Oibbs in SrliookTaft, Ind.Tribes, m,431, IS-W (the name of niw of
tlie Clear Ijike l)ands).
> Moiidocino (?), Latliaiii in Trans. I'liiloloK. Six;. Lond.. 7T, lS.-|(i (name suggested
for Choweshak, Batemdaikai. KulanaiM), Yukai. Khwaklaniayu lannuuges).
Latliani.Oiniscnla.:U:t. IWIi). r.atliani. Kl.('oiii!i. Phil.. Ill), IS(W (as above).
>Ponio. Powers in Overland Monthly, ix. !!>«. Di'c.. |ST\.' (general description of
habitat and of family). Powers in Tont. X. A. Ktli..in. Hfi, 1H77. Powell, ibid.,
41H (vix'abiilaries of (ial-li-no-nie-ro. Yo-kai -a. Ba-teni-da-kaii. ( 'haii-i-shek.
Yu-kai, Kn-la-na-po, Hhana. Venaanibakaiia. Ka -lii-na-pek. Chwaihaniiiju).
Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hi.st.. Iti, 1S77 (gives hal)itat and ennmerates tribes of
family). (Jatschet in lieaeh. Ind. Misc.. 4:t((, 1S77. Keane. .\pp. Stanford's
C'omp. (Cent, and So. .\ni.). 47(). lS7M(inclndesCastel Pomos.Ki. Cahto. Chnani.
Chadela. Jlatoniey Ki, Usal orCalamel . Shobalno Ponios, (iallinornero.s, Sanels,
Six-oas, Lamas, Comaehos).
<Pomo. Bancroft, Nat. Races, ni,.')(tr). 1HH2 (includes rkiah.Cial'inomero. Masalla-
magoon,(iaalala, Matole, Knlanapo, Sane!, Yonios, Choweshak. Batemdakaic.
ClKKUyeni. Olarnentke, Kainamare. Chwa<hama,jii. Of these. Ch(K;nyem and
Olaiuentke are M(K|uelunnian).
The name a])i)lied to this fiijnily was first employed by (ribbs in
18.5.1. as above cited. He states that it is tho " name of one of tlio
' Annual l{ei«>rt of the Geological Survey of Canada. 1HH7.
■' PetrolT. Hejwrt on the Population, Industries, and Resources of Alaska. 1SH4,
p.:w.
88
INDIAN MNdllSTlr KAMII.IKS.
Clear Lake haiuls," adding tliat " tho lan^iuiKt' i« spoken by all the
trilx's (H^oiipyiiiK th»' large valley." The lUstiiictuesB of the lan-
guage is now generally admitted.
OEOdRAPIIIC niSTRIBUTION.
The main territory itf the Knlanapan family is bounded on the
west by the Pacific Ocean, on the ea.st by th«' Yukian and Copehan
territories, on the north by the watershed of the Russian River, and
on the south by a lini^ drawn from Bodega Head to the southwest
corner of the Yukian territory, near Santa Rosa. Sononui County,
California. Several tribes of this family, viz, the Kastel Porno,
Kai Ponio. and Kato Pomo. are located in the valley between the
Soutli Fork of Eel Rivi^' and the main river, and on the hea<lwaters
of the South Fork, extending tlience in a narrow strip to the ocean.
In this situation they were entirely cut off from the nniin body by
the intrusive Yuki tribes, and pressed upon from the north by the
warlike Wailakki, who are said to have imposed their language and
many of tlieir customs lipon them ami as well doubtless to have; ex-
teusively intermarried with them.
TRIBR8.
Ballo Kai Pomo, "Oat Valley People."
Batemdikityi.
B'lldam Pomo (Rio Grande or Big River),
Chawishek.
C}n)am Chadila Ptjmo (Capello).
Chwachamaju.
Daj)ishul Pomo (Redwood Caiion).
Viisterii People (Cleai' Lake about Lakeport).
Sii'o (moutl) of Ru.ssian River).
Ei'dssi (Port Ross).
Gallinomero (Russian River Vclley below Cloverdaleandiu Dry
Creek Valley).
Gualiila (nortiiwest (Corner of Sonoma County).
Kabinapek (western jiart of Clear Lake biusin).
Kaime (above Healdsburgli).
Kai P<mio (l)etween Kel River and South Fork).
Kastel Pomo (between Eel River and South Fork).
Kato Pomo, *' LakePei)[)]H."
Komacho (Anderson and Kancheria Valleys).
Kuhi Kai Pomo (Sherwood Valley).
Kulana))o.
Liima (Russian River Valley).
Misitliiinagnn or Musakaki'Mi (above Healdsburgli).
Mitoam Kai P(mio, " Wcjoded Valley People" (Little Lake).
Pf)ani Pomo.
POWELL.]
KI'SAN-M-TI'AMIAN KAMFMES.
THIBKS— idiitiiuieil.
89
Seiiol (Russian River Vaih-y).
81i()(l() Kttf Ponio (Coyote Valloy).
Si'ako (RuHsiaii River Valley).
8ok()a (RuHsiau River Valley).
Yokilya Pomo, "L.ower Valley People" (Ukiaii City).
Yusal (or Kanialol) Poino, "Ocean Pe(jplo" (on coast anil
along Yusal Creek).
KUSAN FAMILY.
= KuHa, Gatwlu't in Mag. Am. Hist., •,'57, IMH3.
Derivation ; Milliau, in a manuscript letter to Gibbs (Bureau of
Ethnology), states that "Coos in the Rogue River dialect is said to
mean lake, lagoon or iidand bay."'
The "Kaus or Kwokv/oo.s" tribe is merely mentioned by Hale as
living on a river of the same name t)etween the Umqua anil the Cla-
nu't.' Lewis and Clarke' also mention them in the same location as
the Cookkoo-oose. The tribe was referred to also uniler the name
Kaus by Latham,' who did not attenii)t its classification, having in
fact no material for the purpose.
Mr. (iatschet, as above, distinguishes the language as forming a
distinct stock. It is spoken on the coa.st of middle Oregon, on Coos
River and Bay, and at the mouth of Co(iuille River, Oregon.
f ;
Anasitch.
Melukitz.
Mulluk or Lower Co(iuille.
Nacu ? .
Popiihitian. — Most of the survivors of this family are gathered
upon the Siletz Reservation, Oregon, but their nnmber can not be
stated as the agency returns are not given by tribes.
lctcamiaN family.
= Lutuaini, Hale in U. S. Expl. Exp. , vi, 199, 589, 1840(heaawater8 Klamatli River and
lake). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Stu:. ll, pt. 1, c, 17,77, 1848 (follows Hale).
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 825, 18,50 (headwaters Claraet River). BerKhaus{l851),
Phy.sik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Hik: Lond., vi,82, 18.54.
Latham in Trans. Philolog. Sec. Lond., 74, 18.56. Latham,Opu8cula, :^00, 310, 18fl0.
Latham, EI. Comp. Phil., 407, 1863.
= Luturim, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind.Trihes.in, 403,18.53 (misprint for Lutuami;
base<l on Clamets langnage).
= Lutiiniani, Latham, OpiLscula, 341, 1860 (misprint for Lutuami).
: Tlamatl, Hale in U. S. Expl. Cxj). . vi, 318, 569. 1846 (alternative of Lutuami). Berg-
haus(lft51), Physik. Atlas, maj) 17, 18,53.
: Clamets, Hale in U. H. Expl. Exp. , vi, 218, 569, 1346 (alternative of Lutuami).
'U. 8. Expl. Exp.. 1846, vol. 6, p, 221.
'Allen E.I., 1814, vol. 2, p. US.
»Nat. Hist. Man, 1850, p. 325.
00
INDIAN MNuriSTIC KAMIMKS.
= Klitiiiatli,(lats<'lii'tiiiMaK. Am. lint., I*l(, INT7. OiiIscIkm in Kcnrli. Itid. MiHr..4:iO,
1HT7. (iatMclu't iti Am. Aiilii|.,Hl HI, IS^H (ncin'ial iTmiiikM ii|hiii family).
< Klaiimtli, Kcaiic, Ap]). Slaiifnnl'H Ccinii). (('(■iil.undSn. .\iii.). Itl<l,47."i. lH7H(iimM>-
Knipliic Kr<>»l> ratlitT tlian a liiiKiiiHlic family; iiirliiili-H, in aililitiori to tlit>
Klamath pr()|H>riir l.iitiiami, tin- VacniiM, MinIim-n, Copalm, SliantaH. Palaiks,
\Vliit<H(im, KiiiiMH, I'alncH'K. Lntotciis, WiH'jots, WiHlioHkH, Wallii'M, Toli'walis,
l'atawat'4, YiikftM, "and ollitTH iM'twcrh KW Kiver jiiid IliiiulNildl Hay." Tin-
IJHt tliiiM incliidt-H M-vi'ial distinct I'amilii'n). Haiicrnft. Nat. lijiri'H, III, r)(l.'i, (M>>,
ISM'.'tincludch l.utuanii <ir Klamath. ModcK' and ( 'ci|uili. tlic latter lioliiiiKinK to
ilii> ('o|N')iai> family).
= Klamalli Indiana of Noiithwt'H.'ern Oregon, Oatwlict In Com, N. A. Kth., ll,|>t.
I, .wxiii, 1HIK».
Doriviition; Fmiu ii Pit [liver wofd incHiiiiii,' " liiUc"
Tlio tfihcs of this t'liiiiily appuHr t'roiii tiiiif iiiumiiiorial to Imvfi
occii|)i('(l LitH(> iiiid U|>iM'r Kliimiitli Lukes. Kliiiimtli Marsh, uml
SpfiiKiit' Kivof, ()i'('p)ii. Sonio of llic Moihic Imvc botMi roiiioved to
tlu' Indiaii Territoiy, wliore 84 now residf; otlit-fs are in Sjiiague
River Valley.
Tht^ hingiiaKe is a hoinoKPiU'oiis one and. according to Mr. Gat-
schet who has niailo a sp<^eial study of it. has no roni dialeutH, tlio
two divisions of the family, Klamath aii<l Modoc, speaking an al-
most identical hiiignai^e.
Tlie Klamaths" own name is K-ukshikni. "■ Klamath Lake people."
The Modoc are termed by the Klamath MtHh)kiii, •'Southern peoph'."
TRinUH.
Klannith. Modoc.
Popitlutiou. — There were 7M> Klamath and ifodoc on the Khimaht
Reservation in 1880. Since then they liavt^ slightly decreased.
'
MARIPOSAN FA.MI1-V.
>Mari|>osa, liHtliam in Trans. I'liiloloy. .Sih. l.Kind.. S4. IH.'iK (CiK'oiKMins la!iKiia»;p,
Mari|'o«a t'onnty). hatliam.Opuwnla.ii'dl, 1H(1((. Latham. Kl. Comp. I'hilolo^cy.
41(1. IStta (OcH-oiKMiiiH (if MtMctHle River).
= ^o-kuts, Poyvcrs in C^ont. N. A. Kth.. in, :i(lit, IS7T. I'ovyell, il)id.,."i70 (yocaliu-
laries of Yo-knts, Wi'-ohi-kik, Tin din-nch, KIiik's liiyer.<'iH'onoon»<, Calaveras
Comity).
= Vocut, (JatHclict in Man. .\m. Hist., I'lH. IHT7 (miiilions Taches. ( 'hcvycnee.
AVatO()};a, ('hdiikchaiicii's, ('(M'onoons and othersi. (iatHchet in lieaih. Ind.
MiHc., 4;!;.', 1S77.
Derivation: A Spanish word meaning '• Initteidy." ai»plied to a
30unty in ("iilifornia and subsecinentiy taken for the family name.
Latham mentions the remnants of three distinct bands of the
Coconoon. eacii with its own language, in tin' north of Mariposa
County. These arc classed together nndei'the above name. Moi'e
recently the triiies speaking languages allied to the Coconfin iiuve
been treated of nnder tlit^ fiimily name Yokiit. As, however, tiie
stock was established by Latham on a soiiiul basis, his nanu' is here
restored.
MAIUI'OSAN KAMlf.Y.
(lEOOUAI'IIIC nlSTKIIICTION.
•1
Tlic tiMTitory of the MiiripoHuii laiiuly is (|iiitn irrct;«lttr in <>ut-
liuf. On till' iiortli it is l)iniU(it.Ml i>y tlu' Krcsiio Kiver iij) Id tlii'
point of itH juiictioti with the Hun Joaquin : tl»>nc»' hy a \\iw run-
nin,i>' to tho iiortliciLst (roriit«r of tin' Hiiliniin territory in Shm Benito
County, Californiii; on the west hy a line runnin)^ from Sun l-Si'iiito
to Mount Pinos. From the niiildle of tho weHtorn slioic of Tulare
Lake to the riil^i' at Mount Pinos on the sontli, tlie Mariposnn an-a
\H merely a nari'ow strip in ami alon^ 'he foot hills. ( >i'cup> iuK; one-
half of the western and all the southei'n shore of Tnlari' Lake, and
bounded on the north by a line runnin>^ from the southeast corner
of Tulare I^ake due east to the lirst great sjairof tliu Sierra Nevada
range is the territory of the intrusive Shoshoni. On the east the
secondary rauge of thu Siena Nevaila forms tiie Mariposau bound-
ary.
In adilition to the above a small strip of territory on the eastern
bank of the San Joa(|uin is occnpiecl by tho Cholovone division of
tlu> Mariposan faiiuly, botweon the Tuolumno and tlie point wheio
tile San Joaiiuin turns to the west before entering Suisun Bay.
TKUtKS.
Aya])al (Tule River).
Chainfmaini (lower King's River.)
Chukainnna (Scjuaw \alley).
Chnk'chansi (San Joaquin River above Millortoa).
Ohuuut fKaweah River at tho lake).
Coci)nrin' (Merced River).
Ititcha (Iving's River).
Kassovo (Day Creek).
Kau-i-a (Kaweah Rivei-; foothills).
Kiawetni (Tule liiverut Porlerville).
' Mayayu (Tule River, south fork).
Notoanaiti (on the lake).
Ochingita (Tule River).
Pitkachl (o.\tinct ; San Joaciuin River beh)W Millertou).
Pohallin Tiuloh (near Kern lake).
Sawakhtu (Tule Rivor. .south fork).
Tiiclii (Kingst(jn).
Telumni (Kawoali River below Visalia).
Tinlinneh (Fort Tejon).
Tisechu (upper King's Hi,').
AVichikik (King's River).
Wikcdiumiu (Kaweah River : foothills).
Wiksachi (upper Kaweah Valh-y).
Yukcd (Kaweah River plains).
Po/)(//(«//()().-— There are 14") of the Indians of this family now at-
tached to the Mission Agency, California.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
^ 14.0
1^ tii
2.0
1.8
1.25 1.4
III ''^
^
6" —
►
V]
v)
^3
%
?>'
It
>>
''V >
/J!
''W
'/
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
\
92
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
HOQUELUHNAN FAMILY.
^Tcho-ko-yem, Oibbs in Schoolcraft, lud. Tribes, iii, 431, 1853 (mentioned as a
band and dialect).
> Moqueluiune, Latliam in Truua. Philolog. .S<k;. Lond. , 81, 1856 (includeH Ilule's
Talatui, Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, Mumaltaclii, Mullateco, Apaugasi, La-
pappu, Siyante or Typoxi, Hawliaw'a band of Aplache8,San Rafael vocabulary,
Tshokoyem vobabulary, Cocouyein and Yonkiousme Paternosters, Olamentke
of KoHtrouiitonov, Patemosteni for Mission de Santa Olara and the Vallee de
loB Tulares of Mofras, Paternoster of the Langiie Ouiloco de la Mission de San
Francisco). Latham, Opuscula, 347, 1860. Latliam, KL Comp. Phil., 414, 1862
(same as above).
= Meewoc, Powers in Overland Monthly. 333, April, 1873 (general account of family
with allusions to language). Oatschet in Mag. Am. Hist, , 159, 1877 (gives
habitat and bands of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
= Mi- wok. Powers in Cent. N. A. Eth., iii, t;46, 1877 (nearly as above).
<Mut8un, Powell in Cont. N. A. Eth., ill, 585, 1877 (vocabs. of Mi-wok, Tuolumne,
Costano, Tcho-ko-yeni, Mutsun, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz, Chum-te'-ya, Kaweya,
San Raphael Mission, Talatui, Olamentke). (latschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157,
1877 (gives habitat and members of family). Oatschet, in Beach, Ind. Misc.,
480, 1877.
xRunsiens, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes
Olhoned, E^lenes, Santa Cruz, San Mfguel, Lopillamillos, Mipacmacs, Kulana-
po8, Yolos, Suisunes, Talluches, Chowclas, Waches, Talches, Poowells).
Derivation : From the river and hill of same name in Calaveras
County, California; according to Powers the Meewoc name for the
river is Wakalumitoh.
The Talatui mentioned by Hale ' aa on the Kassima (Cosumiies)
Rivor belong to the above family. Though this author clearly dis-
tinguished the language from any others with which he was ac-
quainted, he nowhere expressed the opinion that it is entitled to
family rank or gave it u family name. Talatui is mentioned as a
•tribe from which he obtained an incomplete vocabulary.
It was not until 185(> that the distinctness of the linguistic family
was fully set forth by Latham. Under the head of Moquelumne,
this author gathers several vocabularies representing different lan-
guages and dialects of the same stock. These are the Talatui of
Hale, the Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, the Sonoma dialects as repre-
sented by the Tshokoyem vocabularj", the Chocuyem and You-
kiousme paternosters, and the Olamentke of Kostromitonov in
BJier's Beitrage. He also i)laces here provisionally the paternosters
from the Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of
Mofras; also the language Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco.
The Costano containing the five tribes of the Mission of Dolores, viz.,
the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos of the coast, Romonans, Tulomos
and the Altahmos seemed to Latham to differ from the Moquelumnan
language. Concerning them he states " upon tlie whole, however, the
affinities seem to run in the direction of the languages of the next
' U. S. Expl. Exp., 1840, vol.fi. pp. flW), 0!J3.
MOQUKUTMNAN FAMILY.
93
group, espHcnally in that of the Rusleii. He adtls: "Nevertheless,
' for the present I place the Costano by itself, as a transitional form
of speech to the languages spoken north, east, and south of tlie Bay of
San Francisco." Recent investigation by Messrs. Curtin and Heu-
shaw have confirraed the soundness of Latham's views an .as stated
under head of the Costanoan family, the two groups of languages
are considered to be distinct.
OEOORAPHIC DISTHIBCTION.
The Moquelumnan family occupies the territory bounded on the
north by the Cosumne River, on the south by the Fresno River, on
the east by the Sierra Nevada, and on the west by the San Jompiiii
River, with the exception of a strip on the east bank occupied by
the Cholovone. A part of this family occupies also a territory
bounded on tlie south by San Francisco Bay and the western half of
San Pablo Bay; on the west by the Pacific Ocean from the Golden
Gate to Bodega Head; on the north by a line running from Bodega
Head to the Yukian territory not'thcast of Santa Rosa, and on the
east by a line running from the Yukian territory to the northern-
most x)oint of San Pablo Bay.
Miwok division:
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Awani.
Lopolatimne.
Seroushanine.
Chauchila,
Machemni.
Talatui.
Chumidok.
. Mokelumni.
Tamoleka.
Chumtiwa.
Newichumni.
Tumidok.
Chumuch.
Olowidok.
Tuinun.
Chumwit.
Olowit.
Walakumni.
Hettitoya.
Olowiya.
Yuloni.
Kani,
Sakaiakumni.
Olamentke division:
Bollanos.
Nicassias.
Sonomi.
Chokuyem.
Numpali.
Tamal.
Guinien.
Olamentke.
Tulare.
Likatuit.
Olurapali.
Utchium.
Population. — Comparatively few of the Indians of this family
survive, and these are mostly scattered in the mountains and away
from the routes of travel. As they were never gathered on reser-
vations, an accurate census has not been taken.
In the detached area north of San Francisco Bay, chiefly in Marin
County, formerly inhabited by the Indians of this family, almost
none remain. There are said to be none living about the mission of
San Rafael, and Mr. Henahaw, in 18H8, succeeded inlocatinsonly six
at Tomales Bay, whore, however, he obtained a very good vocabu-
lary from a woman.
94
i f 1 *
ni
INDIAN LINOITISTIO FAMILIES.
MUHKH()(iEAN FAMILY.
>MiiHkhofi^, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiii. Soc., II. 04, 30«. ias« (based
u])on MuskhogeeH, HitchitteeH, .SeniinuleH). Priclmrd. Phys. Hist. Mankind, v,
402, 1847 (includes MuskhogeeH, .Seniinoles, Hitchittees).
>MuHkhogies, Berghaua(1845),Pliysik. Atliw, map 17, 184«. Ibid., 1*53.
>Mu»cogef, Keane, App. Stanford's Coinp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 471, 1878 (in-
cludes Muscogees proper, ScminoleR, Choctaws, Chickasaws, Hitchittees, Coosa-
(lnB or CoosoH. Alibiunons, Apalndics).
=Maj)koki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend,!, 50, 1884 (general account of family: four
bninches, Maskoki, Apalachian. Alibamu, Chahta). Berghaus, Pliysik. Atlas,
map 73. 1887.
>Choctaw Muskhogee. Gallatin in Trnns. and Coll. Am. Antic). Soc., U, 111), t8!i0.
>Choeta-MuKkhog, (iailatin in Trans. Am. Eth. S(h'.. ll. pt. 1. xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin
in Schoolcraft, Ind.Trilies. ill. 401, 1«.-)3.
=Cliata-Muskoki. Kale in Am. Antii)., 108, April, 1883 (considered with reference to
migration).
>Chalita.s, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., ll. 100, 306, 1836 (or Choc-
taws).
>t;hahtah8, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 4ft3, 1847 (or Choktahs or Flat-
heads).
>Tscliahtas. Berghaus (1845), Physik.AtlaJi, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1862.
>Choctah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 387. IS.'SO (includes Choctahs, Muscogulges, Mus-
kohges). Latham in Trans. Phil. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuacula, 306,
1860.
>Mobilian, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 249, 1840.
>Flat-headB, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 403, 1847 (Chahtahs or Choktahs).
>C(xshattas, Latham. Nat. Hist. Man. 349. ia50 (not classified).
^Humas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man. 341 , IS-'iO (east of Mississippi above New Orleans).
Derivation: From the luirae of the principal trihe of the Creek
Confederacy.
In the Muskhogee family Gallatin includes the Muskhogees proper,
who lived on the Coo.sa and Tallapoosa Rivers; the Hitchittees, living
on the Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers; and the Semiuoles of the
peninsula of Florida. It was his opinion, formed by a comparison
of vocabularies, that tiie Choctaws and Chickasaws should also be
classed under this family. In fact, h(> called' the family Choctaw
Muskhogee. In deference, however, to established usage, the two
tribes were kept separate in his table and upon the colored map.
In 1848 he appears to be fully (convinced of tlie soundness of the view
doubtfully expressed in 18:3(5, and calls the family the Chocta- Musk-
hog.
.' OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. ,'
The area occupied by this family was very extensive. It may bo
described in a general way as extending from the Savannali River
and the Atlantic west to the Mississippi, and from the Gulf of Mexico
north to the Tennessee River. All of this territory was held by
Muskhogean tribes except the small areas occupied by the Yuchi,
Nii'htchi, and some small settlements of Shawni.
■On p. 119, ArchoBolugiu Americana.
POWKLUj
MUSKIIOGEAN-NATCIIESAN FAMIME8.
95
Upon the northeast Muskhogean limits are indeterminate. The
Creek claimed only to the Savannah River; but upon its lower
course the Yamasi are believed to have extended east of that river
in the sixteenth to the eighteenth century.' The territorial line be-
tween the Muskhogean family and the Catawba tribe in South Caro-
lina can only be conjectured.
It seems probable that the whole peninsula of Floi'ida was at one
time held by tribes of Timuquanan connection; but from 17(i8 to 1708,
when the Apalaclii were driven out, the tribes of northern Florida
also were forced away by the English. After that time the Semi-
nole and the Yamasi were the only Indians that held possession of
the Floridian peninsula.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Alibamu.
Apalaclii.
Chicasa.
Choctaw,
Creek or Maskoki jjroper.
Koastiti.
Seminole.
Yanuicraw.
Yamasi.
Population. — There is an Alibamu town on Deep Creek, Indian
Territory, an affluent of the Canadian, Indian Territory. Most of
the inhabitants are of this tribe. There are Alibamu about '^O miles
south of Alexandria, Louisiana, and over one hundred in Polk County,
Texas.
So far as known only three women of the Apalaclii survived in
1886, and they lived at the Alibamu town above referred to. Tiic
United States Census bulletin for 1890 gives the total number of jiu re-
blood Choctaw at 9,996, these being principally at Unicm Agency,
Indian Territory. Of the Chicasa there are 3,464 at the same
agency; Creek 9,291; Seminole 2,539; of the latter there are still
about 200 left in southern Florida.
There are four families of Koasdti, about twenty-five individuals,
near, the town of Shepherd, San Jacinto County, Texas. Of the
Yamasi none are known to survive.
NATCHx SAN FAMILY.
>Natche», Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiij. S<h;.. ii, 9.5, 306, 1836 (Natclies
only). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 408, 403. 1847.
>Nat8ches. Bergliaua (184.')), PhyHik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid.. 1853.
>Nat<.hez, Bancroft. Hist. U. S., 248, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Etli. .Soc., ii,
pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (Natchez only). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 340. IH.IO
(tends to include Taensos, Pauca^oulas, Colapissas, Biliixi in same family).
Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Trilies, in, 401, 18.53 (Natchez only). Keane. App.
Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and 80. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (suggests that it mi>y in-
clude the Utchees).
>Naktche, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, 1,84,1884. Gatschet in .Science. 414. April
29. 1887.
'(Jatscliet, Creek Mig. Legenil, 1884, vol. 1, |). 03.
96
INDIAN IJNOUiaTIC FAMILIES.
1 1 ;
■■' %
i ii
>Taen8a, Oatschet in Thp Nation. ."Wa, May 4. 1882. Oatuchet in Am. Antiq., iv,
388, 1883. Gatschet. Crwlt Mit?. I,.'g«nil, l. ;W. 1884. (latw-het in Science, 414.
April 2«, 1887 (TuenwMi only).
Tho Na'htclii, accordinjj to Gallatin, a residue of the well-known
nation of that namt'. came from the l)ank.s of the Mississippi, and
joined the (h'eek less than one hundred years ago.' The seashore
from Mobile to the Mississippi was tlien inhabited by several small
tribes, of whicii tho Na'htidii was the principal.
Before 1730 the tribe lived in the vicinity of Natchez. Miss., along
St. Catherine Creek. After their disi)ersi()n by the French in 1730
most of the remainder joined the Chicasa and afterwards the Upper
Creek. They are now in Creek and Cherokee Nations, Indian Ter-
ritory.
Tlie linguistic relations of the language spoken by the Taensa tribe
liave long l)een in doubt, and it is probable that they will ever
remain so. As no vocabulary or text of tliis language was known
to be in existence, the "'Qrammaire et vocabulaire de la langue
Taensa. avec textes traduits et commenti^s par J.-D. Haumont*^
Parisot. L. Adam," publishod in Paris in 1883, was received l)y
American linguistic students with peculiar interest. Upon the
strength of the linguistic material embodied in the above Mr. Gat-
schet (loc. cit.) was led to affirm the complete linguistic isolation of
the language.
Grave doubts of the authenticity of the grammar and vocabulary
have, however, more recently been brought forward." The text con-
tains internal evidences of the fraudulent character, if not of the
whole, at least of a large part of the material. So palpable and gross
are these tliat until the character of the whole can better be under-
stood by the inspection of the original manuscript, alleged to be in
Spanish, by a competent e.vpert it will l)e far .safer to reject both the
vocabulary and grammar. By so doing we are left without any
linguistic evideiuie wliatever of the relatioiis of the Taensa language.
D'Iberville, it is true, supplies us with the names of seven Taensa
towns which were given by a Taensa Indian who accompanied liini;
but mostof these, accordingto Mr. Gatschet. were given in the Chicasa
trade jargon or, as termed by tiie Fi'encrh, the "Mobilian tratle jar-
gon." which is at least a very natural su))position. Under these
circumstances we can. perhaps, do no better than rely upon the
statements of several of the old writers who ai>pear to be unanimous
in regarding the hiuguago of the Taensa aw of Na'htchi connection.
Du Pratz's statement to that effect is weakened from the fact tliat
the .statement also includes the Shetiraasha, the language of which
is known from a vocabulary tf) be totally distinct not only from
the Na'htchi but from any other. To supplement Du Pratz's testi-
mony, sucli as it is, we have the statements of M. de Montigny, the
'Trans. Am. Antiq. Hoc.. 1836. vol. 'i. p. »r>.
«UO. Briiiton in Vm. Aiiti(iuariaii. March. ISS,"), pp. 109-114.
i>l>WltLL.J
I'ALAIIIMIIAN FAMILY.
97
missionary wlio atTinned t!ie iiHinity of t\w Taensa language to that of
tlie Na'htchi, before lie had visited the latter in IfiOO, and of Father
Gravier, who also visited them. For the present, therefore, the
Taensa language is considered to be u branch of the Na'htchi.
The Taensa formerly dwelt upon the Mississippi, above and close
to the Na'htchi. Early in the history of the French settlements a
portion cf the Taensa, pressed upon by the Chicasa, fled and were
settled by the French upon Mobile Bay.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Nalitdii.
Taensa.
Population. — There still are four Na'htchi among the Creek in
Indian Territory and a number in the Cheroki Hills near the Mis-
souri border.
PALAIHNIHAN FAMILY.
= Paluilmili, Hale in U. S. Expl. Expd., vi, 218, .569, 18-16 (used in family sense).
= PaIaik, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., vi, 199, 218, Tm, 1840 (southeast of Lutuiinii in
Oregon), Oallatin in Trans. An>. Eth. Soc., Il, pt. 1, 18, 77. 1848. Liitliani, Nat.
Hist. Man., .SS-I, 1850 (southeast of Lutuami). Berghaus (I8r>,), Physik. Atlas,
map 17, 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. So^. Lond., vi, 83, 18r)4 (cites Hale's
vocab). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lend., 74, 18,56 (hus ShoNhoni affini-
ties). Latham. Opuscula, 310, 841, I860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 4(»7, 1862.
= Palainih, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., Il, pt. 1, c, 1848. (after Hale).
Berghaus (18.51). Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1H.52.
= Pulairih, Oallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Trilws, ill, 402, 18o3(obviou8 typographical
error ; quotes Hale's Palaiks).
= Pit River, Powers in Overland Monthly, 413, May, 1874 (three principal tribes :
Achomawes, Hamefcuttelies, Astakaywas or Astaky wich). Qutschet in Mag.
Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (gives habitat ; quotes Hale for tribes). Gatschet in Beach,
Ind. Misc., 439, 1877.
= A cho-m&'-wi. Powell in Cont. N. A. Eth., III. 601, 1877, vocabs. of A-cho-md-wi
and Lutuami). Powers in ibid., 367 (general account of tribes : A-cho-mA'-wi,
Hu-ma'-whi. Efe-ta-ke'-wach, Han-te'-wa, Chu-ma'-wa, A-tu-a'-mih, Il-ma'-wi).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am. ). 460, 47.5, 1878
(includes Palaiks).
<Sha8ta, Bancroft. Nat. Races, in, .56.5. 1882 (contains Palaik of present family).
Derivation : From the Klamath word plnikni, signifying "moun-
taineers'" or "uplanders" (Gatschet).
In two places ' Hale uses the terms Palailinih and Palaiks inter-
changeably, but inasmuch as on page .569, in his formal table of
linguistic families and languages, he calls the family Palailinih, this
is given preference over the shorter form of the name.
Though here classed as a di.stinct family, the status of the Pit
River dialects can not be ccnisidei-ed to be finally settled. Powers
speaks of the language as ''hopelessly consonantal, harsh, and ses-
quipedalian," ♦ * ♦ " utterly unliko the sweet and simple lan-
' U. S. Expl. Exixl., 1846, vol. «, pp. 199, 318.
7bth-
li(
98
INDIAN F.INOriSTH' KAMIMKS.
f^iiugoH of thu Sacrameutu." He adds that the pei'Hoiial pronouns
show it to be u true Digger Indian tongue. Kecent investigations
by Mr.Gatsfhet leail liim, liowever, to believe that ultimately it will
be found to bo linguiHtically related to the Sastean languages.
<»EOaRAI>HU! DIHTHIBUTION.
The family was located by Hale to the southeast of the Lutuami
(Klamath). They chiefly occupied the area drained by the Pit
River in extreme northeastern California. 8ome of the tribe were
removed to Round Valley Reservation, California.
I'HINCU'AI, TKIUKH.
Powers, who has made a special study of the tribe, recognizes the
following principal tribal divisions :'
Achoma'wi. Estake'wach. IlmA'wi.
Atua'mih. Hante'wa. Pakaraalli?
Chuma'wa. Huma'whi.
PIMAN FAMILY.
=Piiiia, Latham, Nat. Hwt. Man, 898, IS.'iO
uates, viz, Pima proper, Opnta, Eutleve).
18.56 (Pima pro|)er). Lathuin in Trans.
*'inia proper, 0|iata, Eudevp, Pn|)ii>;on).
• •. Comp. Phil., 427, 18fla (inilmles
jequi, Hiaqui, Tiibar, Tarahumara, C
1877 (includes Pima, Nevonie, Pupago).
(defines area and gives habitat).
(cites three languages from the Mithri-
Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., ni, pt. :i, 55,
Philolog. Soc, Lond., 93, 185« (contains
Latham, 0|niscula, 8.56, I860. Latham,
Pima proper, 0]>ata, Eudeve, Papago,
"ora). Gatschet in Mag. Am, Hist., 1.56,
GatHchtit in Beach, Ind. Misc., 439, 1877
Latham used the term Pima in 1850, citing under it three dialects
or languages. Subsequently, in 185(i, he used the same term for one
of the five divisions into which he separates the languages of Sonora
and Sinaloa.
The same year Turner gave a brief account of Pima as a distinct
language, his remarks applying mainly to Pima proper of the
Gila River, Arizona. This tribe had been visited by Emory and
Johnston and also described by Bartlett. Turner refers to a short
vocabulary in the Mithridates, another of Dr. Coulter's in Royal
Geological Society Journal, vol. xi, 1841, and a third by Parry in
Schoolcraft. Indian Tribes, vol. iii, 185;}. The short vocabu;i>ry he
himself published was collected by Lieut. Whipple.
Only a small portion of the territory occupied by this family is
included witliin the United States, the greater portion being in Mexico
where it extends to the Gulf of California. The family is repre-
sented in the United States by three tribes, Pima alta, Sol)aipuri, and
Papago. Tlie former have lived for at least two centuries with the
' Cont. N. A. Eth. vol. 8, p. a«7.
' (
POWCU,.]
PIMAN-I'UJIJNAN FAMILIKH.
jty
Maricopa on the Oila River about 160 miles from tlie moutli. Tlio
Sobaiimrioctni|)ie(l tlm Santa Cruz and San Pedro RiverH.tiibuturioH
of tlieOila, Iiut are ao longer known Tlie Papago territory is much
more extensive ami extends to tlie south across the border. In
recent times the two tribes have been separated, but the Pima ter-
ritory as siiown upon the map was formerly continuous to the Qila
River.
According to Buschmann, Gatschet, Brinton, and others the Pima
language is a northern branch of the Nahuatl, but this relationship
has yet to be demonstrated. '
Northern group:
Opata.
Southern group:
Cahita.
Cora.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Papago. Pima.
Tarahumara. Tepeguana.
Population. — Of the above tribes the Pima and Papago only are
Avithiii our boundaries. Their numbers under the Pima Agency,
Arizona," are Pima, 4,404; Papago, 5,163.
PUJUNAN PAMILV.
>Pujuni, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soe. Lond,, 80, 185C (contains PujunI,
Secuinne, Tsamak of Hale, Cushua of Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 346,
1860.
>Meidoo8, Powers in Overland Monthly, 420, May, 1874.
=Meidoo, Oatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 1.59, 1877 (gives habitat and tribes). Oatschet
in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
>Mai'-du, Powers inCont. N. A. Eth., 111,382, 1877 (same as Mai'-deh; general ac-
count of; names the tribes). Powell, ibid. , 586 (vocabs. of Kon'-kau, Hol-o'-Iu-pai,
Na'-kum, Ni -shi-nam, " Digger," Cushna, Nishinam, Yuba or Nevada, Punjuni,
Sekumne, Tsamak).
>Nee8henams, Powers in Overland Monthly, 21, Jan., 1874 (considers this tribe
doubtfully distinct from Meidoo family).
>Ni-shi-nam, Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth., ill, 313, 1877 (distinguishes them from
Maidu family).
XSacramento Valley, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878
(Ochecumne, Chupumne, Secumne, Cosumne, Sololumne, Puzlumne, Yasumne,
etc, ; " altogether about 26 tribes").
The following tribes were placed in this group by Latham: Pujuni,
Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, and the Cushna of Schoolcraft. The
name adopted for the family is the name of a tribe given by Hale.'
This was one of the two races into which, upon the informal ; ~ii of
Captain Sutter as derived by Mr. Dana, all the Sacramento tribes
' Buschmann, Die Pima-Sprache und die Sprache der Koloschen, pp. 321-432.
" According to the U. S. Census Bulletin for 1890.
»U. S. Expl. Exp., vi, p. 631.
100
INIXAN MNOt'lHTIC KA.MILIKH.
woro Iwliovod to iHMlividtxl. "Tlumo riicoH roHoinltlcd oiu> nnotlicr
in every roMpoct but. laiiKuivKo."
HiiIn^civt'HHhort vociihiilarioHof thoPujinii, Hokumiu\ audTHaiimk.
Hal« dill not apparently coUHidor the ovideucu an a suflicient liasin
for a family, but apparently prt>forred to leave itH8tatiiH to be Mettled
Inter.
IIKOOKAPinr niHTRIBUTION.
The tribeH of this family have been rar«*fully studied by Powers,
to whom we are indebted for most all wt* know of their distribution.
They oiHMipied the eastern bank of the Sacramento in California, be-
giuniiiK some 80 or 100 miles from its mouth, and extended north-
ward to within a short distance of Pit River, where they met the
tribes of the Palaihnihan family. Upon the eant tliey readied nearly
to tlie l)or(ler of the State, the Palaihnihan, ShoBhonean, and
Washoaii families hemming them in in this direction.
!
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Bayu.
Kn'lmeh.
Tfshum.
Boka.
Kulomum.
Toiimtcha
Eskin.
Kwat()a.
Tosikoyo.
H«51to.
Nakum.
Toto.
Hoak.
011a.
Ustdma.
Hoankut.
Otaki.
Waimnuii
Hololiii)ai.
Paupakun.
Wima.
Kolonia.
Pusiina.
Yuba.
Koukau.
Taitchida.
QUOKATEAN FAMILY.
>Qiiornteiu, Oibbs in Schoolcnift. Iml.TrilK's. m, 423, IMS (proposed as a proper
name of funiily " hIiouIiI it Ik- held one").
>Eh-nek, Oiblw in Sthookraft, Inil. Tribes, ui, 433, 185a (given as name of a Iwiul
only: but suggestH Quorateiu as a proper family name).
>Ehnik, Latham in TranH. Philolog. Soc. Lond..76, 18.56 (south of Hhasti and Lu-
tuami areas). Latham, Opuscula. ,343, 1860.
=:Cahroc's, Powers in Overland Montlily, ^38, April, 1873 (on Klamath and Suliiioii
Rivers).
=Cahrok, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc.. 438, 1877.
=Ka-rok,Power8inCont.N. A.Eth., m, 19, 1877. Powell in ibid., 447, 1877(vocabu-
laries of Ka'-rok, Arra-Arra, Peh'-tsik, Eh-nek).
<Klttmnth, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am. ), 475, 1878(cited as
including CahviK's).
Derivation: Name of a band at mouth of Salmon River, Cali-
fornia. Ktymohjgy unknown.
This family name is eciuivalent to the Cahroc or Karok of Powers
and later authorities.
In 18.").'}, as above cited, Oil)lis <,'ives Eh-nek as the titular hendintf
/)f his paragrai)hs upon the language of this family, with the remark
QiroUATKAN-SAMNAN KAMIMKS.
101
that it iH "Tho iiaiiin of n hiiiid iit the iiKHilli of the Siilnioii, or
Quomtem rivor." He lulds tliiit "ThiH Uttor iiunin nmy |M'rlwipH be
coiiNidorod iw proper to K'Vf to i\w family, slioiild it Ixi iiold oiio."
He dctliiicH tiio territory orciipicd liy tlio riiniiiy hh follows: " Tlin
liuiKUiijfo ri«aclit<s from Bliitf crot'k, tlio iii/por lioiiiidiiry of tlio
Polilik, toiiboiit Clt'iir crock, tiiirty or forty niilcH iibovc the HiUinon;
vivryinjf, however, Hoiiicwhat from point to point."
Tho prcHentation of tho name Quoratttm, rh above, HoeniH Hutll-
ciently formal, and it is thonifore accepted for the group first indi-
cated by Oiblm.
In IH/SO Latham renamed tho family Ehnik, after the principal
band, locatii.K tho tribe, or rather the hvnKuaKe, south of theShasti
and Lutuami areas.
(IKOORAPHIO IHHTKIBUTION,
The KW')K'''*P'i'*' limits of tho family are somewhat indeterminate,
though the main area occupied by the tribes is well known. The
tribes (jccupyl)oth banks of tlie lower Klamath frc»m arango of hills
a littlo above Hapi)y Camp to the jumition of tho Trinity, and the
Salmon River from its mouth to its sources. On the north, Quoratean
tribes extended to the, Athapascan territory near the Oregon line.
1
Eh nek.
TRIBES.
Karok.
Pehtsik.
Population. — According to a careful ftstimato mado by Mr. Curtin
in the region in 1889, tho Indians of this family number about 000.
SAIJNAN FAMILY.
<Salina«, Latham in Trana. PhiloloK. Soc. L<>ii<l.,N5,1856(inclu(leHGiuloc<>, RuHlen,
Soledad of Mofrax, Enlen, Carinel, Han Antoniu, San Miguel). Latham, OpuHoula,
.3.50, 1860.
> San Antimio, Powell in Cont. N. A. Eth., ni, 5(IH, 1877 (vocabulary of; not given
as a family, but kept by itxelf).
< .Santa Barbara, UatHchet in Mag. Am. Hist., li')7, 1877 (cited here as containing
San Antonio). Oatschet in U. S. Geog. Surv. W. lOOtli M., vii, 419, 1879 (con-
tains San Antonio, San Miguel).
X Runaiens, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 470, 1878 (San
Miguel of Ilia group belongs here).
Derivation: From river of same name.
The language formei-ly spoken at the Missions of San Antonio and
San Miguel in Monterey County, California, have long occupied a
doubtful position. By some they have been considered distinct, not
only from each other, but from all other languages. Others have
hold that they represent distinct dialects of the Chumashati (Santa
Barbara) group of languages. Vocabularies colle(!ted in 1884 by Mr.
Heusliaw show clearly that the two are closely connected dialects and
that they are in no wise related to any other family.
f' ■
102
INDIAN UNoriHTir KAMIMKH.
I-
TIk> Kfotip oHtdtiliHliixl l>y liathiuii uikIit tli<> iinme 8nliimH in a
hotcroKi'iu'ouM (iiio, r(>iitiiiiUM>< ro|»n'H»Mitiitivi'M i>( no ft-wtT timii four
(liHtiiu't fiiinilii'M. Oioloco, which lit' Htiitcs "inuy poHsihly bohdi^ to
thiH ^roup, iiotwithHtiiiuliii^ itH rt>r*>rt>iict> to tht* MiNHion of Niiii
FrauciHco," roally is (•oiiK''i"'i"i'' with tho vocuhiiliiricH HSHixiK'"! hy
Lnthain to t)ii> Mi'iiilocinaii family. Tlii' "Solfthid of MofiaH" lic-
loiigH io tilt* C'ostiiiioaii family mt>iitioiM>(l on |ihk*> .'I4S of tho sam*t
eHnay,aHalHo(hitli(»RiiMl(«n mnlCarmt'l. Of tlitithrt>(>ri'maininK formn
of H|i<H)('h, F^Hh'M, Han Antonio, ami San Mi^uol, tlui two latter arc ri>-
latfil ilialocts, ami l)i>lon^ within th«' iliaina^u of the Halinas Kiv)>r.
Tht> tonn Salinan In Ikmich applitMl to tlinm. loavinK tlic Kslon lan-
guaK" to \w proviiU'd with a namo.
I'oiiiildtion.—'Vlittyii^h tho San Antonio ami San MiK'it'I wcrt'iirol)-
nlily iifvor very |»o|)nlons trihcn, tlio Missions <if San Antonio and
San Mi^uol, when first ostablishod in tlu' yoara 1771 ami I77!», con-
taint'd rcsitoctivcly i,K)(» and I."JiM( Indimis. Donhtlcss the larKcr
iuuuIht of tlu'si' ronvcrts wcir K"'1"'''''<1 '" ♦ "' m'ar viciuify of the
two niisHJons and so liclonp'd to this family. In \Mi when Mr.
Henshaw visited the missions he was aide to learn of the existence of
only alioiit a do/.en Indians of this family, and not ull of these could
speak their own lanjfuaKe.
SAMSHAN KAMII.Y.
>Siilish, (Inllatin in TriiiiH. Am. Antii|, Sih. . n. i:i4, JMHI, tWIfl (or Flat HmkIh
onl\ ). t.4ithani in I'riH-. I'liiliil(i)r.H<N'. Ijonil., n.MI-.VI. INXMof l)u|Kiiifeau. SaitI
to !«• tlif OkaniiKiin of Tolniic).
X Snlixli, K<-aM)-. A|i|>.SIiinfiir<rHr'<)ni|).((Vnt. ami S>. Ani.).40O, 474.1S7M(in<'lu(lf)t
MathpailH. KuliH|N'liiiH. SkilmiiHli, Colvilli-H, ijiiarlpi. SiM)kaneM, PimiuouM*,
S<iaiatl|)i).
=^ HaliMli, BalK-ioft, >7at. Kaifs, m. .">((r>. (tlH, IHH'J.
> S<'liHli,(tallatin in Trans. .\ni. Ktli. S<k'. n. )>t. I. 77, 1H|M(v(h'h1i. of NniftHliawH).
Tulniii' and Daw.son, ('ohi|>. Vocalw,, (lit, 78, 1SH4 (vtK'almlarit's nf I.iJliHX'l nnil
KuUf'HiM'lni).
> JfliHti, Oallatin in HcliiNjIcraft. Ind. TrilH>H, ni, 402, IR'tll (oliviiiux iniK|irint fur
S«'liHli: followH Halt' as l<> trilx-s).
= Mt'liHli, (iatw')u't in MaK. Am. HiHt.. Iftft. 1H77 (Kives habitat ami triln's of family).
(iatsihft in H<'acli, Ind. Mine, 444, 1H77.
<.S«'liHli, Dull, afti'r(Jil)l)s. in Cont.N. .i. EHi., I,341,1877(includeH Yakania, wliiuli
iH Hhaluiptian).
> Tsiliaili-S»'lisli. Hill.' in U,S.K.v|.I.P:.x|),. VI, •,>(>.■). .'lit.'), r)H»,1Sl40(imludcHSlinsli\vai>s,
Seli::li or Flatlii>adH, HkitHuiNli, Piskwans, Sk\vali>, THJhaiiiHli. KawiOitsk,
Nsij'tNhawu.s). (Jailatin in Trans. Am. Kth.HiK'.. n. pt. l,c, 10, lH4H(aftt'rHalf).
Bcr^liaus (1H.51), Pliysik. Atlas, nia)) 17. 1 Soli, nu.sclimann, Hpuron dcr aztok.
Hpraclu'.fTiH-flBl. 1H.V,I. I,Htliani, KLCoinp. Phil., :!!«», |H((u>(coiitainMShuHhwapor
Atna Proix'r, Kuttclsix'lin or I'l-nd d'OreilU's. St'lisli,S|)okan.()kanaKan.Skit!<u-
isli. PJHkwaus. NuNdiilum, Kawitchoii, ('atliltu<i'ou, Hkvvali, Cliccliili, Kwainll,
Kwcnaiwtl, Nsit'tshawiis, nilltx'hula).
> AtnalLs. (iailatin in Trans. Am. Antii|. S<m-., ll. 184. la^.HOfl. 18:<n(on Fraser River).
Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v.4-,'7, 1847 (on Frast-r River).
HAt.lrtilAN KAMir.Y.
10.1
>Attm, iMlinm in Trann. PhiloliiK.HiM'. L<mil., 71. latfl (Tiilhiilll HplUhnf Hiilc iiikI
Oiilliitliil.
XNiHitka'('iiliiMiliiiiM.M4'i>iili'r in .Imii'. Kiiy.di'iiK.Sui . I,i)iiil.. XI. 'J'.' I, |N|| lincliiili'H.
HiiiiiiiK c)tlii'rH. l<llli><'liiHilu. Kikwiti'li4'M, NiKMiliiliiin, Hi|uallyuiiilNli i>f pri'svnt
fuinilyl.
X IiiHuliir. H<'i>iili'r, ililil.. (Nitiiii' UN NiNitkii-Ciiliiinliiitii fiiiiillvl.
X Hlmlmptun, St'iiiilcr. iliiil., 'J'.i.'idm^liiilt'H (>kuniiKi>» "' tliiN family).
X S<)iillirrn,N<'(iiili>i'. iliiil., 'i'i\ (huiiix lut NiNitka-t 'iiliiiiiliiaii faiiiily).
> KilliThiHilu. I<iilliiiiii iii.Iiiiir. Ktli.H4M'. I<i>iiil., I. I.Vt, IHIN (aMHixnit Krii>ii(lly V'illaKP
1)1' Mi'Ki'ii/.ii' licri'l. Ijitlmiii. OiiiiHciila. 'MK tKn<)(Kivt'N Toliiiic'it viN'iiliuliiryi.
> HilliH'liiila. liiktiiaiii, Nut. tliHi. .Man,:l*i<l, IH.*)()(iiii>titliiil'.Saliii<iii Uivt'ii. Uitliaiii in
TraiiM. I'liiliiloK.HiN'. l/>iiil..7'J. IH.VI (Haiiit'l. Uttliaiii. OjiiiM'tila. ICIII. IN(M).
> i)«>llai'iHihi. Kani'i'iirt, Nat. Kai'cH, ill, nHI. *t07. INHj iltt'llaccHilii.i nnly: H|H'i'iiiii>ii
v(M'almlury |.
>Uilli<K>ia. Tolinif ami Dawrion.l'oinp. V(M-alM.,63, tHNt (viK'ab. of N'(H)tlililkiMiinlii.
>Bll<'hiila. IVias in IVIi<rnmiiii'H MittfiliiiiKi-n. IMO, tNM7 (lUfntioiiH HAtwi, Nm<>l,
Nncliiilkin/, Talcniiui.
xNiuiHH. Oallatin in Tranr*. Am. Ktli. Soc ii, |il. I.e. 77, IH4H (citcil aH InclniliiiK
HilltH'linla).
> TMihaili, Uitliam. Nat. Hixt. Man. :U0, \H,V) (ohifHy lower |uirt of FriuuT Kivi'i- and
iM'twtHin tliatanil tlu'CoUiinbia: ini-lnili'HHIinHwap. SaliHli, .SkltNniHh, I'iHkwaiH.
Kawltclutii, Hkwali, (.'luH:lu-<>li, Kowrllts. NiHMclalum, NHit'tHliawnHl.
xWakjiNli, Latham, Nat. liiHt. .Man. :l()l. IH.'iO iriti-tl an inclniliiiK KlallcinH).
xSlumhwaiM. Kcanc. .\p|i. HtanfordV t'omp. (Cent, anil S<i. Am.), 4(MI, 474, IHTH
(ipiott'il art incluilinK Hlu'whapinni'li anil C)kanaKanH).
xIIyilaliH, Ki'uni', ili'.il.,47:l (iiirhiilt*s Ht'llariHilaH of prew-iit family).
xNiK>tkaliM. Ki-aiic. iliiil.. 47:) (incliuli-H Koniux, KowitcliauH, KlallnniH. Kwantlums.
Tci'tH of prfNt-nt family).
xNcMitka, Dancroft, Nat. liaccN. ill. .'illl. \HH'i (i-oiitaiiiH th(< followiiiK HaliHiian trilH-H:
Cowiclilu, Sukt>. (luniiix, NiMiNilaliim. WirkinniniHii. HonKliic. Hani'tcli. Kwan-
tluin, TtH!t, Nanaimo, NcwrhcmuHH. SliimialuniKi, NiMikMtk, SaiiiiHli. .Skagit,'
SnohomiHli, i'lallam. ToanhixK'li).
<PuK»'t Souiiil ({roup. Ki'unc. .App. Stanford'H Comp. (Cent, and Ho. .\ni.), 474,
1H7H (conipriwH Nooknalis, Lummi. Haminli, NkaxitH, NiHipmlly, NeewaniiHli,
BalimainiHli, SnuhoniiHli, Hk<-ewamiHli. HipianainiHli. KlalhiinH, I'laxHetM, Che-
hnliN, Cowlitx, I'iHtohin. ('hinakum:all hut the liiHt iM-inK HaliHhan).
> Flatheadi*, Keane, ihid.. 474. 1H7H {Huini' an liin Haliwh alxivci.
>KawitHhin. Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vin'alw., 39, 1884 (vooabB. of Song is and
Kwantlin Hept and KowiniKik or TIathool).
>Qauit.Hcliin. RoitH in Petermann'M MitteilnnKi'ii, i:)l, |8H7.
>NiMkwulli, Tolmie and DawHon, Comp. Vm'ahs.. 50. 121, 1884 (or .SkwulliamiHli
vix'almlary of HinaliomiHli).
Tlie extent of the Salish or Flatlicad t'lunily Wfis unkuowu to (Jal-
Intiu, an indeed iippeiirs to liavc been the exactt loeality of the tribe
of wliich ho K'ves an anonyinons vocalinlary from th(> Dnponceaii
colU^ction. Tile tribe is stated to liave resided upon on(( of tlie
brandies of tiie Colnmbia River. " wiiieii innst be eitlier tlio most
southern branch of Chirke's River or the mo.st northern braneli of
Lewis's River." The former snpposititm was correct. As employed
by Gallatin the family eml)raced only a single tribe, the Flathead
tribe i)roper. The Atnah, a Salishan tribe, were considered by
Gallatin to be distinct, and the name would be eligible as the family
I
104
INDIAN MNHI'ISTK; kamii.iks.
name ; preforence, however, is given lo Halisli. Tlie few words from
tin* Friendly Village near the sources of tlie Salmon River given by
Gallatin in Arthtuologia Americana, ii, 183(5. j)p. 1,5. :i()0, belong under
this family.
OK-MmvPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
Since Gallatl.i's time, through the labors of Riggs, Hale, Tolmie,
Daw.son, Boas, and others, our knowledge of tlie territorial limits
of this linguistic family has been greatly extended. The most
Houthern outpost of the family, the Tillamook and Nestucca, were
established on the coast of Oregon, about 50 miles to the south of
the Columbia, where they were quite separated from their kindred
to the north by the Chinookan tribes. Beginning on the north side
of Shoalwater Bay, Salishan tribes held the entire northwestern ))art
of Washington, including the whole of the Puget Sound region,
except only the Macaw tarritory about Cape Flattery, and two in-
significant spots, one near Port Townsend, the other on the Pncific
coast to the south of Cape Flattery, which were occupied by Chi-
makuan tribes. East,, vn Vancouver Island to about midway of its
length was also held by Salishan tribes, while the great bulk of their
territory lay on the mainland opp(j ite and included much of the
tipper Columbia. On the south they were hemmed in mainly by the
Shahaptiau tribes. Upon the east Salishan tribes dwelt to a little
beyond the Arrow Lakes and tlioir feeder, one of the e.xtreme north
f(Mks of the Columbia. Upon the southeast Salishan tribes extended
into Montana, includ ng the upper drainage of the Columbia. They
were met here in 1804 ])y Lewis and Clarke. On the northeast Salish
territory extended to about the fifty-third parallel. In Hie north-
west it did not reach the Chilcat River.
Within the territory thus indicated there is considerable diversity
of customs and a greater diversity of language. The language is
split into a great number of dialects, many of which are doubtless
mutually unintelligible.
The relationship of this family to the Wakashan is a very inter-
esting problem. Evidences of radical atfinity have been discovered
by Boas and Gatschet, and the canful study of their nature and
extent now being prosecuted by the former may result in the union
of the two, though uniil recently they have been coni;idered (luite
distinct.
Atnah.
Bellacoola.
Chehalis.
Clallam.
Colville.
Comux.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Copalis.
Cowichin.
Cowlitz.
Dwamish.
Kwantlen.
Lummi.
Met'how.
Naiiaimo.
Nanoos.
Neiialim.
Nespelum.
Nicoutamuch.
IMWILL.I
SAMSHAN-SASTEAN FAMILIES
PRINCIPAL TRIBES— roiitinuetl.
106
Nisqualli.
Nnksalik.
Okinagan.
Pond fl'Oreilles.
Pentlatc.
Pisquow.
Puyallup.
Quaitso.
Quenixit.
Queptlmamish.
Sacuniehu.
Sahewamish.
Salish.
Saiuamish.
Sainish.
Sanetch.
Sans Puell.
Sat sop.
Sawainish.
St'kainisli.
SlioinainiHli.
Sliooswap.
ShotleniamiHli.
Skaj,'it.
Skilnvamisli.
Skitstiisli.
iSkokoniish.
SkopamiHli.
Skti'hlmisli.
SmulkamiHh.
Siiohomisli.
Sn lalmi.
SiH'Lt;.
Songisli.
Spokan.
Squawinisht.
Scpiaxon.
Siiuonainisli.
StohtHasainish.
Stillacum.
Suraass.
SiKiuamisli.
Swinamish.
Tait.
Tillamook.
Twana.
Popidafiou. — The total Salish population of British Colnmbia is
12,3^/), inclusive of the Bella<!oola, who number, Avith the Hailtzuk,
2,500, and those in the listof unclassified, who number 8,522, distrib-
uted as follows:
Under the Fraser River Agency, 4,98(i; Kamloops Agency, 2,679;
Cowichan Agency, 1,W52; Olcanagan Agency, 042; Williams Lake
Agency, 1,918; Kootenay Agency, 48.
Most of the Salish in the United States are on reservations. They
number about 5,50(), including a dozen small tribes upon the Yakama
Reservation, whicli have been consolidated with the Clickatat (Slia-
haptian) tlirough intermarriage. The Sali.sh of tlie United States
are distributed as follows (Indian Affairs Report, 1889, and U. S. Cen-
sus Bulletin, 1890):
Cplvllle Agency, Washington, CcBur d' Alene, 422; Lower Spokane,
417; Lake, :««; Colville, 247; Okinagan, 374; Nespilem, 67; San
Pueblo (Sans Puell), 300; Calispel, 200; Upper Spokane, 170.
Puyallup Agency, Washington, Quaitso, 82; Quinaielt (Queniut),
101; Humptulip, 19; Puyallup, 5(J3; Chehalis, 136; Nisqually, 94;
Squaxon, CO; Clallam, 351; Skokomish, ]91; Oyliut, Hoquiam, Mon-
tesaiio, and Satsup, 29.
Tulalip Agency, Washington, Snohomish, 443; Madison, J44;
Muckleshoot, 103; Swinomisli, 227; Lumrai, 295.
Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon, Tillamook, 5.
SASTRAN FA.MILY.
= .Sa8te, Hale inU.S.Expl.Exp., vi,21f(.r)0«. 184«. OallntininTrans. Am. Etli.Sw.,
II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848. Beixliaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Buscliiuann,
Spuren iler aztek. Sprachc, 'y'i. 1859.
106
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMIL1K8.
— Shasty, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., vi, Jls, 1«40(— Saute). Buschmann, Spuren der
azti'k. Sprat'he, 572. WiO (-^Saste).
^Shiusties, Hale in U.S.Expl. Exp., vi. l»i», rm), lS46(=SaHtf). Ber^jliauH (IH,-)!),
Pliysik. Atliui, luap 17, IH.ia.
= Slut.sti,Latlmni, Nat. Hist, Man, 325, 1 850 (south west of Lutiunii). Lntiianiin Prm-.
PhiloIoK. Stx-., Lonil.,vi, 82, 1854. Uitlmm, ibid, 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula.
SU), 841, ISttU (alhed to Ixith Shoshoncan and Sliahaptian families). Latham,
EI.Comi>. Phil., 4(17, 1862.
==Shaate, Oibbs in Si-hoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 423, 185.S (mentions Watsa-he-wa,
a Si'ott's River band).
= Sasti. Gallatin in Sfhi«>lfraft, Ind. Trites, ill, 402. 1853 ( - Shasties).
= Sha-sta, Powell in f^ont. N. A. Eth., ill, 607, 1877. CJatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164,
1877. Oatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Shas-ti-ka, Powers in C'ont. N. A. Eth., Ill, 243. 1877.
= Shasta, (latschet in Ma«. Am. Hist., 104, 1877 (=-Sha8teeca8).
< Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, ill, .565, 1882 (includes Palaik, Watsahewah, Shasta).
< Klamath, Keane. App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (contains
Shajitas of present family).
Derivation : Tlie single tribe upon the language of which Hale
based his name was located by liiin to the. southwest of the Lutuami
or Klamath tribes. He calls the tribe indifferently Shasties or
Shasty, but tlie form applied by him to the family (see pp. v'lS, 5G'J)
is Saste, which accordingly is the one taken.
OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The former territory of the Sastean family is the region drained
hy the Klamath River and its tributaries from the western base of
the Cascade range to the point where the Klamatli Hows through the
ridge of hills east of Happy Camp, which forms the boundary be-
tween the Sastean and the Quorateau families. In addition to this
region of the Klamath, the Shasta extended over the Siskiyou range
northward as far as Ashland, Oregon.
SHAHAPTIAN FAMILY.
X Shahaptan, Scouler in Jour. Roy. UeoK- S<x;.. si. 225. 1841 (three trilies, Shahaptan
or Ncz-iHTces. Kliketat.Okanagan: the latter U'itiH Salisimn).
< Shahaptan. Prichard. Phys. Hist. Mankind, v. 428. 1847 (two classes. Nez-iHrces
pr(>j)er of mountains, and Polanches of plains: includes also Kliketat and
Okanu^an).
>Sahaptin.Halein U.S. Expl. Kxpd.,vi, 198,212,542, 18l6(ShahaptinorNez-iH'rces,
Wallawallas, Pelooses. Yakeinas. Klikatats). (iallatin in Trans. Am. Elh. Soc.,
II.pt. l,c. 14. 184H (follows Hale), ({allntin, il)id.,II, pt. I.e. 77. 1848 iNez-perces
only). Bert;hans(1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17,1852. Oallatin in St'h(H)lcratt,
Ind. Triljes, 111,402.1853 (Nez-per<es and Wallawallas). Dall, after (Jiblw. in
Cont. N. A. Eth., 1,241, 1877 (iii<ludes Taitinapani and Kliketat).
> Sai)tin. Prichard. Phys. Hist. .Mankind, v, 128. 1847 (or .Shahaptan).
<Sahaptin. Uitham. Nat. Hist. Man. 323, ls50 (includes Wallawallas. Kliketat,
Pro|>er Sahaptin or Nez-|H'rces, Peli'is, Yakenias, C'ayi'is ?). Latham in iians.
Philolog. .S(k;. Lond., 73, 1856 (includes Waiilatpu). Uuschmaun, Spuren der
SHAIIAl'TIAN I'AMII.Y.
m
aztek. Sprnclip. «14, Oir,. isr.o. I-iitlii«ii, Opuscula. !140, 1860 (as in 1856).
Latham. El. Cimip. Pliil. , 440. 1883 (vooabiiliiries .Sahaptiii, Walla walla, Kliketat).
Keano.App. Stanford's Coiiip. (Out. and So. Am.), 460,474, 1878 (includes Pa-
louse, Walla Wallas, Yakima^. Tairtl.is, Kliketats r)r Pshawanwappanis, Cayuse,
MoUale; the two last are Waiilatpuan).
= Sahaptin,Gatwchet in Maj?. Am. Hist., 16H, 1877 (detine.s habitat and i-numerates
tribes of). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443,1877. Bancroft. Nat. Races, .11,
."ie."!, 620, 1882.
> Shahaptani, Tohnie and Dawson, Conip. Vocabs. , 78, 1884 ( Wluil whaipuni tribe),
> Nez-jK-rces, Prichard,Phy8. Hist. Mankind, v, 428, 1847 (see Hhahaptan). Keane,
App. Stanford's Comp. (Gent, and So. Am. ), 474, 1878 (see his Sahaptin).
X Selish. Dall, after Giblw, in Cont. N. A. Eth., I, 241, 1877 (includes Yakania which
belong-s here).
Derivation: From a Solisli word of uriiiiiowu siguifiuauce.
Tlio Slialiaptau family of Scouler comprised three triVje.s — the Slia-
haptau or Nez Perces, tiie Kliketat, a .«cioiiof the Shaha^jtaii. dwell-
ing near Mount Ranier, and tlie Okanagaii. inliahiting the upper part
of Fraser River and its tributaries ; " these tribes were asserted to
speak dialects of the same language." Of the above tribes the Okin-
agan are now known to be Salishan.
The vocabularies given by Scouler were collected l)yTolmie. The
term " Sahaptin '' appears oiiGallatinV map of 18.')C, where itdoubtle.ss
refers only to the Nez Perci^ tribe proper, with respect to whose lin-
guistic affinities Gallatin apparently kumv nothing at the time. At
all events the name occurs nowhere iu his discussion of the linguistic
families.
OEOdUAl'Hlf UISTKlBUTIl ).N.
The tribes of this family occupied a large section of country along
the Columbia and its tril)utaries. Their western boundary was the
Cascade Mountains ; their westernmost bands, the Klikitat on the
north, the Tyigh and Warm Hprings on the soutii, enveloping for a
short distance the Chinook territory along the Columbia which ex-
tended to the Dalles. Shahaptian tribes extended alouL' the tribu-
taries of the Columbia for a considerable distauv.i, their northern
boundary being indicated by about the forty-sixth i)arallel, their
southern by about the forty-fourth. Their eastern extension was in-
terrupted by the Bitter Root Mountains.
FRINCIPAL TRIBES .\NI) I'OHl'LATIOS.
Chopunnish (Nez Perct'), 1,515 on Nez Perc^ Reservation, Idaho.
Klikitat, say one-half of ISItO natives, on Yakama Reservation,
Washington.
Paloos, Yakunia Reservation, number unknown.
Teuaino, G!i on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon.
Tyigh, 430 on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon.
Umatilla, 17!t on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
Walla Walla, 405 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
108
INDIAN MNUIISnc FA.MIL1K8.
SHOSHONKAN FAMILY.
>Sho8honees, Oalliitin in Tiiins. iind Coll. Am. Antiq. So<-.. ll, 120, 133, 306, IH;t6
(Shoshonw or Snake only). Hiile in U. S. R.xpl. Exp., vi, 31S, 1846 (Wihiniisht,
FtinoHlit, YutiiH, Hainpiclies, Conianclu's). Oallatinin TrauH. .Vni. Eth. .So<;.. ll,
pt. l,c. 77, IH48(a8 above)! (Jallatin, ibid., 18, IH48 (follows Hale; see Mow),
(Sallatin in Schoolcraft, Inil. TriliPH, ill, 403, 1853. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., ill,
pt. 3, 55, 71. 76, 1856 (treats only of Comanche, ClieiUBluievi.Cahuillo). Buw^h-
mann, Spiiren tier aztek. Sprache, 55',", 641>, 1850.
>Sho8honi, Hale in U.S. Rxpl. Exp., VI, U»l», 218, r>6», 1846 (Shoshoni, Wihinasht,
Panasht, Yuta«, Sampiches, CouiancheB). Latham in Trans. Philo!.)g. Soc.
Lend.. 73, 1856. I>athain. Opuscula. 340. 1860.
>Schoschonenu KamantHehen, Beixliaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid.,
18.52.
>Sho8hone8, f^richard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 439, 1847 (or Snakes; both sides
Rocky Mountains and souires of Miasouri).
= Sh68honi,OatschetinMHg. Am. Hist. 154, 1877. Gatacliet in Beach, Ind. Mist;., 426,
1877.
<8ho8hone, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460,477, 1878 (in-
cludes Washoes of a distinct family). Bancroft, Nat. Races, ui, 587, 661, 1882.
>8nake, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti.]. Soc., ii, 120, 133, 1836 (or Sho
shonees). Hale in U. S. Expl. Exp., vi, 218, 1846 (as under Slioshonee). Prich-
ard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v. 429, 1847 (as under Shoshonesj. Turner in Pac.
R. R. Rep..lll, pt. 3, 76, 18.56 (as under Shoshonees). Buschniann. Spuren der
aztek. Sprache, 5.52,649. 1859 (as under Shoshonees).
<Snake. Keane. App. Stsmford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 477, 1878 (contains
Washoes in addition to Shoshonean tribes proper).
>Kizh, Hale in U. S. Expl. Exp., vi, 569, 1846 (San (iabriel language only).
>Netela,Hale, ibid., 569, 1846 (San Juan Capestrano language).
>Pa<luca, Prichai-d,Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 415, 1847 (Cumanches, Kiawas, Utas).
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 310, 326, 1850. I^tham (18.53) in Proc. Philolog. Soc.
Lond..vi, 73,1854 (includes Wihina-st, Shoshoni, Uta). Liitham in Trans.
Philolog. Soc. Lond., 96, 1856. Latham. OpusicMila, 300. 360. 1860.
<Pa<luc«, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 346, 18.50 (Wihin.ast. Bonaks, Diggers, Utahs,
Sampiches, Shoshonis, Kiaways, Kaskaias?. Keneways?, Bald-heads, Cumanches,
Navahoes, Apaches, Carisos). IjHtham. El. Comp. Phil.. 440, 1862 (definesarea
of: cites vocabs. of Shoshoni. Wihinasht, Uta, Comanch, Piede o. Pa-uta,
Chemuhuevi, C'ahuillo, Kioway, the latter not b«'longing here).
>Cumanche8, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 402, 1853.
>Netela-Kij, Latham (18,53) in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., vi, 76, ia54 (composed of
Netela of Hale, San Juan Capistrano of Coulter. San Gabriel of Coulter, Kij of
Hale).
>Capi8traiio, Latham in Proc. Philolog. S<>c. Lond. , 85, 1 8.56 (includes Netela, of San
Luis Rey and San Juan Capistrano, the San Gabriel or Kij of San Gabriel and
San Fernando).
In his synop-sis of the Indian tribes' Oanatin's reference to this
great family i.s of the most v.'tsue and unsatisfactory sort. He speaks
of '• .some bands of Siiaiie Indians or Shoshonees, living on the waters
of the river Columbia" (j). J 20), which is almost the only allusion to
them to be found. The only real claim he po.ssesses to the autlior-
ship of the family name is to be found on page 300, where, in his list
'Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti<|. Soc., il, 1H36.
PUWELk.J
HUOSIIONKAN KAMIFiY.
109
of tribes and vocabularios, lio places ■•'Slioslionees" amoiiif liis otlier
faniilios, which is sufficient to show tliat lie regarded them as a dis-
tinct linguistic group. The vocabulary he possessed was by Hay.
Bu.sclunann, as above cited, classes the Shoslionean languages as a
northern branch of his Nahuatl or Azter family, but the evidence
presented for this connection is deemed to be insufficient.
(tEOORAPHIO DISTRIBUTION.
This important family occupied a large part of the great interior
basin of the United States. Upon the north Shoslionean tribes ex-
tended far into Oregou, meeting Shahaptian territory on about the
forty- fourth parallel or along the Blue Mountains. Upon the north-
east the eastern limits of the pristine habitat of the Shoslionean trilies
are unknown. The narrative of Lewis and Clarke' contains the ex-
plicit stateraeut that the Shoshoni bands encountered upon tlie Jef-
ferson River, whose summer liome was upon the head waters of the
Columbia, formerly lived within their own recollection in the plains
to the east of the Rocky Mountains, whence they were driven to
tlieir mountain retreats by the Miunetarce ( Atsina), who had obtained
firearms. Their former habitat thus given is indicated upon the
map, although the eastern limit is of course quite indeterminate. Very
likely much of the area occupied by the Atsina was formerly Slu)-
shonean territory. Later a division of the Bannock held the finest
portion of squthwestern Montana." whence apparently they were be-
ing pushed westward across the mountains by Blackfeot. ' Upon the
east the Tukuarika or Sheepeaters held tlu; Yellowstone Park coun-
try, where they were bordered by Siouan territory, while the Washaki
occupied .southwestern Wyoming. Ntarly the entire mountainous
part of Colorado was held by the several bands of the Ute, the east-
ern and southeastern parts of the State being lield respectively by
tlie Arapaho and Cheyenne ( Algonquian), and the Kaiowe (Kiowan).
To the southeast the Ute country included the northern drainage of
the San Juan, extending farther east a short distance into New Mexico.
The Comanche division of the family extended farther east than any
other. According to Crow tradition the Comanche formerly lived
northward in the Snake River region. Omaha tradition avers that
the Comanche were on the Middle Loup River, probably within the
present century. Bourgemont found a Comanche tribe on the upper
Kansas River in 17'H.* According to Pike the Comtanche territory
l)ordered the Kaiowe on the north, the former occupying the head
waters of the upper Red River, Arkansas, and Riu Grande.' How
'Aliened., Philadelphia, 1814, vol. 1, p. 418.
'L'. S. Ind. Atf., 186i», p. 289.
'Stevens in Pac. R. K. Rep., 1855, vol. 1, p. 329.
^I-ewis and Clarke, Allen ed., 1814, vol. 1, p. 'M.
'Pike, Expl. to sources of the Miss., app. pt, 'S, 16, 181(».
fi
t
i
t i
•J
iio
INDIAN UNUUISTIC KA.MILIKS.
far to tho southward Shoslione^n tribes extoiidoil at tliis early perio<l
is not known, tlioii^h the evidence tends to show tiiat they raided
far down into Texas to tiie territory they have occupitMl in more
recent years, viz, tiie extensive plains from the Rocky Mountains
eastward into Indian Territory and Texas to alunit [)7°. Upon the
south Shoshonean territtny was limiteii >j;ciu'rally by the Colorado
River. The Clienieliuevi lived on both bunks of the river between
the Mohave on the nortii and the Cuchan on the south, above and
below Bill Williams Fork.' Tiie Kwaiantikwoket also lived to the
east of the river iu Arizona about Navajo Mount -lin, while the Tu-
sayan (Moki) liad established their seven pueblos, including one
founded by people of Tailioan stock, to the east of the Colorado Chi-
quito. In the southwest Sho.shonean tribes had pushed across Cali-
fornia, occupyinu; a wide band of country to tiie Pacific. In their
extension nortiiward tliey had reached -is far as Tulare Lake, from
which territory apparently they had di8j.ossessed the Maripojan
tribes, leaving a small remnant of that linguistic family near Ft)rt
Tejon."
A little farther north they had crc^sseil the Sierras and occupied the
heads of San Joaquin and Kings Rivers. Northward they occupied
nearly the whole of Nevada, being limited on the west by the Sierra
Nevada. The entire southeastern part of Oregon was occupied by
tribes of Shoshoni extraction.
rUINCll'AL TRIBES AND POPULATION.
Bannock, oli on Fort Hall Reservation and 75 on the Lemhi Res-
ervation, Idaho.
Chemehuevi, about 20-i attaclied to tlie Colorado River Agency, Ari-
zona.
ComancliL", l,o!)Sonthe Kiowa, Comanche and Wichita Reserva-
tion, Indian Territory.
Gosiute, 230 in Utah at large.
Pai Ute, about 2,300 scattered in southeastern Califoi-nia and south-
western Nevatla.
Paviotso, about :},()()() scattered in western Nevada and southern
Oregon.
Saidyuka, U.'» under Klamath Agency.
Shoshoni, !»7!l under Fort Hall Agency and 3-t!) at the Lemhi
Agency.
Tobikliar, about 'i,'iOO, under the Mission Agency, California.
Tukuarika, or Sheepeaters, lOS at Lemhi Agency.
Tusayan (Moki ), 1.0!)() (census of 1890).
Uta, 2,839 distributed as follows : 985 under Southern Ute Agency.
Colorado; 1,021 on Ouray Re.serve,Utah; 833 on Uintah Reserve. Utah.
'IveH, Colorado River, 1801, p. r)4.
'Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth., 1877. vol. 8, p.
POWELL. I
SIOItAN KAMILV.
HIOUAN FAMILY.
Ill
xHioux, Uiillatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 131, :)00, WM rfor M\tea
included hbh te.xt In-low). Prichard, PIivh, HiHt. Mankind, v, 408, 1H47 (follows
Gallatin). (Jiillatln in Trans. Am. Etli. Hue, ll, pt. 1. xcix, 77. 1H4« (asin 18a«).
BerBhau8(lHt5), PliVHlk. Atliw, nuii> 17, 1848. Ihid., 18.53, (Jallatin inHcliool-
craft, Ind. TrilM-s, in, 402, 18."»i!. Bcr>?liaus, Pliywik. Atlas, map Ti, 1887.
>Hioux, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man.:<:):t, 18.50 (irdudes Wirit'l)aj;oeH, DakotOH, .Vssine-
boins, Ui)saroka, Maiulans, Minetnri. Osa^e). Latham in Trans. Philolog. S(ks.
Lond.,.')8, 18.50 (mere mention of family). Latham. Opusc.ula, (137, 1800. Latham,
El. Comp. Phil., 4r)8. 1863.
>t;atawbaH,OalIatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti(i.Boc.,Il, 87, 188B (Catawbasand
Woccons). Bancroft, Hist. U. S., III. 31."i, Pt map. 1840. Prichard, Phys. Hist,
Mankind, v, :199, 1847. (lallatin in Trans, Am. p:th.S(K-.. II, pt. 1. xcix, 77, 1848.
Keane. App. Stanford's Comp. (Ont. and Ho. Am. ), 400, 47:^, 187H.
>Catahl)as, Berghaus (I84.'<). Physik. Atlas, map 17 1848. Iliid., 18.52.
>Catawba, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 334, 18.50 ( Wo .'Coon are allied). Gallatin
in Sch(X)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 401, 18.53.
> Kataba, Gatschet in Am. Anti(iuarian, iv, 838, IW** ,. (Jatschet. Creek Mig. Legend,
I, 15, 1884. Gatschet in Science. 413, Apvil 29, 1887.
> Woccons, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Anti(j. Soc.,ll, 306, 1836 (numlM.>red
and given as a distinct family m table, but inconsistently noted in foot-note
where referred to as Catawban family.)
>Dahcota8, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., lli. 243, 1840.
>Dakotas, Hajden. Cont. Eth. and Phil. Miasouri Ind., 332, 1863 (treats of Dakotas,
Assinitoins, Crows, Minnitarees, Mandans, Omahas, lowas).
>Dacotah, Keane, App. to Stanford"- Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 470, 1878. (Tlie
following are the main divisions given: Isaunties. Sissetons, Yantons, Teetons,
Assiniboines, Winnebagos, Punkas, Omahas, Missouris, lowns. Oti)es, Kaws,
Quappas, Osages, Upsarocas, Minnetarees . )
> Dakota, Berghaus, Pliysik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
■
?; i
DerivatiDii: Ai-oiruptiouof the Algonkin word "nndowe-ssi-wug,
"the snake-like one'*." "the enemies" (Tnimhull).
Under the fainiiy Gallatin makes four subdivisions, viz, the
Winnebagos, tiie Sioux proper and the Assinil)oins, the Minnetare
group, and the O.sages and southern kindred tribes. Gallatin
speaks of tlie distribution of tlie family as follows: The Winneba-
goes have their principal seats on the Fox River of Lake Michigan
and towards the lieads of the Rock River of the Mississippi ; of the
Dahcotas proper, the Mendewahkantoan or " Gens du Lac " lived east
of the Mississippi from Prairie du Ciiien north to Spirit Lake. The
tliree others, Wahkpatoau, Wahkpakotoan and Sisitoans inhabit
the country between the Mississippi and the St. Peters, and that on
the southern tributaries of this river and on the headwaters of the
Red River of LakeWinnipek. The three western tribes, the Yank-
tons, the Yanktoauans and the Tetons wander between the Missis-
sippi and the Missouri, extending southerly to 4:3° of north latitude
and some distance west (jf the Mis.souri, between 413° and 47' of lati-
II
112
INDIAN LINOI'ISTIO KAMIiilKK.
i H
tilde. Till' '•Shyoimes" are iucliKlwl in the family but are niiirki'il
us (l()iil)tFiilly bcioiiKii'K here.
( twiiij? ti) the fact that "Sioux" ia a won! of ropioach and means
snake or enemy, the term has been disearded by many later writers
as a family designation, and "Dakota," which signifies friend or ally,
has been employed in its stead. The two words are, however, iiy no
means properly synonymous. The term ' ' Sioux " was used by Gallatin
in a compreliiMisive or family sense and was applied to all the tribiss
colleetively known to him to speak kindred dialeirts of a widespread
language. It is in this .sense only, as applied to the linguistic family,
that the term is here employed. The term '" Dahcota" (Dakota) was
correctly ajjplied i)y Gallatin to the Dakota tribes proper as distin-
guished from the other members of the linguistic family who are
not Dakotas in a tribal sense. The use of the term with this signiti-
oation should be jierpetuated.
It is only recently that a definite decision has been readied respect-
ing the relationship of the Catawba and Woccon, the latter an extinct
tribe known to liave been linguistically related to the Catawba.
Gallatin thought that he was able to discern some affinities of the
Catawbaii language with "Muskhogee and even with Choctaw,"
though these were not sufficient to induce him to class them together.
Mr. Gatschet was the first to call attention to the presence in the
Catawba language of a considerable numlicr of words liaving a
Siouan affinity.
Recently Mr. Dorsey has made a critical examination of all the
Catawba linguistic material available, which has been materially in-
creased by the labors of Mr. Gatschet, and the result seems to justify
its inclusion as one of the dialects of the widespread Siouan family.
OEOOKAPHlC DISTRIBUTION.
The pristine territory of this family was mainly in one body,
the only exceptions being the habitats of the Biloxi, the Tutelo, the
Catawba and Woccon.
Contrary to the popular opinion of the present day, the general
trend of Siouan migration has been westward. In comparatively
late prehistoric times, probably most of the Siouan tribes dwelt east
of the Mississippi River.
The main Siouan territory extended from about 53° north in the
Hudson Bay Company Territory, to about ;j3°, including a consider-
able part of the watershed of the Missouri River and that of the
Upper Mississippi. It was bounded on the northwest, north, north-
east, and for .some distance on the east by Algonquian territory.
South of 45° north the line ran eastward to Lake Michigan, as the
Green Bay region belonged to the Winnebago.'
'See treaty of Piiiirie ihi Cliien, 1835.
Il!i:
rnwcLL.]
HIOITAN FAMILY.
118
It oxtiMulod wostwiml from Lako Mii'liiKnii through Illinois, (iross-
ing tho MisHissippi Rivor at Prairio dn Cliiou. At thin point lu'gan
tho Algonquian territory (Sac, otc.) on the west side of tlic MisHis-
sippi, extending southward to tho Missouri, and crossing that river
it returned to the Mississippi at St. Louis. The Siouan tril)es claimed
all of the present States of Iowa and Missouri, except the parts occu-
pied by Algonquiau tribo.s. The dividing line between the two for a
short distance lielow St. Louis was tiie Mississippi River. The line
then ran west of Dunklin, New Madrid, and Pemiscot Counties, in
Missouri, and Mississippi County and those parts of Craighead and
Poinsett Counties, Arkansas, lying east of the St. Francis River.
Once more tho Mississipi)i became tho eastern boundary, but in this
case separating the Siouan from tho Musk) ^'oan territory. The
Quapaw or Aknnsa were tho most southerly tribe in the main Siouan
territory. In 107:V they were east of the Mississippi. Joutel (1(187)
located two of their villages on tho Arkansas and two on the Mi-ssis-
sippi one of tho latter being on tho oast bank, in our present State of
Mississippi, and the other being on tho opposite side, in Arkansas. Shea
says' that tho Kaskaskias were found by DeSoto in 1540 in latitude
3(i°, and that tlio Quapaw were higher uj) tho Mississi])pi. But wo
know that the southeast corner of Missouri and the northeast corner
of Arkansas, east of tho St. Francis River, belonged to Algonquiau
tribes. A study of the map of Arkansas shows reason for believ-
ing that there may have been a slight overlapping of liabitats, or a
sort of debatable ground. At any rate it seems advisable to cijmpro-
mise, and assign the Quapaw and Osage (Siouan tribes) all of Arkan-
sas up to about 30° north.
On tho southwest of the Siouan fatnily was the Southern Caddoan
group, the boundary extending from the west side of the Mississippi
River in Louisiana, nearly ojiposito Vicksburg, Mississippi, and run-
ning northwestwardly to tlio bend of Red River between Arkansas
and Louisiana ; thence nortliwest along the divide between the water-
sheds of the Arkansas and Red RivxTs. In the nortliwest corner of
Indian Territory the Osages came in contact with the Comanche
(Shoshonean), and near the western boundary of Kansas the Kiowa,
Cheyenne, and Arapaho (tho two latter being recent Algoniiuiau
intruders ?) barred tho westward march of the Kansa or Kaw.
The Pawnee group of the Caddoan family in western Nebraska
and northwestern Kansas separated the Ponka and Dakota on the
north from tho Kansa on the south, and the Omaha and other Siouan
tribes on the east from Kiowa and other tribes on the west. Tho
Omaha and cognate peoples o(;cupied in Nebraska the lower part of
the Platte River, most of the Elkhorn Valley, and the Ponka claimed
tho region watered by the Ni()l)rara in northern Nebraska.
llil
' Manjuette's Autograph Map.
7 ETH 8
' Disc, of Miss. Valley, p. 170, note.
I!
114
INntAN MNCJIMSTK; K.VMIMRs.
Tliorn MooinH t.ij l>»' siitH(!ii'nt (widoiu'o fi)r iWHimiiii^; td "rowH
(Siouiiii) the iiorfliwost corner of Nobrinkii (i. «., tliiU par' h of
th« KiowaiiHiiil(?iiil(lomi ImbitiitH) and tlu> soutliwcst part i>t Hniith
Dakota (not clainuMl by Clioyt'iiiio'), as woll nn tlio iiortluTii }tart of
Wyoming and t\w Houthcrn part of Moiitaiiiv, whore they met the
Slioshoiieaii Htock.'
The Biloxi habitat in I <»!»!» was on the Pascoj(oiUa river,' in the
HouthoiiHt corner of the pi'usent State of MiHHiHsi|>jii. The Biloxi huIi-
Hecpiently removed to Louisiana, wliere a few survivors w»»re found
by Mr. Gatsehet in IHHti.
Tlio Tuteh) habitat in Ki'M was in Brunswick County, Koutliern
Virginia, and it probal)ly included LiiuenburKli and Alcn-klenburg
Counties.' The Earl of Bellomont (l(;i»l») says" that the Sliateras
were "supposed to be the Toteros, on Bi>; Sandy River. Virginia,"
and Pownall. in his map of North America (17M), gives the Tottemy
(i. «., Big Sandy) River. Subsecpiently to l(i71 the Tutelo left Vir-
ginia and movtMl to North Carolina." They returned to Virginia
(with tlie Sapona), joined the Nottaway and Meheri'in, whom they
and the Tuscarora followed into Pennsylvania in the las*t century;
thenco they W(>nt to New York, where they joined the Six Nations.
with whom they removed to Grand River Reservation, Ontario, Can-
ada, after the Revolutionary war. The last full-blood Tutelo died
in 1H70. For the important discovery of the Siouan aflinity of the
Tutelo language we are indebted to Mr. Hale.
The Catawba lived on the river of tint same name on the northern
Ixmndary of South Carolina. Originally they were a powerful tribe,
tlie leading people of South Carolina, and jtrobably occupied a large
jiart of the Carolinas. The Woccon were widely sepaiated from
kinsmen living in North Caiolina in the fork of the Cotentnea and
Neuse Rivers.
The Wateree, living just below the Catawba, were very i»robably
of the same linguistic connection.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
I. Dnkotd.
(A) Santee: include Mde'-wa-ka"to"-wa" (Sjiirit Lake village,
Santee Reservation. Nebraska), and Wa-(|pe'-ku-te (Leaf
Shooters); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
' See Cheyenne treuty, in Inilian TreatieM, IHTii, p|». 134, r)4Hl-r)481».
■' Lewis unil Clarke, Truv.. Loiul.. 1807. p. Sri. I.ewin and Clarke, Expl., 1S74, vol
3, p. «9(). A. L. RiKK«. MS. letter to Uorsey, ISTtl cir 1S77. Dorsey, I'onka tradi-
tion: "The Black IIilln iK'lonx to the Crown," That the DakotHM were net tlieretill
thiH century see CorluiHier's Dakota Winter CountH, in 4th Rept. Bur. Eth..p. 130,
where it in aluo said that the Crow were the original ownerH of the Black Hills.
'Mar^ry, DtVouvertea, vol. 4, p. 105.
^Battsin Doc. Col. Hist. N. Y.. 1H.')8, vol. ;), p. 194. Harrison, MS. letter to Dor-
Hey. 1S8«.
»Doc. Col. Hist. N. Y., lS-)4. vol. 4. p. 4Hp.
'Lawsou, Hist. Carolina, 1714; reprint of IS60, p, 384.
PIIWICI.I.I
HIOl'AN KAMII.Y.
115
•I. MfAoM— Coiitinuod,
(B) SinHctou (Hi-Hi'-t(»"-wii"), on HJHsotoii RoHcrvatioii, South
Diikutu, uikI purt on Drvil's Luki* Ki>Hi>rviition, North
Diikotii.
(C) Walipoton ( VVH-<HM<'-t()''-WH", Wii-hpu-toii-wiin); Leal' vil-
laK«. HonicouHiHHotou Reservation; moHt on Dtivil'H Lake
RoNcrvation.
(D) Yankton (I-haftk'-to"-wa"), at Yankton Riwrvation. Sttiith
Dakota.
(E) Yanktonnais (l-liaflk'-to"wa"'-na); ilividtMl into lTpi>rr and
Liitiwr. Of tlio Uppvi' VtnikhiiiiKii.s, thi'rn artt sonin of
tho (Uif-hiail hmid (Pa'-lia-ksa K''"**) "" Devil's I^akc Res-
ervation. Vpfu r Vdulxliinitiiis, most are on Standing Rock
Res(M'vation, Noi'fli Dakota; Loirir y(iiil{liiini(tis,uu>Hi are
on Crow Creek Reservation, Sowtli Dakota, some are on
St.uiding Roek Reservation, and some on Fort Peck Reser-
vation, Montana.
(F) Toton (Ti-t()"-wa"); some on Fort Peek Reservation, Montana.
{a) Brule (Si-tea"'-xu); some are oh Stamling Roek
Reservation. Most of the Upi)('iliinU'{V\'m\\\M\i\
Sitca"xu) are on RoHebud Reservation, Soiitli Dako-
ta. Most of tlie /vWMvr W/v(/«< (Lowland Sitca"xu)
are on Lower BruUI Reservation, Soutli Dakota.
(//) S(tnH Arcs (l-ta'-zip-tco', Witliout Bows). Most are
(»n Cheyenne Reservation. South Dakota; some on
Standing Rock Reservation.
((•) lilac k/ctt (Hi-hiiHii-im). Most are on Clioyenne Res-
ervation; some on Standing Rock Reservation.
(«/) Miniieconjoit (Mi'-ni-ko'-o-jn). Most uroon Cheyenne
Reservation, some are on Rosebud Reservation, and
some on Standing Rock Reservation.
(f ) Two Ki'ltlcN (( )-o -lie-no" -pa, Two Boilings), on Chey-
enne Reservation.
(/) Oyulalla (O-gla'-la). Most on Pine Ridge Reserva-
tion, South Dakota; scmie on Standing Rock Reser-
vation. Wa-Z(i-Z(t (Wa-j'i-ja. Wa-zha-zha), a gens
of the Oglala (Pine Ridge Reservation); Loaf cm
(Wa-glu-xe, In-breeders), a gens of the ( )glala; most
on Pine Ridge Reservation ; s( ime < >n Rosebud Reser-
vation.
(j/) Uncpapa (186-^>-'(i3), Uiicapajni (lt<.s()-'81), (Hurt-
kpa-pa), on Standing Rock Reservation.
n. Assiuaboin (Hohe, Dakota name) ; most in British North America;
some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
in. Omaha (U-ma"'-ha"). on Omaha Reservation, Nebraska.
IV. Ponca (formerly hinka on m,ii)s; Ponka); (i(t5 on Ponca Reser-
vation, Indian Territory; 217 at Santee Agency, Nebraska.
f
M
I
;t
llt5 liyntAN MNdl'lSTIC KAMM.IKH.
V, Knii' (>|ii"'-Zi'; llu« Khmhu IiidiaiiH) ; on thn Kiuihiih Hchi'I-vu*'
(ion, Tiidiiin Territdry.
VI, (haiji': Hij/ Osiuji (I'a-ho'-tMi, Tlnrnt" i>ii n Mcunliiiii); Lillle
Ositiji (TlioHt' ut tlin I'dut (if the M(iuiitiiiii); ArkitiisttH
Hniiil ();.;aii-iHii->|fi", Dwellors in a HiKlilHiidOrovn), OnaKO
Kcsorvaticni, Indian Torritmy.
VII, QiKipinr {U-Jja'-qpa; Kwapa). A IVw arc on the Ijnapaw
Rt'Hwrve, hut about '^(K) amon tlioOMann RoHcrvo, Okla-
lnnna. (Tli«<y arc tli(« Arkim.sd of t'lirly tiiin-M,)
V^III. /r)(rr(,on Oroat Nemaha Kt'scrvts KansaH and Nohijwka, and
S(l on Sac and Kox Kt'Hcrvc, Indian Territory.
IX. OfiH' (Wa-ti>-(|ta-ta), on Otoe HcHi-rve, Indian Territory.
X. Misnouri or .\tis.stiiiri(i (Ni-n'-t'a-tci). on Otixi HcHeive,
XI. Witinihutjo (Ho-tcaiV-Ka-ra); niowt in Nohranka, on thoir m-
.serve: .some are in VVisconsin; Honio in Miclii>?an, accord-
ing to Dr. Keynohls.
XII. Mfimlini, on Fort Bt»rthold Reserve, North Dakota.
XIII. (iron \'tntrifi(i[, iniHU»adin^( name: .syn. MiiiNila rtf; Hi-da'-
tHa); on the same reserve.
XIV. (U-<iii' (AhHilru(|e, Aubsitroko, et«\). Crow Reserve, Montana.
XV. 7'»/f7o (Ye-Ha"'), amoiif^ tlioSi.K Ni.tions, Grand River Reserve,
Province of Ontario, Canada.
XV^I. liilit.ri (Ta'-neks ha'-ya), part on the Reil River, at AvoyelKts,
Louisiana; part in Indian Territory, among tlie Clioctaw
and Caddo.
XVII. CnUui'bi,.
XVIII. Wornm.
Pui>iihttioit. — The i)resent number of tlie Siouan family is ai)out
4:(,400, of wliom about 'i,'i()\ are in Britisli North America, the rest
beinj? in tile United States. Below is given the population of the
tribes ofliciaiiy recojjnized, compiled chiefly fnmi the Canadian In-
dian Report for 1H88, tlm United States Indian Commissioner's Re-
port for IHHl), and the United States Census Bulletin for hSSHi:
Ditkot^i:
Milpwakniitonwnii and Wahix'kutoiSantt'c) on Hiintw Utwrve, NiOmiKka HfiO
At FlandrcHii. Dakota 21»2
Hanteo at Devil's Lake Agency .M
.Simoton and WaliiK'ton «)U SisHcton llcscrvc. South Dakota. l.-ISS
SiHW'ton, Wah|N>t<)n,und Cutliea<l(YanktonnaiN)at DHvil's Lako Reserva-
tion H57
Yankton:
On Yankton Ueservation, South Dakota 1, "M
At Devil's Lake ARency Vi'A
On Fort Peek Reservation. Montana 1, 12t
A few on Crow Creek Reservation, Soutii Dakota 10
A tew on Lower Brule Reservation. Soutli Dakota 10
2,080
IHIWIIXl
HIOI'AN KAMtr.r.
m
Dnkiilii— ('ontitiiii'il.
Yankton iihIh:
ll|i|i«>r YiiiikliiiiniiiH on HtaniliiiK R<M-k lt<>Hi>rvatioii I,7H0
Ijiiwit YiiiiktiiiiimlH ciiiCriiw CriH-k Itfiwrvutioii I, (WW
At HUiiiilliiK l^)<•k AK<'my l.'SW
4..WI
Ti't4mt
Mriili', lI|)|M>r HriiU) on KiMt'liuil I^>H<>rvlitinn II, 'i4H
On Dfvil'H Iiiiku K<'H«'rviition 'i
Li)wi>r Hriili' ut Crow ('reck iinil Ijownr Urulii AKt>nojr 1,()30
MiiiiiiTiinjnii (iiKMtl,v)iincl I'wo Kfitic, oni'lii-yt-nnt' Kivt-r KcMcrvf iJ.Hait
HIiit'kfiM't iin StuiiilinK Itix-k Hi'MTVutlon ntn
Two Kt'ttl*^ on Htiwlmil lii'wrvation Ilin
UKliila on I'iiif HiilK<' l^wrviition 4, M'i
Wajaja (O^lala Kfim) on Kom'IiuiI l{<>M'rvation t, H^n
WaKliixt- (<)){lala ki'Kh) on HoHi'bud Itt'Hfrvutiun t, tViit
UncupaiNi. on StunilhiK liiK'k |{<>w-rvation ATI
Dakota at ('arlHl<>. |jiwrt>n<'i>, anil Hampton M'honJH 169
16,486
Dakota in KritiHli Nortli Anifrica (triU'H not Htatcd):
On Bird Tail Hioux Itt-wrvf, Hirtlt- AKt'ncy, NortliwcHt Ti-rritorv . IIW
On Oak Hiver Hioux Kewrvc, Hirtli* AniMicy S70
On Oak Jjiikf Hidux Hcwrvt', Hirtlt> An'Micy (W
On Turtlf Mountain Hioux HcmTvi", Hirtlc Ancncy 84
On HtaiiilinK KutTalo HcHtTvc, umler Nortli weHt Tt-rritory 184
MuHcowio'tunn'w A^fncy :
White Cap Dakota (Mimmo \V<m)<Ih IteHervation) lOn
American Hioux (no retjerve) 9H
8ft7
AHHinahoin:
On Kort IV-lknap Rt'Kprvation, Montana 952
On Kort I'tK'k Itcscrvation, Montiina 719
At DhvII'h liiikt' AKPncy 8
Thf followiuK are in British North America:
rheawint Kunip'H band, at Moonc Mountain (of whom at MIh-
Houri and 4 at Turtle Mountain) (19
Ocean Man's luind, at Mikwc Mountain (of whom 4 at MisHourl) . 08
The-man-who-took-the-coat's hand, at Indian Head (of whom ii
are at Milk Hiver) 248
Ik'ar'H 1' cad iNnid, Battleford ARency 227
(;hee-|KK)Hte-(|ualm hand, at Wolf Creek, Peace Hills Agency ... 128
Bear's I'aw band, at Morley ville 286
(.'hinii|uy Iwind, Reserve, at Sarcee Agency 134
Jacob's Iwnd 227
3.008
Omaha:
Omaha and Winnebago Agency, Nebraska I, l.W
At ( 'arlisle Hch(K)l, Pennsylvania li'
At Ham]>ton Hcho<il, Virginia 10
At Lawrence School, Kaniuw 10
1,197
Ponka: ♦
In Nebraska (under the Santee agent) 217
In Indian Territory (under tlie Punka agent) (Ml.")
At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1
At Lawrence, Kansas. 24
847
(f
\\
118
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
■fi-
ll
Osage:
At Oaiigo Agonoy , Indian Territory 1 , 509
At Carlisle. Pennsylvania 7
At Lawrence, Kansas 65
Kansa or Kaw:
At Osage Agency. Indian Territory 198
At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1
At Ijiiwrence, Kansas. . s 15
Qiia|)aw:
On Quai>aw Reserve, Indian Territory 154
On Osage Reserve, Indian Territory 71
At Carlisle, Pennsylvnina S
At Lawrence, Kansas 4
«
Iowa;
On Oreat Nemaha Reservation, Kansas 105
On Sac and Fox Reservation, OI<lahonia lO'J
At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1
At I>awrence, Kansas 5
Oto an<l Missouri, in Indian Territory
Winnebago:
In Nebra.ska 1,215
In Wisconsin (1889) 930
At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 27
At Ijawrence, Kansiis 2
At Hampton, V irginia 10
Mandan :
On Fort Berlliol<l Reservation, North Dakota 25t
At Hami)t<in, Virginia 1
Ilidatsa, on Fort Berthold Reservation, Nortli Dakota
Crow, on Crow lieservation, Montana
Tutelo, alniut a dozen mix<>d bloo<ls tm Orand River Reserve, Ontario,
Canada, and a few more near Montreal (V). say. aUmt
Biloxi:
In Ijonisiana, alMait 25
At Atoka. Indian Territory 1
Catawba:
In York ( 'minty , South ( 'arolina, alxiut 80
Scattered llir<mgli North Carolina, alKiiit 40?
1,581
2i;
233
273
358
2,184
2,53
523
2, 287
20
26
120?
SKITTAOETAN FAMILY.
>Skittagets. (iallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Eth.SiH'., ll, pt. l,c, 1848 (the equiv-
alent of liiK Queen Cliurlotte's Island group, p. 77).
>Skittagetts, Herghaus. Pliysik. Atlas, nuip 17, 18,12.
>Skiilegattz, (iallatin in ScluKjlcraft. Ind. Triln's. in. 102, 18,53 (obvious tyjKigraph-
iciil erro.-: Queen Cliarlotte Ishind).
Xllaidah. Scolder in .Jour. Roy. (ieog. Soc. Loud., XI, 224, 1841 (same us his Northern
family: .si-e below).
;
SKI'lTAflETAN FAMIIA'.
119
= Haiaah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man,3()(). IS.'iO (Skitt<»Kat8, Massets, KuiiiBliahafl, Kj--
ganip). Latham in TraiiH. Philolog. Hoc. Lontl., 73, 1H56 (includeH Skittigats,
Miis«i'tt«, KuiuHhahaH, and Kyganie of (jueen Charlotte's Idw. and Print'c of
WaleH Arclii|)ehigo). Latliaui, OpuHCuhi, 339, 1H60. BuBchmann, Spuren der
azt»'k. Spraoho, 073, IH.ll). Latham, El. Coinp. Phil. , 401 , 18(13 (as in IH.IO). Dall
in Pro<'. Am. Ahs'h. 3(10, 18Bt)(liui'i'n ('harlotte's Ids. and southern part of Alex-
ander Arcliiiielago). Bancroft, Nat. IJjw^es, in, TitM, 6(>4, 1H83.
>nai-dai, Hchoolcuift, Iiiil. Trilies. v, 4H», lH,5.'i. Kane, Wanderings of an Artist,
app., 1K,")9, (Work's census, lM3tl-'41, of northwest coast trilH's, classitied by
language).
— Haiila, (lihl)s in Cont. N. \. Eth.. I, 13.'), 1H77. Tolmie and Dawson. Ctonip. Vo-
cahs., l.*!, 1HH4 (viK'abs. of Kaigani S»'pt, Miusset, Hkidegate, Kumsliiwa diale<^tH;
also map showing distrilmtion). Dall in Prix3. An\. Ass'n, 37.5, 1885(mere men-
tion of family).
<Hydahs, Keane, App, Stanford's 'Comp. (Ont. and So. Am.), 4(10, 473, 1878
(enumerates Massets, Klue, Kiddan, Ninstance, Skid-a-gate, Skid-a-gatees,
(Jum-sliu-wa.s, Kaiganies, Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeonas, Sebasses, Hailtzas, Bell-
acoolas).
>Quepn Charlotte's Island, Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., ll, l."), 300i
1830 (no tril)e indicated). (Jallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., ll, pt. 1,77,1848
(based on Hkittugete language). L,atham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Ix>nd., I, l.')4, 1848.
Latham. Oimscula, 341), 1800.
XNorthern, .Scouler in ,Iour. Roy. Oeog. Soc. Lond., xi, 319,1841 (includes Queen
Charlotte's Island and trilx-s on islands and coast up to 00' N. L. ; Haidiis, Mas-
settes, Skittcgi'is, (!umsliawas). i'richard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 433, 1847
(follows .S<'ouler).
— Kygani, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass'n, 309, 1809 (Queen Charlotte's Ids. or Haidahs),
xN(H>tka, Bancroft, Nat. liaces. III, .504, 1883 (contains Quane, proUibly of present
family; Quact<H', Saukauhituck).
Till' vocaLiiliiry rofori'ed by Galhitiii' to "Quoeji Cliarlotte's Lsl-
aiids " ixnquestionahly belongs to tko prosent family. In addition
to being a compound word and being objectionable as a family name
on account of its unwinldiness, the term is a purely geographic one
and is based upon no stattvl tribe; hence it is not eligible for use in
systematic nomenclature. As it appears in the Archu'ologia Ameri-
cana it repres(Mits nothing but the locality whence the vocabulary of
an unknown tribe was received.
The family name to be considered as next in order of date is the
Northern (or Haidah) of Scouler, which app(>ars in volume xi, Royal
(ie()gra])hical So."iely, i)age 318, et seq. The t(>rm as emjjloyed by
Scouhir is involved in much confusion, and it is somewhat difficult
to determine just wiiat tribes the author intended to cover by the
di'signatit)n. Reduced to its simplest form, the case stands as fol-
lows: Scolder's jirimary division of the Indians of the NiU'thwest was
into two groups, the insular and the inland. Tlie insular (and coast
ti'ibes) were thtui sulxlivided into two famili. .<, viz. Northern or
Haidah f.imily (for th(! tcu-ms are interchangeably used, as on page
3'-it) .and the Southern or Nootka-C(dumbian family. Under the
Northern or Haidah fanuly the author classes all the Iiulian tribes
'.Vrchteologia Americana, 1830, ll, pp. 10, :i0U,
If
i i
120
INDIAN LINOtJISTIO I'AMIT.IES.
; I
in the Russian territory, tlie Koldiians (Atliapascaa of Gallatin,
183(1). the Koloslit'S, Ugalentzes, and Tun (Ihaase (the Kohuscans of
Gallatin. I8;Ki); the Atnas (Salish of Gallatin. 1830); the Kenaians
(Athupascas, Gallatin. 1830); the Haidali tribes j)ropi'r of Queen
Charlotte Island, and the Chimesyans.
It will appear at a glance that such a heterogeneous assenihlage of
tribes, representing as they do several distinct stocks, can not have
been classed together on purely linguisti(! evidence. In point of fact,
Scouler's remarkable classification seems to rest only in a very slight
degree upon a linguistic biisis, if indeed it can be said to have a
linguistic basis at all. Consideration of •'])hysical character, man-
ners, and customs " were clearly accorded such weight by this author
lis to practically remove his Northern or Haidah family from the
list of linguistic stocks.
The next family name which was applied in this connection is the
Skittagets of Gallatin as above cited. This name is given to desig-
nate a family on page c, volume il. of Transactions of the Ethnological
Society, 18-18. In his subseriuent list of vocabularies, page 77, he
changes his designation to Queen Charlotte Island, placing under
this family name the Skittagete tribe. His presentation of the former
name of Skittagets in his complete list of families is, however,
sufficienily formal to render it valid as a family designation, and it
is. therefore, retained for the tribes of the Queen Charlotte Arch-
ipelago which have usually been called Haida.
From a comparison of the V()cal)ulariesof the Haida language with
others of the neighboring Koluschan family. Dr. Franz Boas is in-
clined to consider that the two are genetically related. The two
languages possess a considerable number of words in common, but a
more thorough investigation is recpiisite for the settlement of the
question than has yet been given. Pending this the two families are
here treated separately.
OEOdRAPniC niSTUIBl'TION.
The tribes of this family occupy Queen Charlotte Islands. For-
rester Island to the north of the latter, and the southeastern part of
Prince of Wales Island, the latter part having been ascertained by
the agents of the Tontii Census.'
I'K1N( II'AI, TRIHKS.
The following is a list of the j)rincipal villages:
Hai<la:
Asoguang. Kun^it. Skiteiget.
Cumshawa. Massett. Tanu.
Kaynng. New (i old Harbor. Tartanee.
Kung. Skedan. Uttewas.
'S*'e PftrotT iiia|) of Alu-ska, lHH(t-'81.
POWELL.]
TAKILMAN-TANOAN FAMILIES.
131
Kaigani :
Chatcheeni.
ClickaHs.
Howakan.
Quiahanless.
Shakan.
Population. — The population of the Haida is 2,500, none of whom
are at present under an agent.
TAKILMAN FAMILY.
=Taljilma, Qatschet in Mag. Am. HiHt., 1883 (Lower Rogup River).
Tliis name was proposed by Mr. Gatscliet for a distinct language
spoken on the toast of Oregon about the lower Rogue River. Mr.
Dorsey obtained a vocabulary in 1884 which he has compared with
Athapascan, Kusan, Yakonan, and other languages spoken in the
region without finding any marked resemblances. The family is •
hence admitted ])rovisionally. The language appears to be spoken
by but a single tribe, although thei'e is a manuscript vocabulary in
tlie Bureau of Ethnology e.xhibiting certain differences which may
be dialectic.
GEOaRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Takilma formerly dwelt in villages along upper Rogue River,
Oregon, all the latter, with one exception, being on ic south side,
from Illinois River on the southwest, to Deej) Rock, which was
nearer the head of the stream. They are now included among the
"Rogue River Indians," and they reside to the number of twenty-
seven on the Siletz Reservation, Tillamook County. Oregon, where
Dorsey found them in 1884.
taSoan f.amily.
>Tay-waugh, Lane (1854) in Sclioolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v. (189, IS'ir) (Pueblos of San
Juan, Santa Olara, Pojuaque, Naiulw. San II tie Conso, and one Moqui pueblo).
Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878.
>Tiirio, Powell in Ko<;ky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes Sandia,
Tewa, Sim Ildefonso. San Juan, Santa Clara. PojojMiue, Nauibe, Tesuijue,
Sinecii, Jeniez, Taos, Piciiri).
>Te>;ua, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (includes S.
Juan, Sta. Clara, Pojuaque, Naml)e, Tesugue, S. Ildefonso, Haro).
- Tewau. Powell in Am. Nat., 005, Aug., 18H0(make8 five divisions: 1. Taflo (Isleta,
Isletanear El Paso, Sandia); 3. Taos (Taos, Picuni); 3. Jemes (Jemes); 4. Tewa
or Tehua (San Ildefonso, San Juan, Pojoaque, Nambe, Tesuque, Santa Clara,
and one Moki pueblo): 5. Piro).
>E-nagli-nuiKli, Ume (1854) in St^hoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 089, 1855 (includes Taos,
Vicuris, ZesiKiua. Sandia. Ystete. and two pueblos near El P.oso, Texaa). Keane,
Apj). Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), -179, 1878 (follows Lane, but identi-
fies Texan pueblos witli Lentis? and Socorro 'y).
>Picori, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (or Enagli-
magli).
:=~-Stock of Rio(Jrande Pueblos, Gatscliet in U. S. Oeog. Surv. W. lOOtli M,, vil, 415,
1879.
—Rio Orande Pueblo, (Jatschet in JIag. Am. Hist., 358, 1883.
11
F
122
INDIAN MNOITI8TI0 KAMILIKS,
Derivation: Probably from "tafnin." plural of ta-ide, " Indian,"
in the dialect of Isleta and Sandia (Gatschet).
In a letter ' from Win. Carr Lane to H. R. Schoolcraft, appear
some remarks on the affinities of the Pueblo languages, based in
largo part on hearsay eviilenoe. No vocabularies are given, nor
does any real classification appear to be attemi)ted, though referring
to such of his remarks as ujply in the i)resent connection. Lane
states that the Indians of " Taos. Vicuris, Zesuqua. Sandia, and
Ystete, and of two ])ueblos of Texas, near El Paso, .are said to speak
the same language, wliich I have heard called E-nagh-magh," and
that the Indians of " San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuacjue, Nanibe San
II de Conso, and one Mcxjui piieblo, all speak the same language, as
it is said: tliis I have heard called Tay-waugh." The aml)iguous
• nature of his reference to these pueblos is apparent from the above
(piotation.
The names given by Lane .as those he had " heard " applied to
certain groups of pueblos which ''it is said " speak the s.ame lan-
guage, rest on too slender a basis for serious C(msideration in a classi-
ficatory sense.
Keane in the appendix to Stanford's Compendium (Central .and
South America), 1878, p. 47i), presents the list given by Lane, cor-
recting his spelling in some cases and adding the name of the Tusayan
pueblo as Haro (Hano). He gives the group no formal family
name, though they are classed together as speaking '"Tegua or Tay-
waugh."
The Tailo of Powell (1878). .as quoted, appears to be the first
name formally given the family, and is therefore .accepted. Recent
investigations of the dialect spoken at Taos i;nd some of the other
jmeblos of this group show a consider.able body of words having
Shoshonean affinities, and it is by no means improb.able that fur-
ther research will result in ])roving th? radical relationship of these
languages to the Shoshonean family. The analysis of the language
has not yet, lu>wever, proceeded far enough to warr.aut a decided
opinion.
aEOORAPHlC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of this family in the United States resided exclusively
ni)on the Rio Grande and its tributary valleys fr(nn about ;j;} ' to
.about .'{0°. A small body of these people j(nned the Tns.ayan in
noi-thern Arizona, .as tradition .avers to .assist the latter ag.ainst
.attacks by the Apache — though it seems more probable that they
fled from the Rio (rvande during the pueblo revolt of 1080 — and re-
mained to found the permanent pueblo of Hano, the seventh ])uebIo
of the group. A smaller section of the f.amily lived upon the Rio
Grande in Mexico and Texas, just over the New Mexico border.
' Sclioolcraft, Iiuliiui Tribes, lari."), vol. T), p. 0»9.
POWILL.]
TIMUQUANAN FAMILY.
123
Population. — The following pueblos are inchxded in the family,
with a total population of about 3,237 :
Hano (of the Tusayan group) 132
Isleta (New Mexico) 1 , 059
hleta (Texas) few
Jeniez 428
Namlie 79
Picuris 100
Pojomiue 20
Sandia
Sun Ildefonso
!Saii Ju.m
Santa ( 'lara . .
140
14H
40«
22r)
Seiiccu (l)elow El PoHo) few
TuoH , 409
TeHUcjue 91
TIMUQUANAN FAMILY.
^^Timuquana, Smith in Hist. Magazine, n, 1, 1858 (a notice of the language with
vcxuibulary; diHtinctneHH of the language afflrine.l). Brinton. Floriilian Penin-
sula. VU, 1859 (Hpelle<l also Tiinuiu'a, Tiinagoa, Tiniu(|uu).
-= Tinmcua, GatHcliet in Pnx;. Am. Phil. Soc. , xvi, April 0. 1877 (from Cajx? Caflaveral
to mouth of St.John'H River). (Jatschet, Creek Mig. Legend I, 11-l.S, 1884.
GatBchet in Science, 41it, April 29, 18H7.
= Atiniuca, Gatschet in St'ience, ibid. (i)roi)or name).
Derivation: From ati-muca, '"ruler," "master;" literally, "serv-
ants attend upon liim."
In the Historical Magazine as above cited appears a notice of the
Timuquana language by Buckingham Smith, in which is affirmed its
distinctness upon the evidence of language. A sh(3rt vocabulary is
appended, which was collated from the "Confessionario" by Padre
Pareja, 1013. Brinton and Gatschet have studied the Timuquana lan-
guage and have agreed as to the distinctness of the family from any
other of the United States. Both the latter authorities are inclined
to take the view that it has affinities with the Carib family to the
southward, and it seems by no means improbable that ultimately
the Timuquana language will be considered an offshoot of the Carib
linguistic stock. At tlie present time, however, such a cunclusicni
would not 1)6 justified by tlie evidence gathered and published.
OEOOB.\PHIC DISTRIBUTION.
It is impossible to assign definite limits to the area occupied by the
tribes of this family. From documentary testimony of the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuries the limits of the family domain appear
to have been about as follows: In general terms the present nortli-
ern limits of the State of Florida may be taken as the northern
frontier, altiiough upon the Atlantic side Timuquanan territory may
liave extended into Georgia. Ujion the northwest the boundary line
was formed in De Soto's time by the Ocilla River. Lake Okeechobee
on the south, or as it was then called Lake Sarrjijie or Mayaimi, may
1)6 taken as the boundary between tlie Timuquanan tribes projjcr
and the Calusa province upon the Gulf coast and the Tegesta prov-
ince upon the Atlantic side. Nothing whatever of the languages
i*
124
TNDIAX LINUI'ISTIC I'AMIMES.
;h
spoken in tliese two latter provinces is available for comparison. A
number of the local names of these provinces given by Fontanedo
(155!)) have terminations similar to many of the Timiiquanan local
names. This slender evidence is all that we have from which to infer
the Timiiquanan relationship of the southern end of the peninsula.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
The following settlements appear upon the oldest map of the re-
gions we possess, that of De Bry (Narratio; Frankf. a. M. 16, 1590);
(A) Shores oi St. John's River, from mouth to sources :
Patica. Utina.
Saturiwa. Patchica.
Atore. Chilili.
Homolua or Molua. Calanay.
Alimacani. Onochaquara.
Casti. May area.
Malica. Mathiaca.
Melona. Maiera.
Timoga or Timncua. Mocoao.
Enecaqua. Ctadica.
Choya. Eloqiiale.
Edelano (island). Aquonena.
Astiiia.
(B) (hi a (fictitious) western tributary of St. John's River, from
mouth to source :
Hicaranaou. Potanou.
Appalou. Ehianiana.
Oustaca. Anouala.
Onathcaqua.
(C) Eant Floridian coast, from south to north :
Mocossou. Haiiocoroucouay.
Ofithcaqua. Marracoii.
Sorrochos.
(D) On coast north of St. John's River :
Hiouacara.
(E) The following are gathered from all other authorities, mostly
from the accounts of De Soto's expedition :
Acquera.
Agnile.
Basisa or Vacissa(lu88).
Cholupaha.
Hai)aluya.
Hirrihicpia.
Itafi (perhaps a province).
San Mateo (1088).
Santa Lucia de Acuera (SE.
coast).
Tacatacuru.
T(jcaste.
Tolemato.
T(jpoqui.
v^^
I
N,^'
POWELL.)
TONIKAN-TONKAWAN b'AMlMKS.
tsn
Itiira
Miichaua (Ui8H).
Niipetuca.
Osilo (Oxillo).
San Juan do Guacara (1C8S).
Tucuruni ( SE. coast)
Ucita.
Urrii)ai'acuxi.
Yupaha (porhaps a province).
TONIKAN FAMILY.
=Tunica8,(}allatin in TrunH. anil Coll. Aiu. Antici.S<KT.,ii, 115, 116, ISilfl (()ui>ti>M Dr.
.Sil)ley, who states thoy siieak a (listinct lanKuage). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man,
341, 1850 (opposite mouth of lied River: (juoteH Dr. Sibley as to distinctness of
language).
= Tonica,GatHchet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, ;iO, 1884 (liriof account of triU').
==Tonika, Qatschet in Science, 412, April 'i9, 1887 (distinctness as a family as
serted; the tribe calls itself Tuni.);ka).
Derivation: From tlie Tonika word ()ui, " man," "iwopli';" t- is a
prefi.K or article; -ka,-;fka a nomiii.t' sulli.x.
The ilistinctness of tlio Tonika lanj?ua,i,'o, lias long been suspected,
and was indeed distinctly stated by i.~)r. Sibley in 1800.' The state-
ment to this effect by Dr. Sibley was quoted by Gallatin in 18.')(i, but
as the latter possessed no vocabulary of the language he made no
attempt to classify it. Latham nho dismisses the language with the
same quotation from Sibley. Positive linguistic proof of the posi-
tion of the language was lacking until obtained by Mr. Gatschet in
1880, who declared it to form a family by itself.
OEOOKAPHIC DISTniBUTION.
The Tonika are known to have occupied three localities: First,
on the Lower Yazoo River (1700); second, oast shore of Mississippi
River (about 1704); third, in Avoyelles Parish, Louisiana (1817).
Near Marksvillo, the county seat of that parish, about twenty-five
are now livinj;.
TONKAWAN PA.MILV.
= Tonka wa, Gatschet, Zwolf Sprachen aus deni Sttdwesten Nordamerikaw, TB. 1876
(vocabulary of about *)(( wonls and some sentenc -s). Gatschet .Die Sprache der
T<)nka%vas, in Zeitschrift fiir Bthnologie, 64, 1877. Gatschet (1876), in Proc. Am.
Philosoph. Soc., XVI, 31H, 1877.
Derivation: the full form is the Caddo or Wako term tonkawoya,
"thoy all stay together " (wt'ya, " all").
After a careful examination of all the linguistic material avail-
able for comparison. Mr. Gatschet has concluded that the language
spoken by the Tonkawa forms a distinct family.
' President's message, February 11), 1806,
in
INDIAN IJNOITIHTIC KAMILIE8.
, '
OEOORAI'HU' DIHTKIBUTION.
TIk) Tonkiiwa wore ii migratory people and a volluines genlium,
whose earliest habitat is imkiiowii. Their first luontiou occurs in
1*19; at that time and ever siiu-o they roamed in the western and
southern parts of what is now T(»xas. About 1 S-4* they were engaged
as scouts in the United States Army, and from IH()0-'(;".J (p) were in
the Indian Territory; after the secession war till 1884 tliey lived in
temporary camps near Fort Gritlin, Shackelford County, Texas, and
in October, 1884, tiiey removed to the Indian Territory (now on
Oakland Reserve). In 188-1 there were seventy-eight individuals
living; associated with them were nineteen Lipan Apache, who had
lived in their company for many years, thougli in a separate (iamp.
They have thirteen divisions (partly totom-clana) and observe moth-
er-right.
UCHEAN FAMILY.
=Uch»H'«, (riillatiii in Tnuis. and (loll. Am. Antuj. S(k\, n.,Or). tSIUI (baHcd uiHm the
Ucliecs ali)nc). Bancroft, Hist. U. H.. ni.. 247. 1H4(). (Jallatin in Trans. Am.
Etli. S<K-. n.. pt. I, x(i.\, 77, 184H. Keanc , App. Htanford'H (Jomp, (Out. and So.
Am.), 472, IS78 (siiKKtwts that the lanKuage may have lieen akin to Natoh>'z).
— Utfhees.tJallatin in Trans, and Coll, Am. Anti(|. Soc., H., 3(M1, isao, (Jallatin in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Triltes, m., 401, ViT^)i. Keune, App. .Stanford's Comp. (Cent,
and So. Am.), 472, 1878.
= Ut«-hiea. BorKhaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 18,'>2.
=Uche. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man. !!88, 1850 (C^h)»h River). Latham in Trans. Philolog.
S<H-.Lond., n., Hl-.'iO, 184fi. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
=Yuchi, (ratschot, CriHsk Mig. L«'K<'nd. 1. 17, 18S4. riatschet in Science, 413, April
2», 18S7.
The following is the account of this tribe given by Gallatin (prob-
ably derived from Hawkins) in Archa^ologia Americana, page 'Jo:
The original seats of the lichees were eawt of Coosa and prolMibly of the Chata-
hiHX'hee;and they consider themselves as the most ancient inhabitants of the coun-
try. Tliey may have be<'n the same nation which is called Apalaches in the ac-
counts of Do Soto's expedition, and their towns were till lately principally on Flint
River.
(lE(>(mAPHK: DISTRIBUTION.
The pristine homes of the Yuchi are not now traceable with any
degree of certainty. The Yuchi are suppo.sed to have been visited by
De Soto during his memorable march, and the tcnvn of Cofitachicpii
chronicled by him, is believed by many investigators to have .stood
at Silver Bluff, on the left bank oi the Savannah, about 25 miles bo-
low Augusta. If. as is supposed by .some authorities, Coiitachiciui
was a Yuciii town, this would locate the Yuchi in a section which,
wlieu first known to the whites, was occupied l)y tlie Shawnee. Later
the Yuchi appear to have live<l .stjmewhat farther down the Savannah,
on the eastern and also the western side, as far as the ( )geocliee River,
and also upon tracts al)()V(^ and below Auguita, Georgia. These
tracts were claimed by them as late as K^O.
POWELI..
lUJIIKAN-WAIILATlMJAN FAMILIKS.
127
In 17"4!MiiM)rtion i)f the Yiiohi left tlmir old soiitH mid Hottlod (iiiioiiiu;
the Lower Creek on tlie ClmtuhoocluH» River; tliert* they estahlislied
throe colony villiij^oH in the neighborhood, iintl Inter on uYueliiHottle-
ment is rnontiunod on Lower Tiilliipoosu lliver, Jiiiiong the Ui)|)er
Creek.' Filsou' gives a list of tiiirty Indian tribes and a statement
concerning Yuelii towns, which he must liavo obtained from a much
eai'lier source: " lichees occupy fourditferentplaci'sof residence — at
the iujail of St. John's, the fork of St. Mary's, the lutad of Can-
nou( hee, and the luwl of St. Tillis" (Satilla), etc."
Popiilofion. — More thansi.x hundred Yuclii njside in nortiieasteru
Indian Tttrritory, upon the Arkansas River, where tiiey are usually
(dassed as Creek. Doubtless the latter ai'tt to some e.Ktent intermar-
ried with them, but the Yuchi are jeah^us of their iiaiuo and tena-
cious of their {lositiou as a tribe.
WAIII.ATPUAN.
= WHiilat|m.IIiilf. in U. S. E.\pl. Kxp., vi, 109, 314, .KM), 1H4H (incliiiU's Ciiilloiix oi
( 'iiyuscor WilU'tiMMw. iind Molt'le). Oallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Ktli. Sim-.,
II,I>t. l,c. It.no. 77, 1H4H (after Hale). Heri;lianH (1H.-)1), PliVHik. Atlas, rua|> 17,
lH.")i. liiischiiiann, Mptiren iler aztelc. Hprache, (i'iH, W'td. Hancroft, Nat. Itai'es,
ni,.'>f):), IHSii (t'ayuse and Mollale).
= Wailatpu. ({allatin in H«-lnH>liraft, Ind. Triln-s, ni, 403, laiS (Cayuwt and Molele).
X Suliaptin. [jatliain. Nat. Hist. Man, H3!(, 1H.")0 (cited as ineludinK Cay us ?).
X .Saliaptins, Keane, App. .Stanford's ( Nnni). (Cent, and S<>. .\tn.). 474, 187S (cited be-
cause it includes Cayuse and Mollale).
= Molele, I,atliani, Nat. Hist. 5Ian, 324, 18.50 (includes Molele, Cayi'm?).
> I'ay"'*''''' I^itliain, iliid.
= Cayuse, (ratschet in Ma>;. Am. Hist.. 166, 1877 (Cayuse and Molele). Gatschet in
Beadi, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877.
Derivation: Wayiletpu, plural form of Wa-flet, "one Cayuse
man " (Oatschet).
Hale established this family and placed under it the Caillou.v or
Cayuse or Willetpoos, and the Molele. Their liead((uarters as indi-
cated by Haitt are the upper part of the Walla Walla lliver and the
country about Mounts Hood and Vancouver.
OEOOKAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
TheCayn.so lived chiefly near the mouth of the Walla Walla River,
extending a slujrt distance above find below on the Corumbia, be-
tween the Umatilla and Snake Rivers. The Mobile were a mountain
tribe and occupitid a l)olt of mountain cf>untry south of the C<jliimbia
River, cliietiy about Mounts Hood and Jetferson.
PRINCIPAI. TRIBES.
Caynse. Mobile.
'datschet. Creek Mi^. Legend, I, 21-33, 1884.
'Discovery, etc., of Kentucky, Vm, II, 84-7.
'Oatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, p. 20,
1
138
INDIAN I,IN(»riWTIC KAMIMKS.
roimlation. — Tht«r« aro 'M Moliiln luiw on tlic (Iniiult' Roiidti
UcHorvatidii, Oregon,' iiiiil a fcwothcrM livt* in tlit> moiiiUaiiiM west of
Klamath Lakf. Tint Indian AlTairs Report for IH8H cit'dits 4(»1
anil tho Uiiitwl Htatt'8 CtMisuH Bulletin for IH!»(i, 4lfi Cayusc IndiauH
to tlu) Umatilla Reservation, hut Mr. Henshaw was ahle to find only
nix old men and women upon the resttrvation in AuK"Ht, IMHH, who
spoke their own lanKuaK"'- The otlierH, thou;;li presumably of
Cayuse blood, spouk the ITnuitilla tonjjue.
WAKAHHAN FAMILY.
>\Vakiw»i, (Snllatin in TranH. niul Coll. Am. Antici. Hue., n, M.^Ofl, isn«(.>f Nm.ika
Soiiiicl: nivcs Jcwitt'H v(H'iili.), (iailutiii in TriiiiK. Am. Ktli. Sih'., m, i)t. 1, 77,
184H (Ixiscil on NcwitU'f). JkTKliaiiH ( IH,'!! ), PliVHik, Allan, map 17, IM.'vj. (ialla-
tin in Scliiiolcraft. Inil. TriU's, m, Wi, isril) (inchuli'H Ntwittec and Nootka
Honnil). Iiatliam in Trans. I'liiliiloK Hih: l^ontl., 7il. Is.'iK (of Cjnaiira anil Vaii-
(•ouv(>r"M Island). I^itliani, Opuscula, 3411, 1M(I(I. Lathain, Kl. Comp. I'liil., 4o:i,
IN(l:j(Tla(N|uatsh and Waka.sh pro|R'r; Ni'itka and conKt'ni'rw also n-ferrt'd JiiTc).
xWakash. Uithain, Nat. Hist. .Man, :U)1, IM.'iO (incliulcs Nitspatlc. pro|H'r Nutkans,
Tlaoi|uatHli, Nittt'nat, Klassi-t, Klallcms : tlu- last named is Halislian).
XNootka-Coliiinliian.Hcoulcrin Join-. Roy. Ucofj. S<k\, xi, "Jril, IH-II (inchidt's Qnadra
and Vancouvor Island, Hain-ltzuk, Billct'lioola. TlaiH|iiat('li. Kawitrhen, Noo,s(la-
lum, Siiuallyaniish. {'liiiMiooks). I'ricliard, Pliys. Hist. Mankind, v. 4!l.'), |H47
(follows Sooiilcr). Latham in Jour. Etii. H(h'. Lond.. I. 1(13. ISIS (remarks
u|>on .St'onler's K>'"<ip "f •'lis name). I.atliam, Opusi'nia, '.J">7, ISOO (the same).
<Nootka, Hale in U. .S. Expl. Kxp., vi, 2'.'(», Mil lS4tt 'pro|H>ses family to inelude
trilM'K of V'aneouver Island and tril)os on Hiaith side of Fuea Strait).
>Nntka, Husehmann, Neu-Mexico, .m, 18.58.
>N<Hitka, (latsehet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (mentions only Makah, and Classet
triU's of CaiK- Flattery), Oat«(liet in Beacli. Ind. Mis*-., 44(1, 1877.
xNootkahs, Keane, App. Stamford's Conip. (Cent, and So. .\ni.),47H, lS78(inchide»
Muehlahts. Nitinahts, Dhyal-ts, Manosahts, and (.^uoqnoultliH of present family,
together with a nnmln-r of , .alishan triU-s).
xNiMitka, Bancroft, Nat. Raees, m. .'ifi4, (107. 1SH-.J (a heterogeneous gronii, largely
Salishan, with Wakashan, Skittagetan, and other families ri-present<-il).
>Strait8ef Fuca. (Sallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antic). .S<k-.. u. ]:i4. ;i06, 1836
(v(K-al)ulary of, referred here with d<aiht: conHidered distiiu-t by Gallatin).
XSouthern. Seouler in Jonr. Roy. Oeog. S(k-., xi, 234, 1841 (same as his Noi-tka-
Cohnnbian al)0'.e).
Xinsular. Seouler ibid. (same as his Nootka-Colnmbian itlK)ve).
xHaelt/.iik, Latham in Jour. Eth. .S<h\ Lond.. I, l.V), 1848 (cities Tohnie's viK-ab.
Siioken from .50" 30' to .53 30' N. L.). I^itham, Opnscula. ','51, 18(tO (the siime).
>Hiu-eltsuk and Hailtsa. t.aitham. Nat. Hist. Man, 3(Hl, is.'io (includes Hyslialla.
Hyhysh, Esleytuk, Weeken<K'h, Nalats(-noch, Quagheuil. Tlatla-Shequilla,
Iie(pieelt(K-h).
>HailtHa. Liithani in Trans. Philolog. Hoc. Lond. .73.185(5. Hu8(-hmann. Neu-Mexico,
333, 18.58. Latham. Opnscula, 330, 18(10. Uitluim, Kl. Comp. Phil.. 401, 18(13
(includes coast ilialects liotwi-en Ilawkeslmry Island, Hroughton's Ar<-hipelag<),
and n'lrth.-rn part of Vancouver Island).
>Ha-i-ell)-zuk, ScluM)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487,18.55. Kane. Wand, of an Artist,
app., 18.50 (or Ballal«>la: a cr-nsus of N. W. trilx-s classified by language).
'U.S. Ind. Air., 1889.
Si:
111
I-OWCLL.]
WAKASIIAN KAMIIY,
19»
>Ha-ilt'-!'.flkh. Dull, aftor Uil.l»4, in Cdiit. N. A. Ktli.. i, 114, 1H77 (v(H'abuliiri»^ <>»
I>oIIm>IIu of Milbaiik Hoiiiiil iiMil of Kwi'ikifitl').
<NiiHH,(>allatin in Trans. Am. Ktli. H(m>., II, pt 1, c, tH4H.
<NiuwH, (lallatin inTrann. Am. Klh. .S.h-.. ll.j.t. 1, 77, IH4H(^n(•hl(loHITnllMtla,Hao^•lt-
/.uk, Millrcliola, Cliimcywin). Oallatin in K<'hiMil<'rar(, ln<l. TiiIh-h, III, 4()'J, IN.'^lt
(inclnilt'H llnitHla),
X NaHH, Haiuroft, Nat. UaccH, III, .'ttU, (MMJ, 1H82 ( itii-luili'H Hniltoi of pn-wnt family).
>Alit, Hproat, HavaK'' l-iff, a|)p.,!ll'i, IHflH (nann- HnKKi-nU-il for family inHtcod of
N()otka-( 'iilnmliiaiD.
>Alit, Tolmic and Dawwtn, t'lmip. ViK'aliK.. "lO, 1hh4 (vocali i>f KaiiMikwrtliti
xI'nK''t Hiiutid (ironp, Kcant', App. Htanford'H Comp. (Ct>iit and Ho. Am,). UH). 474,
1H7H.
XlIydaliH. Kcanc, App. .StanfordV, Comp. (Ci>nt. and So. Am.), 47iJ, 1H78 (includ<>8
Hailtxas of tlii' pii'Hcnt family).
>Kwakio<)l. Tolmic and DawHon, Comp. Vocolw., 27-48, 1884 (vooalw. of HaiHliilla,
llailt/.nk. Kwilia, l.ikwiltoli, .St>pU ; alw> mapHJiowinK family domain).
>Kwa kifitl. Hoas in Pt'tcrmanii's Mittt'iliiiiKcn, 1IM>, 1887 (general accountof family
witli liHt of tril)t>H).
Derivation: Wiiukasli, wiiiika.'fh, is tlio Nootka word "^ood"
"good." Wlu'ii lioard by Cook at Krit'iully Cove, Nootka Sound, it
was snppoHod to l)e the naine of the trihe.
Until recently the laiiKuages spoken by the Aht of the west coast
of Vancouver Island and the Makah of Cape Flattery, congeneric
tribes, and the Haeltziik and Kwakiutl j>eoples of the east coast of
Vancouver Island and the opposite mainland of British Columbia,
have been regarded as representing two distinct families. Recently
Dr. Boas has made an e.xtendf^d .study of these languages, has col-
lected excellent vocabularies of the supposed families, and as a result
of his study it is now jtossible to unite them on the basis of radical
atlinity. The main body of the vocal)ularies of the two languages is
remarkably distinct, though a considerable number of important
words are shown to be common to the two.
Dr. Boas, however, points out that in both languages suffi.xesonly
are used in forming words, and a long list <^f these shows remarka-
ble similarity.
The al)ove family name was based upon a vocabulary of the Wa-
kash Indians, who, according to Gallatin, "iidiabit the island on
which Nootka Sound is situated." The short vocabulary given was
collected by Jewitt, Oallatin states' that this language is the one
"in that cpiarter, which, by various vocal)ularies. is best known to
us." In 1.S4H' Gallatin repeats his Wakash family, and again gives
the vocabulary of Jewitt. There would thus seem to be no doubt of
his intention to give it formal rank as a family.
The term " Wakfish " foi' this group of languages has since been
generally ignored, and in its |)laco Nootka or Nootka-Columbian has
been adopted. "Nootka-Columbian" was employed l)y Scouler in
1841 for a group of languages, extending from tlio mouth of Salmon
' Archwologia Americana, ll, p. 1.5.
7 ETH
"Traus. Am. Eth. .S>c. il, p. 77.
180
INlllAN I,IN(1I'ISTI<' KAMIIJKM.
KivtT to thn Hoiitli Iff tJii> Coluniltiii Rivor. now known to iMtlouK to
Hovcml (lifttini't mniilit<H. " Nootkii fiiniily" wiim nUn *'ni|>loyi<i| hy
Unix' ill IHIi'i. wlio |iro|MiHi>i| tlir iiiinii' for tlit> trilx-H of Vuncoiivri-
InIiiiiiI iiikI tlioHt> hIoii); the Hoiilli MJiIti of till* SlniilN of Kiicii.
The tt'rni " Nootkii-Coliiinltiiin" '\h Hlroiij^ly conilcniiit'il liy S|iroii,l.*
For till' Kfoiipof rcliiti'il trilii'H on tlin w<>Mt Hide of Vuiiroiivfr Islmnl
tliiw luitlior siif^KcstM Alit, " lioiiMc, trilic, itcopli-." us n niucli nioro
ii|>|>i'o|)riHti' funiily ii|>|M-lliitioii.
Tlioii^li Ity no inciiiis as iipproiiriatit ii il<>si^nittion us (!oiilil lio
foiiiiil. it Ht'unis cli'ur that for tiio so-culled WukuHJi. Ni-witti-n, iiml
otlit-r iillicd iiiii^finiKi's usually iisscnilili'd under llie Nootka family,
thu turni WakaBli of l.s;n; has priority and luiist lx< rotiiiuoii.
ilKiiiill.vi-llIC IHHTHIltrrHiN.
Tlio trilii's of the Alit division of this family ai'e conlined eliietly
to tho west coast of Vancouver Island. They ranne to the north as
far as Cape t'ook, the northern side of that, cape heiiiK occupied
by Haeltzuk trihes. as was asiertained hy Dr. Boas in IHHii. On
the south they reached to a little uhove Hooke Inlet, that inlet liein^
in possession of the Soke, a Salishan tribe.
Tho neighboi'hood of Cape Flattery, Washington, is occujjied by
the Makah, oi.e of the VVakaslian tribes, who probably wrested this
outpost of the family from tho Salish (Clallam) who ne.\t ad.join t hem
on Piij^et Sound.
The boundaries of the Haeltzuk division of this family are laid
down nearly as they appear on Tolmie and Dawson's linguistic
map of 1884. Tho west side of King Island and Ca.scade Inlet are
miid by Dr. Boas to bo inhabited by Haeltzuk tribes, and are col-
ored accordingly.
I'KINI ll-.VI. AIIT TUIBES.
Ahowsaht.
Ayhuttisaht.
Chicklesaht.
Claho(iuaht.
Hishcpiayiiuaht.
Howchuklisaht.
Kitsniaht.
Kyoijuaht.
Macaw.
Manusnht.
Mowachat.
Muclaht.
Nitinaht.
Nuchalaht.
Ohiaht,
( )pechi8aht.
Pachonaht.
Seshaht.
To({naht.
Yuclulaht.
/V>y>»/<///o/(.— There are 457 Makah attheNeah Bay Agency, Wash-
ington.* Th<! total [Mjpulatiou of tho tribes of this family under the
West Coast Agency, British Columbia, is .1, KJO.' Tho grand total
for this divisiim of tho family is thus 3,(il7.
' U. 8. Expl. Kx|hI., vol. 6, p. 880.
»Sava«u Life, M'i.
»U. 8. Census Bulletin (or 1890.
^Canada Iml. Air. Rep. for 1888.
y
WAHIIOAN-WKITSI'KKAN KAMIUKH.
lai
A(|UHIIliHll.
Krllirllith.
ClnWctsllH.
iltiilt/.iik.
Hiusliilhi.
KuktiiiititsiM.
PHl.NC'IFAI. II,\RI.T/.I K THIUICa.
Ki'iniauottituh.
Kwakiiitl.
Kwiisliillit.
Likwiltdli.
Miitiiuli'iliikitish,
Miitcl|iii.
Niikwalitoh.
Niiwiti.
Niinkisli.
QllUtNitlM.
THilWHililintl.
I'i>liiiliitii)ii. 'riifi'iMin' I.NliHdf flic lliii'll/.iikiliviHioiKif tlin riiiiiily
iiii<lt'i'tlu> Kw iwkowltli AKi'iicy, HritiHli(!(»liiriil>iii. Of tl»«Bflliin»>lu
(SiiliMlimi fiiiiiily) mill Hiu'llziik, nl' tlu'pi't'scnl rmnily. Ilicifiii'i' •.'.rinii
wlm lire not uudor iiguiila. No Hojnimto coiisuhoI' tin- liitton-xiMtf* iit
proHciit.
WASHOAN FAMILY.
^ Wnnhn, Oiitschi't In Msijt. Am. Hint., 'iXt, \\,t\1, IMH'J.
<HIi(>mIioii(', Kcanc. Apii. HliinfiinrH Coiiip. (O'lit. and H<i, Am.), 477, 1H7N (contaiiiH
VViihIkh'k). •
< Hniikt', KeiilU', iliiil. (.Same iih HIiuhIioiu-, iiImivc.)
TluH family \h ri'pn'HoiittMl by u sliifflts well known tril)i', wluwo
raiiK'* t'xtiMiilt'il fi'oiu |{i'iio, on the line of tlm Central Pacitiir Rail-
road, to tho lower end of the CJarson V'alley.
On tlu) ba.siH of voeabnIarieH oldained liy Stephen Powers and
other invest i>j[ators. Mr. (latHchet was the lirsti to formally separate
the lanKniiKe. The neighborhood of Carson is now tho chief seat
of the tribe, and here and in the neiKhl>orinK vallfys there are about
'iOO living a purasitic life about the ranches and towns.
WEITSPKKAN KAMII,V.
=:\VeitH-|)ek.(}il>l>K iti .Schoolcraft, Ind. TrilHw, ni,4a3, IM.'i!} (a band anil Inngnafro
on Klamatli at Junction of Trinity). I>atham, Kl. ('omp. l'lill.,4IU, IHiVi (Junc-
tion of IClainatl ami Trinity KivcrN). Oatwlict in Mii)j;. .Vm. IliHt., lll.<), ls77
(attirincd to Im> diHtinct from any imiKliburiuK tiingiu-)- OatHchet in Iti'acli. Ind.
MiHc.,4:l^;, 1H77.
< WcitH|)ek, l^itliam in Trans. I'hiloloK. Hoc. I^)nd., 77, lrt,"itl (Junction of KlamatI
and Trinity Kivers; Woyot and Wisliosk dialci-ts). Ijatliam, Opuscula, U4;l,
18«0.
= KuriM'H, Powers in Overland Monthly, vni, .'i*), Juni', 1H72 (of the Lower Klamath
and coaHtwiw; WeitwiK-k, a village of).
= KuroU, (Jatschet in Mat;. Am. Hi.st., lf):t. IH77. (iatHiihet in B«'ach, Ind. Misc.,
4!t7, IK77.
= Yu-rok, Powers in Cent. N. A. Eth..ni, 4.5, 1877 (from Junction of Trinity to
mouth and coastwise). Powell, ibid., 4(10 (viM-alw. of Al-i-kwa. Klamath. Yit -ink.)
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's ( 'omp. (Cent, and Ho. Am.), 47.'», lH7M(Kur<H's
lieloUK here).
Derivation: Weitspek is the name of a tribe or village of tho
family situated on Klamath River. The (jtytiiology is unknown.
Gibbs was the first to employ this name, which ho did in is.w, us
fl
)
132
INDIAN MNoriSTIC KAMIMES,
aliovc cited. He stiitos thiit it is " tlio iiiiint' of the principal hand
on the Kliini.-itli, at tiio junction of the Trinity," adding that " tliis
ian^uaj^c pr('vail>< from a few miles ahove tliat jjoiiit to the coast, hut
does not extend far fi'om the river on eitiier side." It wouhl thus
8oem (dear tliat in this case, as in several others, he selected the name
of a band to apply to the lan'^nage spoken hy it. The language thus
detined has been accepted as distinct by later authorities excejtt La-
tl'.am. who included as dialects under the Weitspek language, the
locality of which he gives as the junction of the Klamath and Trinity
Rivers, the Weyot and Wishosk. both of which are now classed under
the Wishoskan family.
By the Karok these tribes are called Yurok. "down" or "below,"
by which name the family has recently been known.
OEOQRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
For our knowledge of the range of the tribes of this family we are
chiefly indebted to Stephen Powers.' The tribes occupy the lower
Klamath River, Oregon, from the mouth of the Trinity down. Ujjon
the coast, Weitspekan territory extends from Gold Bluff to about G
mil( s above the mouth of the Klamath. The Chilhila are an offshoot
of the Weitspek, living to the south of them, along Redwood Creek
to a point about 20 miles inland and from Gold Bluff to a point
about midway between Little and Mad Rivers.
PRINliPAL TRIBES.
Chillula Redwood Creek.
Mita. Klamath Riv .
Pekwau, Klamath River.
Rikwa. Regua. fishing village at outlet of Klamath River.
Sugon, Shragoin, Klamath River.
Weitspek, Klamath River (above Big Bend).
WISHO.SK AN FAMILY.
> Wisli-osk. Oibl)s in Hclioolcraft, Inil. Triltes, in, 422, \S!)'i (given as the name of a
dialect on rtud Rivi'i'and HiinilHildt Bay).
=i Wi.sh-oBlc. Powell i:i Cont. N. A. Eth., Ill, 478, 1H77 (vcK'aldiiaries of Wish-osk,
Wi-yot, and Ko-wilth). (Jat.sclu't in Mag. Am. Hiat., 102, 1877 (indicates area
occupied hy family). (Jatscliet in Beacli. Ind. Misc., 437. 1877.
> Wee-yot, Gibb.s in ScluK)lcraft, Ind. TriU'w. in, 422, 1858 (given ns the name of a
diale<'t on Eel River and HumlMjldt Bay).
X Weits|)ek, Iiatliam in Tran.s. Pliilolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 18.")6 (includes Weyot and
Wishosk). Liitham, Opuscula, 343, 1800.
<Klui'i.Uh, Keane, App. Stanford's Coinp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 475. 1878 (cited as
including Patawats, Weeyot«, Wisliosks).
Derivation: Wish-osk is the name given to the Bay and Mad River
Indians by those of Eel River.
POWELL.]
WISIIOSKAN-YAKONAN KAMI I.IKS.
VMi
This is a small ii.i;;l ohstuiro liiif^uistio family and Httlo is known
concerning tho dialects composing it or of the trihcs which speak it.
Gii)hs' mentions Wee-yot and Wisli-osk as dialects of a general
language extending "from Cape Men(h)cino to Mad River and as far
l)ack into the interic^r as the foot of the first range of mountains,"
hut does not distinguish the language hy a family mime.
Latham considered Weyot and Wishosk to he mere diah^cts of the
.same language, i. e., tiie Weitspek, from which, however, tlioy a})-
])eared to him to differ much more than they do from eacli other.
Both Powell and Gatschet have treated the language represented hy
these dialects as (juite distinct from any other, and hoth have em-
ployed the saine name.
OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The area occupied hy the ti'il)es speaking dialects of this language
was the coast from a little helow the mouth of Eel River to a little
north of Mad River, including particularly the country ahout
Humholdt Bay. They also extended up the above-named rivers into
the mountain passes.
TRIBES.
Patawat, Lower Mad River and Humi)oldt Bay as far south as
Areata.
Weeyot, moutli of Eel River.
Wisliosk, near moutli of Mad River and north part of Humboldt
Bay.
YAKONAN FAMILY.
> Yakoiu'H. Hiile in U. S. E.xpl. Exp., VI, 198.^18, 1846 (or lakon, coast of Oregon).
Busfhmann.Hpuri'n tier nztek.Sprai'lie.ttlS, IS.'iU.
> lakon. Hale in VJ. 8. Expl. Exp,, Vl, ai8. ntm. 184B (or Lower Killaiuuks). Busch-
niann.Spuren tier uztck.Hpraclii'.OlS, ISoU.
>Jacon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth.Soc.,lI,pt. l,o,77, 1848.
>Jakon,Oallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. S<x'.. ll, pt. 1, 17, 1848. BerghauR (18.')l),
Physik. Atlas, map 17, IS.VJ. (Jallatin in S('h<M)Icratt. Ind, Tribes, in, 403,
IS,")!! (laiignai.Ct' of I-owcr Killanmks). Latham in Trans. Philolog. fSoc.Loml.,
TD.IS.K). Latham, Opiiscnla, WO, 18«0.
> Yakon, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 834. 1850. ({atschet. in Mag. \m. Hist.. 1««, 1877.
(iatwhet iM Beach, Intl. Misc. , 441 . 1877. Rincroft, Nat. liaces, in, 505, 040, 1883.
> Yi'ikona. (iatsohet in Mag. Am. Hist., 356, 1883.
> Southern Killamuks, Hale in U. S. Exjil. E.<p., vi, 318, ,569, 1840 (or Yakones). Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Eth. Hoe., ii, 17, 1848 (after Hale).
>Siul Killamuk.BerghaiiK (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 18,52.
> Hainstskla, Latham, Nat. Hist. M'ln, 835, 1850 (" south of the Yakon, between the
Umkwa and the sea").
> Sayuskla. ( latstihet in Mag. Am. Hist. , 357, 1883 (on Lower Um|Hiua, Bayuskla, and
Smith Rivers).
> Killiwiuihat, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (" mouth of the Umkwa").
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's C'oiup. (Cent, and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as in-
cluding Yacons).
' Schoolcraft, lud. Tribes, 185a, vol. 3, p. 433.
134
INDIAN LINGUISIIO KAMIMKS.
ill
< 1
l|i'
Derivation: From yakwina, signifying "spirit " (Everette).
Tlie Yaltwina wastiie leading tribe of this family. It mnst iiave
been of importance in early (Lays, as it occupied fifty-six villages
along YiKiuina River, from the site of Elk City down tc; the ocean.
Only a few survive, and they are with the Alsea on the Siletz Reser-
vation, Tillamook Countv, Oregon. They were classed l)y mistake
with the Tillamook or "Killamucks" by Lewis and Clarke. They are
called by Lewis and Clarke' Youikcones and Youkone.'
The Alsea fornKM-ly dwelt in villages along both sides of Alsea
River, Oregon, and on the adjacent coast. They are now on the
Siletz Reservation, Oregon. Perhaps a few are on the Grande Ronde
Reservation, Ore;.' n.
The Siuslaw used to inhabit villages on the Siuslaw River. Oregon.
There may be a few pure Siuslaw on the Siletz Reservation, but Mi'.
Dorsey did not .see any of them. They are mentioned by Drew,' who
includes them among the " Kat-la-wot-sett" bands. At that time,
they were still on the Siuslaw River. The Kn-itc or Lower
Umpqua villages were on both sides of the lower i)art of Umpqna
River, Oregon, from its mouth upward for about ;(0 miles. Above
them were the Upper Umpqua vilhiges, of the Athapascan stock.
A few members of the Ku-itc still reside on the Siletz Reservation,
Oregon. ,
This is a family based l)y Hale uixni a single tribe, numbering
six or seven hundred, who live on the coast, north of theNsietsliawus,
from whom they differ merely in language. Hale calls the tribe
lakon or Ytakones or Southern Killanuiks.
The Sayusklan language has ustuiUy been .assumed to be distinct
from all others, and the comments of Latham and others all tend in
this direction. Mr. Gatschet, as above (]uoted. tinally classed it as a
distini't stock, at the same time finding certain strong coincidences
with the Yakonan family. Recently Mr. Dorsey has collected exten-
sive vocabularies of the Yakonan, Sayiiskla, and Lowei' Umpqua
languages and finds uncjuestioned evidence of relationshij).
OEOQRAPIIIC DISTRIBUTION.
The family consists of four primary divisions or tribes: Yakwina,
Alsea. Siuslaw, and Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua. Each one of these
comprised many villages, which were stretched along the western
part of Oi'egon <>ii the rivers flowing into the Pacific, from the
Yaquina on the north down to and including the Umpqua River.
TRIBES.
Alsea (on Alseya River).
' Allen, ed. 1S14. vol. a, p. 473.
' Ibid., |). nx.
Yakwina.
Kuitc.
Siuslaw.
» U. S. Iiul. Air. Kept., 1857. p. 359.
fl
I'OWELL.]
YANAN-Yt'KIAX FAMIMKS.
13-)
Population. — The U. S. Census Bulletin for 1800 mentions tliirty-
one tribes as resident on tli(! Siletz Reservation with a eonihined
population of 571. How many Yukwina are among this niimher is
not known. The breaking down of tribal distinetions by reason of
the extensive intermarriage of the several tribes is given as the
reason for the failure to give a census by tribes.
YANAN FAMILY.
=N(')-zi, Powers in Cont. X. A. Eth., ni, 275, 1877 (or No-ni; tnention of tril)e; Rives
numerals and states they are different from anj' he has found in California).
-Noces, OatschetinMag. Am. Hist., 160, March, 1877 (or Nozes; merely mentioned
under Meidoo family).
Derivation: Yana means "people" in the Yanan language.
In 1880 Powell collected a short vocabulary from this tribe,
which is chiefly known to the settlers by the name Noje or N"ozi,
Judged by this vocabulary the language seemed to be distinct from
any other. More recently, in 1884, Mr. Curtin visited the remnants
of the tribe, consisting of thirty-live individuals, and obtained an
extensive collection of words, the stwly of which seems to confirm
the impressi(jn of the isolateil i)osition of the lai\guage as regards
other American tongues.
The Nozi seem to have l)een a small tribe ever since known to
Europeans. They have a tradition to the effect that they came to
California from the far East. Powers states that they differ markedly
in physical traits from all California tribes met i)y him. At present
the Nozi are reduced to two little groups, one at Redding, the other
in their original country at Round Mountain, California.
OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The eastern boundary of the Yanan territory is formed by a
range of mountains a little west of Lassen Butte and terminating
near Pit River; the northern boundary l)y a line running from
northeast to southwest, pa.ssing near the northern side of Round
Mountain. 3 miles from Pit River. The western boundary from
Redding southward is on an average 10 miles to the east of the Sac-
ramento. North of Redding it averages doul)lc that distance or
about ^0 miles.
VrKIAX KAMIF,Y.
— Yuki, Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth., in, 125-188, 1877 (general description of tril)e).
— Yi'i-ki, Powell in ibid., 483 (vfK'abs. of Yu'-ki, Hfichnom, and a fourth unname<l
vocahulary ).
=Yuka, Powers in Overland Montldy, IX, 305, Oct., 1872 (same asalwve). Oatschet
in Mag. Am. Hist., Kll, 1877 (dcfiiu's habitat of family: gives Yuka, Ashochi'mies
or Wa|)l«is. Shumeias. Tahtoos). (tatschet in neach, Ind. Misc., 4:!5, 1S77. Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, ill, 5(16, 1882 ( includes Yuka, Tahtix), Wai>o or Ashochemie).
r
136
IXniAN LINOI'ISTK' I AMIMKS.
=Uka, Oatschet in lliij;. Am. Hist., 101, 1877. (Jatschot in Beach, Ind.Misc., 4*5,
ltt77 (same ii.s his Vulia).
xKIainatli, Kcuih'. App. SUiiifoni's Coinp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (Yukas of
liis Klaniatli Ix'lonK liere).
Deiiviitioii: From tlii^ Wiutiui word yuki, meaning "stranger;"
secondarily, "bad" or "tliioving."
A vuoahu'ary of the Yuki tribe i.s given by Gibbs in vol. iii of
Schooloraft's Indian Tribes, 185:{, but no indication is afforded that
tlie hinguage is of a distinct stock.
Powell, .as above cited, ai)i)ears to have been the fir.st to separate
the language.
OEOORAPHIC DISTRIBUTtON.
Round Valley, California, subseciuently made a reservation to re-
ceive the Yuki and other tribes, was fcjrnierly the chief seat of the
tribes of the family, but they also extended across the mountains to
the coast.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Ashochiini (near Healdsburgh).
Chumaya (Middle Eel River).
Napa (upper Napa Valley).
Tatu (Potter Valley).
Yuki (Round Valley, California).
VUMAN FAMILY.
>Yiiina, Turner in Pac. R. R. Kep., in, pt. it, .W, 94, 101, IS.'se (includes Cuchan, Coco-
Maricopa. Mo j a vc, Dit'neflo). Latham in Trans. Philoloi.;. Sm;. Lond., 8B. 1858.
Latham, Opuscula, iVil, 1800 (as altwve). Latham in addenihi to Opusi'uhi, 393,
18«0 (adds Cuchan to the group;. LaHiani, El. Comp. Pliil., 420, 1883 (includes
Cuchan, Cocomaricopa, Mojave, Dieguiio). (latschet in Mag. Am. Hist., LW,
1877 (mentions only U.S. menilM'rs of family). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp.
(Cent, and So.Am.), 480, 479, 1878(influ(les Ynmns, Maricopas, Cuchans, Mojaves,
Yampais, Yavipais. Hualpais). Bancroft, Nnt. Races, ni, .")89, 1883.
=Yunia, (latscliel in Hcach. Iiid.Misc.. 439,1877 (habitat and dialects of family).
Oatschet in U.S.Geog.Surv. W. 100th M.. vn.4ia,414, 1879.
>Uieguno, Latham (18.")3)in Proc. Philolog.St)c. Lond., vi, 7.">, 18.")4 (includes mission
of San Diego, Dieguno, CotM)maricopas, Cuchail, Yumas, AmacpUKiuas.)
>C4X"himi. Ijiitham in Trans. Philolog. H<k\ Ijond., 87, IS.W (northern part j)eninsula
California). Busdnnann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 471, 18.")9 (center of
California {)eninsuhi). Latham, Opuscula, :{.'>:). 1880. Latham, El. Comp. Phil.,
428. 1863. Orozco y Bcrra. (ieografia de las Lenguas de Mexico, map, 1884.
Keane, Ajjp. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 470, 1878 (head of (iulf to
near Ix)reto).
>Layamon, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 18.18 (a dialect of Waikur ?).
Uitham, Opu.scula, .'WH, 1880. Fjitham.El.Comp. Phil.. 43:i, 1883.
>Waikur, Ljithani in Trans. Philolog. Soc. I^md., iM), 18.j8 (several dialects of).
Latham. Opu.-)cula, 35;), 1800. Latham, El. Comp. Phil.. 43i), 1883.
>(iimycura. Orozco y Berra.Cieograffu de las I.enguas de Mc.xico, map. 1884,
>(F>iaicuri, Keane, App. Stanford's ('omp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 470, 1 878 (l»et ween
38th and 3;t<l parallels).
n)WKLL.]
YUMAN FAMILY.
I.'IT
>Ushiti, Liitlmin in Trans. I'liiloJo)?. Hoc. Loud., HH, 185(5 (perhaps a dialect of Wai-
kur). Liitliaiii, Opuscula. ;ir);i, IHdO.
>UtHliiti. Uithaui, El.CVnip. Pliil., -iaa, 1802 (same a-s Ushiti).
>Pericu, Liitliaiii in Trans. PliiloloR.ScK'. LoncL, H8, 1H.5(i. Ijithani, Opuscula. ;t.")3,
18H0. Orozco y Bcrru, Cii'()>;rafia de lius LenKUits ilc Me.xico, map, 1H(U.
>Pericui, Keane, Apj). fStaiifords ( 'omp. (Cent. and So. Am. ), 476, 1878 (from 'Hi N.
L. to Cape 8. Luuatt and islands).
>Seri, Oatschet in Zeitschr. fur Ethnologie, xv, 129, 188it,and xviii, U,"), 1W8.
Derivation: A Cuch;ui word signifying "sons of the river"
(Whipple).
In 1850 Turner a(lopte<l Yuina as a fainiiy name, and placed under
it Cuchuii, Coco-Marii'opa, Mojave and Diegono.
Three years previously (1853) Latham' speaks of the Ditguno lan-
guage, and discusses with it several others, viz, San Diego C'Dcomari-
copa, Cuchafi, Yuma. Amaquaqua (Mohave), etc. Tlunigh he seems
to consider these languages as allied, ho gives no indication that he
believes them to collectively represent a fauiily, and he made no
formal family division. The context is not, however, sufficiently
clear to render his position with respect to their exact status as [)re-
cise as is to be desired, but it is tolerably certain that he did not
mean to make Diegueflo a family name, for in the volume of the
same society for 1850 he includes both the Diegueflo and the otiier
above mentioned tribes in the Yuma family, which is here fully set
forth. As he makes no allusion to havini I'eviously established a
family name for the same group of langi. ^es, it seems pretty cer-
tain that he did not do so, and that the term Diegueflo as a family
name may be eliminated from conside"ation. It thus appears that
the family name Yuma was i)ropo.sed by both the above authors dur-
ing the same year. For, though part :! of vol. iii of Pacific Railroad
Reports, in which Turner's article is published, is dated 1855. it ap-
pears from .'i foot-note (p. 84) that his i)ai)er was ,.ot handed to Mr.
Whipple till January, 1850, the date of title page of volume, and
that his proof was going througli the press during the month of
May, which is the month (May !)) that Latham's paper was read be-
fore the Pliilological Scjciety. The fact that Latham's article was not
read until May enables us to establish priority of publication in
favor of Turner with a reasonable degree of certainty, as doubtless
a considerable period elajised between the presentation of Latham's
paper to the society and its final publication, upon which latter
must rest its claim. The Yuma of Turner is therefore ai' .pted as
of precise date and of undoubted application. Pinientel makes
Yuma a part of Piman stock.
OEOOHAPHIC DISTniBUTION,
The center of distribution of the tribes of this family is generally
considered to be the lower Colorado and Gila Valleys. At least tliis
' Proc-. Lcmdon PJiilol. Sue., vol. 0, 75, 1854.
las
INPfAN UNfJiriSTir FAMIMKS.
I;i.
is tho region whoro tlioy attiiim'd tlicii' liijjht'st pliyHical and montiil
<lfV('l()i)in»'nt. VVitli tlic exception .>f certain small areas jtossessed
by Sliosiionean triiies. Indians of Ynnian stock occnpied the Colo-
rado River from its mouth as far u\> as t'ataract CriM^k where dwell
the HaA'asupai. Upon the (}ila and its tril)utaries they extended as
far east as the Tonto Rasin. From this center tluty extench'd west
to the Pacific and on the scmth thron^hoiit the ))eninsula of Lower
California. The mission of San Luis Rey in California was, when
established, in Yuman territory, and nuirks the northern limit of
the family. More recently and at tlie present time this locality is
in possession of Shoshonean tribes.
The island of Angel dt^ la Gimrdiaaud Tiburon Island were occu-
pied by tribes of the Yuman family, as also was a small section of
Me.\ieo lying ou the gulf to the north of (Juaymas.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Cocliimi. • Mill 'copa.
Cocopa. Mohave.
Cuchan or Yuma proper. Seri.
Diegueilo. Waicuni.
Havasupai. Walaj)ai.
Populntioii. — The present population of these tribes, as given in
Indian Att'airs Re])ort for 1H8!(, and the U. S. Census Bulletin for
18!((l. is as follows:
Of the Yuma proper there are 007 in California attadied to the
Mission Agency and •i!)l at the San Carlos Agency in Arizona.
Mohave. tiiO at the Colorado River Agency in Arizona ; T'lU under
the San Carlos Agency ; -tOd in Arizona not under an agency.
Havasupai, 2li in Cosiuno Canon. Arizona.
Walapai, 7'iii in Arizona, chiefly along the Colorado.
Dieguefio, fi55 under the Mi.ssion Agency, California.
Maricojia, 'M-'t at the Pinm Agency, Arizona.
The jxipulation of the Yuman tribes in Mexico and Lower Cali-
fornia is unknown.
ZUSlAN FAMILY.
= Zufti, Turner in Pae. R. R. R('|).,m. pt. 3, Tm, 01-93. 1856 (flmlKno rndicnl affinity
l)et\vi't'n Ziiili and Kcres). Hiisclunanii, Ncu-Me.xico, 254, 266, 276-2TS. 280-2!«i.
'M'i. 18.5H (vocalw. and f^ciifral rnferences). K<'H1U'. App. Stanford's ( 'oin. (I 'ent.
and 8<). Am.), 47i>, IMTSCastook lanxuaf;"'"). Powell in ii(K;ky Mountain Pres-
liyterian. Nov.. 1S78 (ineludeN Zufli, I^as Nutriiis, Ojo do Pescado). Oatschet in
MaK. Am. frist., mi 188.'.
= Zufiian. Powell in Am. Nat.. 604, August. 1880.
Derivation: From the Cocliiti term Suiiiyi. saiil to mean "the
people of the long n.iils," referring to tho surgeons of Zuili who
always wear some of their nails very long (Cnshing).
Turnei' was able to com])are the Zuni language with the Kei'an,
and his cfjuclusion that they were entirely distinct has been fully
PIIWKLL.)
(•(•N(Xri)IN<J KKMAUKS.
1«9
HubHtantiatpil. Turner had vocabularies collected by Lieut. SiinjJMoii
and by ('apt. Eaton, and also one (•<jllected l)y LitMit. Wbi|)ple.
Tiie small amount of linguistic nnit>'rial accessible to tlieeai'lier
writei's u.'counts for the littb^ done in tlic way of classifying the
Pueblo languages. Latham possessed vo''abularies of the Moqui,
Zuni, A'coniaor Laguna, Jeniez. Tesu([ue. and Taos or Picuri. The
atlinityof theTu.sayan (Moijui) tongue NS'ith the Comanche and other
Shoshonean languages early attracted attention, anil Latiiam pointed
it out with sonu' particnilarity. With the other Pueblo languages he
does little, and attempts no classification into stocks.
OEOORAPHU; DISTRIBCTION.
The Zufli occupy but a smgle permanent pueblo, on tlie Zufii
River, westei'u New Mexico. Recently, however, tia^ sununcr vil-
lages of Trdakwin. Heshotatsina. and K'iai)kwainakwin have been
occupied by a few families during the entire year.
Populatiiiii. — The present i)opulatiou is l.tillj.
CONCLUDING REMARKS.
The task involved in the foregoing classiticatiou has been accom-
plished by intermittent labors extending through more than twenty
years of tinu'. Many thousand i)rinted vocabularies, embracing
numerous large!' k-xic and grammatic works, have been studied and
compared. In addition to the printeil material, a very large body of
manuscript matter has been u.sed, which is now in the archives of
the Bureau of Ethnology, and which, it is hoped, will lUtimatelybe
published. The authoi' does not desire that his work shall be con-
sidered final, but rather as initiatory and tentative. Tlie task of
studying many hundreds of languages and deriving therefrom ulti-
nuite conclusions as contributions to the science of philology is oiie
of great magnitude, and in its accomplishment an army c)f scholars
mu.st be employed. The wealth of this promised harvest appeals
strongly t(j the scholars of Amei-ica for systematic and patient lai)or.
The languages are many and greatly diverse in their characteristics,
in grammatic as well as in lexic elements. The author believes it is
safe to atlirm that the philosophy of language is some time to be
greatly enriched from this s(jurce. From the materials which have
been and may be gathered in this field the evolution of language can
be studied from an early form, wherein words are usually not parts
of spec'li. to a form where the parts of speech are somewhat differ-
entiated ; and where the growth of gender, number, and case systems,
together with the develoi)ment of tense and mode systems can be
observeil. The evolution of mind in the endeavor to ex[)ressthr)Ught,
by coining, combining, and contracting words and by oi'ganizing
logical sentences through the develo})ment of parts of speech and
140
INDIAN I-IN(JI'ISTir KAMILIKS.
i il
tlu'ir syntactic lUTangomimt, is iihiiiuliintiy illuHtratod. Tiio lau-
fi^uaj^t's ai-t' vt'i'v iin(>(iually dt-vi'ldpcd in tlicir scvoral parts. Low
goiidt'i" systt'iiis appi'ur with liiwli ti'iisc systems, hiyldy (evolved case
systt'ins witii sli^litiy devt'lopcd iiiodc systems; and liitjrtt is scarcely
any one of these lan;;na^es. so far as tliey liave lieen studied, wiiidi
does not exluhit aiH'haic devices in its grammar.
Tlie antiidr has delayed the present puhlication soniowiiat, expect-
ing to sMppleiiient it with .another paper on the characteristics of
those languages which luivo been most fully recorded, but sucli sup-
plementary paper has already grown too large foi- this place and is
yet unfinished, while the ntn-essity for speedy publication of the
present results seems to be imperative. The needs of the Bureau of
Ethnology, in directing the work of the linguists employed in it, and
especially in securing and organi/.ing the labor of a large body of
collal)orators throughout the country, call for this publication at the
present time.
In arranging the scheme of linguistic families the author has pro-
ceeded very (!onservativ(>ly. Again and again languages have been
thrown together as constituting one family and afterwards have been
separated, while other languages at first deemed unrelated have
ultimately been cond)ined in one stock. Notwithstanding all this
care, there remain a number of doubtful cases. For example, Busch-
mann has thrown the Shoshonean and Nahnatlan families into one.
Now the Shoshonean languages an* those best known to the author,
and with some of them he has a tolerable s])eaking acquaintance.
The evidence brought foi-ward by Buschnumn and others seems to
he doubtful. A part is derived from jargon words, another part
from adventitious similarities, while some facts seem to give war-
rant to the conclusion that they should bo considered as one stock,
but the author prefers, under the present state of knowledge, to liold
them ai)art and await further evidence, being inclined to the opinion
that the peoples speaking these languages have borrowed some part
of their vocabularies from one another.
After considering the subject with such materials as are on hand,
this general conclusion has been reached: That borrowed materials
exist in all the languages; and that some of these borrowed materials
can be traced to original sources, while the larger {)art of such acipiisi-
tions can not be thus relegated to known families. In fact, it is be-
lieved that the existing languages, great in number though they are,
give evidence of a more primitive condition, when a far greater num-
ber were spoken. When there are two or more languages of the same
stock, it appears that this differentiation into diver.se tongues is due
mainly to the absorption of other nuiterial, and that thus themidtipli-
cation of dialects and languages of the same grouj) fxirnislies evidence
that at some prior time there existed other languages which are now
lost except as they are partially preservetl in tln^ divergent elements
of the group. The conclusion which has been reached, therefore, does
ruwiix.]
<'(»NCMn>IN<» UKMAKKS.
141
not accord witli tlio hypotlu'sis uiion whicli tho invt'sti'gatiou begun,
namely, that coininon elonionts would be discovered in all these
languagoH, for tiio longer tlio study has proceeded the inore cioar it
has been made to apijoar that the grand process of linguistic devel-
opment among the tribes of North America has been toward unifi-
cation rather than toward multiplication, that is, that the multiplied
languages of the same stock owe their origin veiy largely to absorl)ed
languages that are lost. The data upon which this conclusion has
been reached can not here be sot forth, but the hopt^ is entertaiiuxl
that the facts already collected may ultinuitely be marshaled in such
a manner that philologists will be able to weigh the evidence and
estinuite it for what it nniy be worth.
The opinion that the differentiation of languages within a single
stock is mainly duo to the absorption of materials from other stocks,
often to tho extinguishment of tho latter, has grown from year to
year as the investigation has ])roceeded. Wherever the material has
been sufficient to warrant a conclr.sion on this subject, no language
has been foinid to be simple in its origin, but every language has
been found to bo composed of diverse elements. Tho processes of
borrowing known in historic times are those which have been at work
in prehistoric times, and it is not jjrobable that any simple language
derived from some single pristine grouj) of roots can l)e discovered.
There is an opinion current that tho lower languages change witli
great rapidity, and that, by reaaon of this, dialects and languages
of the same stock are speedily differentiated. This widely spread
oi)inion does not find warrant in the facts discovered in the course
of this reseai'ch. The author has everywhere been impressed with
the fact that savage tongues are singularly persistent, and that a
language which is dependent for its existence upon oral tradition is
not easily modified. Tho same words in the same form are repeated
from generation to generation, so that lexic and gramnnxtic elements
liave a life that changes very slowly. This is especially true where
the habitat of tho tribe is unchanged. Migration introduces a potent
agency of mutation, but a new environment impresses its character-
istics upon a language more by a change in the somatic content or
meaning of words than by change in their forms. There is another
agency of change of profound influence, namely, association with
other tongues. When peoples are absorbed by peaceful or militant
agencies new materials are brought into tlieir language, and the
affiliation of such matter seems to be the chief factor in the differ-
entiation of languages within the same stock. In the presence of
opinions that have slowly grown in this direction, the author is
inclined to think that some of the groujjs herein recognized as fam-
ilies will ultimately be divided, as the common materials of such
languages, when they are more thoroughly studied, will be seen to
have been borrowed.
142
INDIAN MNCM'IWTKJ KAMIMKH.
In tho studies which liavo boon niinK' an |)roiiiiiinary to this pivpor,
I havo had groat assistaiu'o from Mr. James ('. Pilling and Mr. Henry
W. Hensliaw. Mr. I'liling l)egan l)y proparinK a list of i)apers used
by nui, l)ut his worii hasdovoh)p(Mi until it assumes the |)roportions
of a great bibliographic research, and already he has publislied live
bibliographies, amounting in all tu about I, '•{()() pages. He is pub-
lishing this bibliographic material by linguistic families, asdassitied
by myself in this paper. Scholars in this ti(<ld of research will find
their labors greatly abridged by the work of Mr. Pilling. Mr. Hen-
shaw began the preparation of the list of tribes, but his work also has
developed into an elaborate system of research into the synonymy of
the North American tribes, and when hiu work is published it will
constitute a great and valuable contribution to the subject. The
pre.sent pajwr is l)ut a preface to the works of Mr. Pilling and Mr.
Henshaw, and would have been published in form as such had not
their publications assunu^l such proportions as to i)rocIiide it. And
ftnally. it is needful to say that I could not have found the time to
make this classification, imperfect as it is, except with the aid of the
great labors of tho gentlemen mentioned, for they have gathered
the literature and bnnight it reatly to my hand. For the classifica-
tion itself, however, I am wholly responsihh*.
I am also indebted to Mr. Albert S. Gatschet and Mr. J. Owen
Dorsey for the preparation of many comparative lists necessary to
my work.
The task of preparing the map accompanying this paper was
greatly facilitated by the previously published map of Gallatin. I
am especially indebted to Col. Garrick Mallery for work done in
the early part of its j)reparation in this form. I have also received
assistance from Messrs. Gatschet, Dorsey, Mooney and Curtin. The
final form which it has taken is largely due to the labors of Mr.
Henshaw, wlio has gathered many important facts relating to the
habitat of North American tribes while preparing a synonymy of
tribal uameu.